Bid Volume - II Sec Vii Ted-151

SPECIFICATIONS
Supply of material and Erection, testing and commissioning of new 11 kV lines, New DTs, LT lines for release of BPL beneficiary connections under Rajiv Gandhi Grameen Vidyutikaran Yojana (RGGVY) on turnkey basis in Faridabad District under the jurisdiction of DHBVN.
VOLUME II
SECTION VII
BID NO. P&D/TED 151/2012
DAKSHIN HARYANA BIJLI VITRAN NIGAM HISAR
Jan -2012
BID VOLUME-II SEC VII TED-150
INDEX
VOLUME II SECTION DESCRIPTION Technical Specifications PAGE NO.
VII A, B & C
VII D
Drawings
SECTION VII-A
1. Introduction
The scope of this specification covers construction of new 11 kV lines, New DTs, LT lines for release of BPL beneficiary connections under Rajiv Gandhi Grameen Vidyutikaran Yojana (RGGVY) on turnkey basis in Faridabad District under the jurisdiction of DHBVN.
1.1
Scope : The scope of work shall include complete engineering of the Lines as per design, given in the tender documents, manufacture, testing and supply of all the required material on FOR destination/Site basis including transportation, insurance, storage, erection, dismantlement of HT/LT line and other equipment as per site requirement, testing and commissioning of 11 kV lines, New DTs, LT lines for release of BPL beneficiary connections under Rajiv Gandhi Grameen Vidyutikaran Yojana (RGGVY) on turnkey basis in Faridabad District funded by REC under the jurisdiction of DHBVN on turnkey basis. The supply items shall include 9/11 meter long PCC Poles, Base Plates, ACSR conductor, HT XLPE AB cable, 11 kV Disc Insulators with required fittings, 11 kV Pin Insulators with Pins, Single Tension fittings, Stay rods with Elbow, Stay Wires, Earthing rods, Pipe earthing GI wire, LAs, G.O. Switches, PG Clamps, MS Angle iron, MS channel iron, MS Flat including fabrication of Clamps, Suspension clamp, Dead end clamp, 25/16 KVA Three phase distribution T/F ( Only from DHBVN empanelled firms from P&D wing),LT cables, Energy meters ( Only from DHBVN empanelled firms from MM wing), MCB for energy meters, Insulated conductor, Number plate, Danger plate, Phase plate, Drilling, Cutting providing muffing in marshy land and other items as per Schedule of prices. All the other material / job not specifically mentioned but required to complete the work shall also be in the scope of the contractor. The conductor requiring dismantlement shall be dismantled Section wise i.e. from dead end pole to next dead end pole. Shorter lengths of dismantled ACSR without any valid technical reason shall not be accepted. The contractor will complete all the required work under the scope. In addition to the above Load losses at 50% and 100% load of all the transformers received by the Nigam against turnkey works shall be checked at Nigams works by a committee of three officers, one each from OP. Wing, M&P Wing and TRW Workshop. Out of 100 No. T/Fs supplied by the contractor against individual tender enquiry, one T/F shall be opened at Nigams workshop for physical verification of the quality of material used by the manufacturer. This shall be done by the same committee of three officers as mentioned above and lot size of each capacity (in nos.) as provided in the supply order, the entire type test shall be conducted from NABL Lab on 1nos. T/F up to 200 nos. T/F supply order, 2nos. T/F from 201 to 400 nos. T/F supply order, 3 nos. T/F from 401 to 600 nos. T/F supply order and 4nos. T/F
from 600 nos. & above T/F supply order. For the release of BPL connections , the contractor will obtain the list of the BPL connections from the SDO/Op concerned .The contractor will complete all the required work under the scope (All the meters shall be got tested and sealed by the contractor from the DHBVN labs, at their own cost, before their erection at site). The contractor will intimate the SDO/Operation regarding when he/they are starting the work for the release of the BPL connections. Under no circumstances will the contractor undertake the work of release of BPL connections without the prior intimation to the Nodal officer and the SDO/Op Concerned and subsequent permission. NOTE: The contractors will obtain the detailed drawings / sketches of the work involved from the GM/Construction Concerned. The contractor will intimate the XEN/Construction prior to start the work. 1.1.1 This specification also includes the supply of the poles, insulators and their hardware, conductor, earth wire etc. The bidder shall clearly indicate in his offer the sources from where he proposes to procure the raw material / completed material and its components.
1.1.2 Any material not specifically mentioned in the contract but required to complete the job is deemed to be included in the scope of work of the Contractor.
1.1.3 The entire stringing work of the conductor and earth wire shall be carried out by standard practice. The bidder shall indicate in his offer the detailed
description of procedure to be deployed for stringing operation.
1.1.4
Location Details: The line shall be laid in the areas covered under DHBVN in Haryana.
1.2
Details of Line Route and Terrain: The 11 KV Power Lines will be running almost through plain and cultivated area. Preliminary route alignment maps of Power lines covered under this package giving the general topography and major crossings like river, power lines, railway lines and roads are in the bidders scope. Wherever, special river crossings are involved proper strengthening of the normal pole locations will be done by the Contractor.
1.3
Access to the Line and Right of Way: Right of way clearance shall be arranged by employer in accordance with work schedule. Employer will secure way leave and right of way in the forest area.
1.4 1.4.1
Detailed Survey of Optimization Pole Location: The detailed survey for the line route and optimization of the pole location along with profiling shall be carried out by the successful bidder. The
provisional quantity has been indicated in the Bill of Material for each package. 1.4.2 (a) The tentative sketches of the lines / works to be carried out are enclosed with this specification. The detailed survey shall be carried out by the bidder along the approved alignment. The bidder will
examine the site of works and its surroundings and obtain himself, at his own responsibility and expenses, all information regarding general site characteristics, crossings accessibility, infrastructure details etc. The purchaser will, however, assist the interested bidder to see and inspect the site of work. For this purpose the bidders are requested to contact : General Manager, Planning & Design, DHBVN, Vidyut Sadan, Vidyut Nagar, Hisar or the respective DGM (Operation) / AGM(OP) of the area as indicated on sketch. 2 Pole & 4 Pole Structure as per site requirements shall be provided where the situation so demands. Drawings of 2/4 Pole Structure is provided for guidance. (b) Additional H Poles required for Pole Mounting Sub-Station under the existing 11 KV feeders are to be taken care of by the Bidder as per the requirement of Operation Organization.
1.4.3
The bidder should note that the Employer will not furnish the topographical map prepared by survey of India but will make available any assistance that may be required for obtaining topographical map.
1.4.4
Route Marking : At the starting point of the commencement of route survey the peg marking shall be done with iron spikes, driven firmly into the ground. A Benchmark on top section of the angle iron shall be made to indicate the location of the survey instrument. Teakwood peg shall be driven at prominent Position at intervals of not more than 750 meters along the Power line to be surveyed up to the next angle point. At angle position stone / concrete pillar with DHBVN marked on it shall be put firmly on the ground for easy identification.
1.4.5
Pole Locations : With the help of pole spotting data, pole locations shall be marked on the profiles prepared to check the required ground clearances. While locating the poles on the profile sheets the following shall be borne in the mind.
a) Extension: An individual span shall be as near to the normal design span as possible. In case an individual span becomes too short or long with normal supports on account of ground profile, one or both supports of the spans may be extended with standard design or provision of a special structure for the purpose according to technical specifications. The design of such extension shall be prepared & supplied by the Contractor and shall be got approved from the Employer. b) Road Crossings : At all the important road crossings, the protective cradle guarding will be provided and poles shall be fitted with normal tension insulators strings depending upon the location but the ground clearing at the roads at the maximum temperature and in the still air shall be such that even with the conductor broken at adjacent span, the ground clearance of the conductor from the road surface will not be less than 5.125 meter. For road and lines
crossings 11 meter PCC poles (400 Kg.) shall be provided to achieve required clearances. H pole structure on 11 meter PCC poles for road crossings and single 11 meter PCC poles for line crossing shall be provided. c) Railway Crossings : The Contractor will make preliminary survey to assess the requirement of Railway Crossing and take the same into account in his Bid. The work of
Railway Crossings will be got executed by him as a deposit work with the Railways or otherwise as per rules of Railway Department. The Employer will arrange to get the approval from Railway Authorities expedited. The case for approval will be submitted by the Contractor on the behalf of the Employer well in time. d) Power Line Crossings : Wherever the line is to cross over / below the other line of the same voltage or higher or low voltage the requisite clearances will be ensured in accordance with the Indian Electricity Rules. The Contractor shall submit and get
approved from the Employer any special design where required in order to achieve such clearances. e) River Crossing: The route of 11 KV New / Augmented line/LT line if routed through a river bed / mullah or rivulet must have concrete foundation for erection of poles and must be supported by a good number of stay-supports capable to withstand water / wind pressure and must be executed to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer. f) In case the 11 KV U/G cable is to be laid along the Municipal Road / High way, the Contractor will make preliminary survey to assess such requirement and take into account in his Bid. The employer will arrange to get the
approval from the Civic Authorities. However, the case for approval will be submitted by the Contractor on behalf of the employer well in time. 1.4.6 Clearance from Ground, Building, Trees etc.: Clearance from Ground, Building, Trees and Telephone lines shall be provided in conformity with the Indian Electricity Rules 1956. 1.4.7 The tree cutting shall be the responsibility of the Contractor at the time of survey as well as during actual execution. However, the Contractor shall count, mark and put proper Nos. with suitable quality of paint at his own cost on all the trees that are to be cut by him at the time of actual execution of work. Contractor may please be note that the Employer shall not pay any compensation for any loss or damage to the properties or for tree cutting necessitated due to Contractors work. 1.4.8 Any way leave which may be required by the Contractor shall be arranged by the Employer.
1.4.9
To evaluate and tabulate the trees and bushes coming 6.096m on either side of the central alignment of the support, the trees will be numbered and marked with quality paint serially from angle point 1 onwards and corresponding number will be painted on the stem of trees at a height of 1m from ground level. The trees list should contain the following information: a) b) c) Girth (circumference) measured at a height of 1 m from ground level. Approximate height of the tree with an accuracy of +/- 2 mtrs. Name of the type of the species / tree.
1.4.10 The profile sheets duly spotted along with preliminary schedule indicating position of poles, wind span, weight span, angle of deviation, river or road crossings and other details shall be submitted for the approval of the Employer. After approval the, Contractor shall submit six more sets of
approved reports along with one set of reproducible final profile drawings to the Employer for record purpose.
1.5 1.6.1
Environmental Conditions : General Climatic Conditions : The area is in extreme climatic belt. Monsoons are generally active in the area from the month of July to September. The area is also prone to mild dust storms during the months of March to May. The maximum temperature shall be of the order of 50C and minimum temperature shall be of the order of 2C. Normal every day temperature is 32C.
1.7
Technical Data: The bidder shall furnish all technical data as per relevant schedules in five copies.
1.8 1.8.1
Statutory Regulations and Standards : Statutory Regulations: The Contractor is required to follow Statutory Regulations stipulated in Electricity Act 1948 and Indian Electricity Rules 1956 as amended to-date and other local rules and regulations referred to in this specification.
1.8.2
Reference Standards : The work shall be carried out in accordance with specifications & construction standards attached hereto or available with the P&D wing of
DHBVN/Nigams Website.
The codes or standards referred to in this
specification shall govern in all cases wherever such references are made. In case of conflict between such codes or standards and specification, latter shall govern. Such codes or standards referred to shall mean the latest revision, amendments / changes adopted and published by relevant agencies. Other internationally accepted standards, which ensure equivalent or better performance than those specified shall also be accepted. All tested steel
sections shall be supplied conforming to relevant Indian Standard Specifications. 1.9 1.9.1 Quality Assurance, Inspection and Testing : Quality Assurance : The Contractor shall adopt suitable quality assurance programme to control each activity. Such programme shall be outlined by the Contractor and shall be finally accepted by the Employer. 1.9.2 Quality Assurance Document : The Contractor shall be required to sub it all quality assurance documents as stipulated in quality plan at the time of Employers inspection of material. The Employer through his duly authorized representative reserves the right to carry out quality inspection / audit & checks to see the adequacy of the Contractors quality management programme. 1.9.3 Inspection and Testing : The Employer shall inspect the major material i.e. Poles, Conductors, Earth wire, Insulators, Pins, Hardware fittings at the works of supplier before dispatch. The requisite original type test certificates wherever required will be submitted by the Contractor / Supplier at the time of inspection for verification / examination by the Inspector. The material shall not be dispatched without dispatch authorization by the Employer. Other material shall be inspected by the Employer before erection at site. The Employer shall have the right to reinspect at his expenses any material through previously inspection and approved by him at the Contractors / Suppliers works, before / after the same are erected at the site. If following the latter, the material is found defective, then the Contractor shall bear the cost of this inspection and re-instatement according to specifications. The Employer shall get the material inspected from his Engineers or from any other inspection agency at its discretion.
2.0
Technical Parameters of 11 KV Line : Electrical System Data : a) b) c) d) Nominal Voltage Maximum system voltage NIL (Impulse) Power frequency withstand voltage 11 KV 12 KV 75 KV (Peak) 28 KV
3. 3.1 Sr. No. 1 2
Details of line material for 11 KV Line: Particulars of Conductor: Particulars Type Standing and wire diameter in mm Conductor
ACSR 50 mm2 6/3.35(AI) 1/1.35(Steel)6/4.09(AI) 1/ 4.09 (steel) 3 Approximate Mass Kg. Per KM. 214/319 4 Approximate calculated breaking load KN 18.25/26.91 5 Calculated DC resistance at 20oC 0.5560 Ohm/0.3736 Ohm 6 Mass of Zine coating 190 gm.m2 7 Configuration of Conductor Triangular 3.2 Particular of Polymeric Insulator / Disc Insulators: Sr.No. Particulars I-Pole Str. II-Pole Str. 4-Pole Str. 1 No. of Disc Insulators 2 E&M Strength of each Disc 45 45 45 Insulator KN 3 11 KV Polymeric Insulator 3 6 9 3.3 Material for Single / H-Pole/4 Pole Structure
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 PCC Pole 9 Mtr. 1 No. FRP Cross Arm 1 No. M.S.Channel X-Arm (100x50x62200mm) Pole Top Bracket 1 No. Back Clamps 1 No. 11 KV Polymeric Insulator 3 Nos. 11 KV Disc Insulators Guy Sets with stay wire As required Earthing material as per design As required Nuts & Bolts, Pole Clamps As per design MS Flat, 50x50x6mm, 2200mm for 4-Pole &1400mm for H-Pole MS Bracing 50x50x6mm, 3230mm for 4-Pole &2860mm for H-Pole Tension fittings suitable for 30 2 No. 1 No. As required 6 Nos. 6 Nos. 4 Nos. As required As per design 2 Nos. 2 Nos. 6 Nos. 4 No. 5 Nos. As required 9 Nos. 6 Nos. 8 Nos. As required As per design 8 Nos. 8 Nos.
10
14 15 16 17 18
sq.mm conductor C-type wedge connector for 50 sq.mm conductor Eye Screw bolts for earth wire M.S.Angle 50x50x6mm (2400mm) for earth wire. Danger Plate Number Plate
6 Nos.
6 Nos. 6 Nos 4 Nos. 2 Nos. 1 No.
1 No.
1 No.
3.4
Tentative Bill of material for each Package is as per Annexure/Schedule of Prices.
3.5 4. 4.1
Meteorological Data is as per Annexure-II. Bolts , Nuts &Washers : All Bolts and Nuts shall conform to IS:1363-1967 (amended to-date) or equivalent to IES Standard. All Bolts and Nuts shall have Hexagonal head Nuts, the heads being forged out of the solid steel rods and shall be truly pen centric and square with the shank, which must be perfectly straight. Small Nuts & Bolts both shall be fully threaded whereas long bolts shall be partially threaded.
4.2
Steel Items :
All steel items shall be conform to IS:2062 Grade-A (amended
to date) or equivalent to IEC Standard. 5. 5.1 Spares and Clearances: Normal Span : The normal running span of the line shall be approx. 60 Mtrs. For 11 KV Line with ACSR and 40 Mtrs. With AB Cable and 60 Mtr. of LT line in the Cross Country. 5.2 Wind Span : The wind Span is the sum of two half spans adjacent to the support under consideration. For normal horizontal spans this equals to normal running span. 5.3 5.3.1 Electrical Clearances: Ground Clearances: The minimum ground clearances from the bottom conductor shall not be less than 5.125 meter at the maximum sag conditions i.e. at maximum
temperature and still air. Any LT/HT/Telecommunication line falling around of new 11 KV line should have enough clearances as prescribed in I.E. rules applicable in this respect.
11
5.3.2
For river crossing, the minimum electrical clearance including ground clearance will be the same as for normal poles.
5.4
Conductor and Earth Wire Configuration: The three phases shall be in triangular formation. The phase to phase spacing shall not be less than 1.070 Mtr.
6. 6.1
Drawings: The design and drawings submitted by the Contractor shall be
approved/commented by the Employer as the case may be within 20 days of receipt of design/drawings in the office of the Engineer. If the
design/drawings are commented by the Employer, the Contractor shall submit revised design/drawings within 15 days of date of issue of comments. The drawing will also be submitted by the Contractor to the Engineer who will take further necessary action to approve the same or get it approved from the competent authority. 6.2 The Contractor is required to furnish the progress of submissions and approvals of design and drawings on 25th day of every month till the completion of all the design activities. 7. 7.1 Excavation & Erection of Poles: The Pits for the Poles are to be excavated in the direction of the line, as this will facilitate the erection of pole and given internal stability. The depth of the foundations to be excavated for the poles shall be approximately 1/6th of the Poles length. The alignment of the Poles are to be set right and the earthfilling will be done after checking the alignment vertically and earth will be rammed afterwards properly. 7.2 H Poles are to be erected on almost 10th location when the line is going straight and it is also to be provided wherever there is an angle of deviation in the line. When the angle of deviation is >60C, 4 pole structures will be provided. In case of angle H-Pole, the pits are to be excavated along the bisection of the angle of deviation. It will be ensured that the poles are held in vertical position and earth is filled in the pits and proper ramming is done so that pole remains in proper position. On every H-Pole, 4 stays are to be provided along the line i.e. 2 on each direction and in addition two more stays along the bi-section of the angle of deviation are to be provided as required
12
depending upon the site conditions as per the drawings attached with the specifications. 7.3 The stays will be provided at all dead end locations, angle locations and T-Off points and also on normal locations as wind stays to counter the pressure of the winds. Normally every fourth pole of the line shall be provided with two wind stays one on either side of the pole. The angle of the stays will be generally kept on 30 to 45 degrees depending upon the tension and the location of the line. Every stay shall be provided with 11 KV Disc Insulators as per drawing. 7.4 Earthing shall be provided on every 4th pole as per the design attached hereto in addition to the continuous Earth Wire. H-pole structures will be provided with 2 No. earthings. 7.5 Number plate shall be provided on each location indicating the No. of Structure S1, S2 etc. 2 pole and 4 pole structures will be numbered both for structure Nos. as well as H-Pole /4-pole marking. For example if Ist H-pole appear at Structure No. 10, plate will be denoted as S-10/H-1. Similarly, if Ist 4-pole appear at structure No. 25, the same will be denoted by S-25/4P-1 & so on. 7.6 All unpainted /Un-galvanized iron sections like Channel, Angle/Clamps Stay sets etc. shall be given 2 coating of Red Oxide before installation to prevent rusting. provided. 7.7 One set of 11 KV lightning arrestor shall be provided within 3 KM area. 11 KV G.O. Switch shall be provided on the terminal structure near the grid S/Station & at the interconnection point with existing feeder to facilitate the complete isolation of the line. 8. 8.1 Handling of Conductor and Earth Wire: The Contractor shall be entirely responsible for any damage to the poles, insulators and conductors during transportation & stringing. While running out the conductors, care shall be taken that the conductors do not touch or rub against the ground or objects, which could cause scratches or damages to the strands. The conductors shall be run out of the drums from the top in order to avoid damage due to chaffing. To avoid rusting anti-corrosion aluminium paint shall also be
13
8.2
The stringing blocks shall be suspended in a manner to suit the design of the X arms. Proper T&P shall also be made available to the Employer by the Contractor for checking the tensions in the guy wires. The drums shall be provided with a suitable braking device to avoid damages, loose running out and kinking of the conductor. The conductor shall be continuously observed for loose or broken strands or any other damage. When approaching end of a drum length atleast three coils shall be left when the stringing operations are to be stopped. These coils are to be removed carefully and if another length is required to be run, a joint shall be made as per the recommendations of the manufacturers.
8.3
Repairs to Conductors if necessary shall be carried out during the running out operations with repair sleeves. Repairing of Conductors surface shall be done only in case of minor damage scuff marks etc. keeping in view both electrical and mechanical safe requirements. The final conductors shall be cleaned smooth and without any projections, sharp points cuts, abrasions.
8.4
Conductors Splices shall be made so that they do not crack or get damaged in the stringing operations. The Contractor shall use only such
equipment/methods during Conductor stringing which ensures complete compliance in this regard. 8.5 Derricks shall be used where roads, rivers, channels, telecommunications or overhead power line, railway lines, fences or walls have to be crossed during stringing operations. It shall be seen that normal services are not interrupted or damage caused to property. Shut down shall be obtained when working at crossing of overhead power lines as per para 8.8. Contractor shall be
responsible for proper handling of the Conductor. Earth wire and accessories in the field. 8.6 The sequence of stringing of Conductors/Earth wire shall be from top to downwards i.e. conductors will be run out in succession & earth wire will be strung in the last. 8.7 The proposed 11 KV power lines may run parallel for certain distance with the existing power lines, which may remain energized during the stringing period. As a result there is a possibility of dangerous voltage build up due to electromagnetic and electrostatic coupling in the pulling wire, conductors and earth wires which although comparatively small during normal operations can
14
be severe during switching. It shall be Contractors responsibility to take adequate safely precautions to protect his employees and others from this potential danger. 8.8 The Contractor shall inform the Engineer whenever he wants to avail the Permit to Work from the local sub-division for erecting the new 11 KV line or augmenting the existing 11 KV line. A minimum 48 hours advance notice in writing for availing the shutdown on any live 11 KV feeder/LT lines shall be given to the Engineer. The 11 KV LT line on which permit is takenshould be made clear from all the temporary earth, men and material before cancellation of the Permit to Work. It is worth mentioning here that the Permit to Work on existing line shall be arranged through the Engineer or his representative and the same shall also be got cancelled through the same agency only./ No Permit to Work shall be issued on any line directly to Contractor or his staff from any 33 KV or 66 KV Sub-Station. 9. 9.1 9.1.1 Stringing of Conductor & Earth Wire: The stringing of conductor shall be done by standard stringing method. After being pulled the Conductor/Earth wire shall not be allowed to hang in the stringing blocks for more than 6 hours before being pulled to the specified sag. 9.1.1.1 Conductors creep in respect of ACSR 50 mm2 Conductors are to be
compensated by over tensioning the conductor at a temperature of 21C or lower during stringing. 9.1.2 The bidder shall give complete details of the stringing method, which he proposes to follow. Before the commencement of stringing the Contractor shall submit the stringing charts for the Conductor and Earth wire for various temperatures and spans along with equivalent spans to the Engineer for the approval of the Employer. 9.2 9.2.1 Sagging in Operation: The Conductor shall be pulled up to the desired sag and left in running blocks for atleast one hours after which the sag shall be re-checked and adjusted if necessary before transferring the Conductor from the running blocks to the polymeric insulators. The conductor shall be clamped within 36 hours of sagging.
15
9.2.2
The sag will be checked in the first and the last span of the section in case of sections upto 8 spans and in one intermediate span also for sections with more than eight Spans. The sag shall also be checked when the Conductor have been drawn up and transferred from running clocks to the insulators.
9.2.3
The running blocks when suspended from the structures for sagging shall be so adjusted that the Conductors on running blocks will be on the same height as a 11 KV Insulators to which it is to be secured. At sharp vertical angle, the sag and tensions shall be checked on both sides of the angle, the conductor wire shall be checked from the running blocks for equality of tension on both sides.
9.2.4
Tensioning and sagging operations shall be carried out in calm weather when rapid changes in temperature are not likely to occur.
9.3
Tensioning and Sagging of Conductor and Earth Wire: The Tensioning and Sagging Operations shall be done in accordance with the approved stringing chart before the Conductor and Earth wire are finally attached to the poles through the earth wire clamps and insulators for the Conductor. The relevant stringing charts for the Conductor and earth wire should be employed for this purpose.
9.4
Final Checking, Testing and Commissioning: After completion of the works, final checking of the line and equipment shall be carried out by the Contractor to ensure that all the foundation works, pole erection and stringing has been done according to the specifications and as approved by the Employer. All the works shall be thoroughly inspected
keeping in view the following main points: a) All the structures are straight & erect and in proper alignment. Sufficient back filed earth is lying over each pit and it is adequately rammed / compacted. b) c) All bolts are properly tightened and punched / tack welded. The stringing of the Conductors and Earth Wire has been done as per the approved sag and tension charts and desired clearances are clearly available. d) e) All Conductors and Earth wire accessories are properly installed & fixed. All other requirements to complete the work like fixing of danger plate, phase plate, number plate, barbed wire etc. are properly installed.
16
f)
The insulation of line as a whole is tested by the Contractor by providing his own equipment, labour etc. to the satisfaction of the Employer.
g) h)
The line is tested satisfactorily for commissioning purpose. Earth resistance of every earth wire & P/M S/Stn. will be measured and result shall be supplied and same will also be checked by the Engineer or his representative.
10. 10.1
General Technical Conditions : The above provisions shall supplement all the detailed technical specifications and requirements brought out herein. The Contractors proposal shall be
based on the use of materials complying fully with the requirements specified herein. 10.2 Engineering Data:
10.2.1 The furnishing of engineering data by the Contractor shall be in accordance with the schedule as specified in the technical specifications. The review of these data by the Employer will cover only general conformance of the data to the specifications and not a thorough review of all dimensions quantities and details of the materials or items indicated or the accuracy of the information submitted. The review of the Employer shall not be considered by the
Contractor as limiting any of his responsibilities and liabilities for mistakes and deviations from the requirements specified under these specifications. 10.2.2 All engineering data submitted by the Contractor after review by the Employer shall form part of contract document. If errors are discovered any time during the validity of the contract then the Contractor shall be responsible for their consequences. 10.2.3 The quantities worked out here are only tentative. The Contractor shall work out actual requirement and get it approved from the Engineer-in-Charge. The payment shall be made on actual basis. I) In case of availability of space, in the Control Room, for the installation of only one 11 KV breaker panel & more than one feeder are to be emanated from the concerned sub-station, the 11 KV breaker panel incoming type shall be installed which shall cater to the requirement of one or more than one outdoor type VCBs (kiosk). The 11 KV HT supply shall be extended through 11 KV underground cable.
17
II)
A-
Back Filling of Pits : a) All the locations, (with following exceptions), the pits after erection of poles shall be back filled with excavated or borrowed earth in layers taking care to ram the earth in one layer at a time to the satisfaction of site-in-charge. b) For all the failure containment structures, described earlier & repeated below, the pits shall be hack filled with excavated / borrowed earth and broken bricks (Jhama) back properly rammed to the satisfaction of site-in-charge. i) ii) iii) At some the tapping points & dead end poles At all the points where DT is to be installed. At all the points as per REC construction dwg. No. A-10 ( for the diversion angle of 10-60 degree). iv) At the distance of 1 km max. from the last Jhama filled pole structure. v) Both side poles at all the crossing for main road, nallaha railway crossings etc. vi) Al DP structures. Tapping points & roads where the failure containment structures is to be erected shall be decided during detailed engineering. c) The cost of backfilling including all material /borrowed earth/Jhama etc. is deemed to be included in the quoted price. The above clauses shall be read in conjunction with clause given below:
B-
Foundation & Pole Erection: a) i) The foundation of poles shall be of the following types:Foundation back-filled and rammed with excavated soil and
brick batting for 200 Kg. PCC Poles. ii) soil. b) The Type of foundation for individual poles shall be decided during detailed engineering. The bidder shall quote their rates
Foundation back-filled and rammed with excavated/borrowed
18
as per the quantity of both types of foundations indicated in the BPS. The pole erection rate shall include excavation in all types of soil/rock, back-filling of the foundation pole as specified, cost of all materials, labour etc. c) Foundation back-filled and rammed with excavated soil and brick-batting for 200 Kg, PSC poles - The foundation pit of the pole should be of size 600 mm x 500 mm x depth. The base of the foundation shall be either of PCC (1:2:4) of size 400 x 400 x 70 mm or a stone plate of size 400 x 400 x 35 mm duly backfilled as explained in clause above. d) Foundation back-filled and rammed with excavated / borrowed soil and brick batting for 200 Kg. PSC Poles. The foundation pit of the pole should be of size 600 mm x 400 x depth. The base of the foundation shall be either of PCC (1:2:4) of size 400 x 400 x 70 mm or a stone plate of size 400 x 400 x 35 mm, duly back-filled as explained in clause above. e) It is envisaged that 11 KV line may be traversing marshy & low laying area for which special type of foundation shall be required. In such a case, difference in excavation quantity, concreting & reinforcement between special foundation and normal foundation shall be part of the package. f) Erection of Poles: The poles are to be erected in alignment
with utmost care. The poles shall then be lifted to the pit with the help of wooden supports. The pole shall then be kept in the vertical position with the help of 25 mm (min.) manila ropes which shall act as the temporary anchor. The verticality of the pole shall be checked by spirit level in both longitudinal & transverse directions. Once, this is done, the back filling / concreting shall be done in the pit. The temporary anchor shall be removed only when poles set properly in the foundation. CErection of Stay Sets: The Contractor shall install the stay set complete in all respect. This includes excavation of pit size 0.5 m x 0.5 m x 1.6 m in all kinds of soil including laterite/hard rocks. Stay plate and rod (leaving the top
19
10 cm) shall be embedded in the pit with PCC in the ratio 1:2:4 (the volume of PCC shall be 0.5 m x 0.5 m x 0.8 m ). The rest (upper half) of the pit shall be filled with excavated soil duly compacted layer by layer. An angle between 30 to 45 degrees shall be maintained between stay wire and the pole. The stay wire shall be used with a stay
insulator at a height of 5 m above ground level with G.I. turn buckle. Stay set shall be grouted as per drawing No. PGCIL/RE/Stay-Set. Cl 11.0: 1. For the Drawings/GTPs/Standards which are not included in the above tender documents, latest REC standards are to be followed. 2. The technical specifications as given in the tender documents are covering a range of items, in that case only the material as per the schedule of prices is to be considered
20
SECTION VII- B
21
SECTION VII-B
1. 1.1 Drawings: All drawings submitted by the Contractor including those submitted at the time of Bid shall be with sufficient detail to indicate the type, size, arrangement, dimensions, material description, Bill of materials, weight of each component, break-u[p for packing and transportation, fixing arrangement required, the dimensions required for installation and any other information specifically requested in these specifications. Each drawing submitted by the Contractor shall be clearly marked with the name of the Employer, the specification title, the specification number and the name of the project. All titles, notings, markings and writings on the drawing shall be in English. All the dimensions should be to the scale and in metric units. The Contractor shall submit the necessary detailed route plan or other necessary construction drawings for approval to the Employer within 20 days of Letter of Intent. The route plan drawings submitted by the Contractor shall be examined by the Employer as far as practicable within 20 days and shall be modified by the Contractor, if any modifications and/or corrections are required by the Employer. The Contractor shall incorporate such modifications and/or corrections and submit the final drawings for approval. Any delays arising out of failure by the Contractor to rectify the drawings in good time shall not alter the contract completion date. 1.5 The drawings submitted for approval to the Employer shall be in quadruplicate. One print of suet drawings shall be returned to the Contractor by the Employer marked approved/approved with corrections . The Contractor shall thereupon furnish the Employer additional prints as may be required along with one reproducible in original of the drawings after incorporating all corrections. 1.6 The work shall be performed by the Contractor strictly in accordance with these drawings and no deviation shall be permitted without the approval of the Employer, if so required. 1.7 All manufacturing, fabrication and erection work under the Scope of Contractor, prior to the approval of the drawings shall be at the Contractors risk. The Contractor may make any changes in the design which are necessary to conform to the provisions and intent of the Contract and such changes will again be subject to the approval by the Employer. 1.8 The approval of the documents and drawings by the Employer shall mean that the Employer is satisfied that: a) The Contractor has completed the part of the Works covered be the subject document (i.e., confirmation of progress of work). b) The work appears to comply with requirements of specifications. In no case the approval by the Employer of any document does imply compliance with all technical requirements, nor the absence of errors in such documents. 1.9 The following is the general list of the documents and drawings that are to be approved by the employer: a) Work Schedule (Master Network) Plan.
1.2
1.3
1.4
22
b) c)
Sag tensions calculation and sag template curve drawing. Pole spotting data.
d) e) f) g) 1.10 1.10.1
1.10.2
1.11
1.12
2.
Detailed survey report and profile drawings showing ground clearance and pole locations. Pole earthing Drawing. Pole accessories drawings like danger plate, number plate, phase plates etc. Pert Chart. Design Improvements : The Employer or the Contractor may propose changes in the specification and if the parties agree upon any such changes and the cost implication, the specification shall be modified accordingly. If any such agreement affects the price and schedule of completion, the parties shall agree in writing as to the extent of any change in the price and schedule of completion before the Contractor proceeds with the change. Following such agreement, the provision thereof, shall be deemed to have been amended accordingly. Design Co-ordination. The contractor shall be responsible for the selection and design of appropriate material/item to provide the best co-ordinated performance of the entire system. The basic design requirements are detailed out in this specification. The design of various components, sub-assembly and assemblies shall be so done that it facilitates easy field assembly and maintenance. Design Review Meetings The contractor will be called upon to attend design review meetings with the Employer and the consultants of the Employer during the period of contract. The Contractor shall attend such meetings at his own cost at Hisar or at mutually agreed venue as and when required. Such review meeting shall be held as & when required. Packing
All the material shall be suitably protected, coated, covered of boxed and created to prevent or deterioration during transit, handling & storage at site till the time of erection. The Contractor shall be responsible for any loss or damage during transportation, handling and storage due to improper packing. The contractor shall include and provide for securely protecting and packing the materials so as to avoid loss or damage during transport during transport by air, sea, rail and road. All packing shall allow for easy removal and checking at site. Wherever necessary, proper arrangement for attaching slings for lifting shall be provided. All packages shall be clearly marked for with sign showing up & down on. 3. Progress Report Appropriate visual charts shall accompany the monthly progress report detailed out the progress achieved on all erection activities as compared to the schedules. The report shall also indicate the reasons
23
4.
for variance between the scheduled and actual progress and the action proposed for corrective measures wherever necessary. Manpower Deployment Report
The Contractor shall submit to the employer on the first day of every month a manpower deployment schedule for each activity. The Contractor shall also submit to the employer on the first day of every month a manpower deployment report of the previous month detailing the No. of persons scheduled to have been employed and actually employed. Tools, Tackle and Scaffolding The Contractor shall provide all the construction equipment, tools, tackle and scaffoldings required for construction, erection and commissioning of the power line covered under the contract. He shall submit a list of all such material of the employer before the commencement of work at site. These tools and tackle shall not be removed from the site without the written permission of the Employer. First Aid and General Hygiene The Contractor shall provide necessary first aid & reasonable Hygiene facilities for all his employees, representatives and workmen working at the site Enough number of Contractors personnel shall be trained in administering the first aid. Security The Contractor shall have total responsibility for all requirement and materials in his custody, stored, loose, semi-assembled and or erected by him at site. The Contractor shall make suitable security arrangements including employment of security personnel to ensure the protection of all materials, equipment and works from theft, pilferage and any other damages and loss. Materials Handling and Storage: All the supplies under the Contract as well as arriving at Site shall be promptly received, unloaded and transported and stored in the stores by the Contraction. Contractor shall be responsible for examining all the shipment and notify the employer immediately of any damage, shortage, discrepancy etc for the purpose of Employers information only. The Contactor shall submit to the Employer every week a report detailing all the receipts during the week. However, the Contactor shall be solely responsible for any shortage or damages in transit, handling and/ or in storage and erection at Site. The Contractor shall maintain an accurate and exhaustive record detailing out the list of all items received by him for the purpose of erection and keep such record open for the inspection of the Employer.
24
Each package shall be legibly marked by the Contractor/ Supplier at his expenses showing the details such as description and quantity of contents, the name of the consignee and address, the gross and net weight of the package, the name of the Contractor etc. 5. Erection Conditions The following shall supplement the conditions already contained in the other parts of these specifications and documents and shall govern that portion of the work on this Contract to be performed at site. Regulation of local Authorities and Statutes The Contractor shall comply with all the rules and regulations of local authorities during the performance of his field activities. He shall also comply with the Minimum Wages Act, 1948 and the payment of Wages Act (both of the Govt. of India) and the rules made there under in respect of any employee or workman employed or engaged by him or his Sub-Contractor. All registration and statutory inspection fees, if any, in respect of his work pursuant to this Contract shall be to the account of the Contractor. However, any registration, statutory inspection fees lawfully payable under the provisions of the statutory law and its amendments from time to time during erection in respect of the 11 KV line, ultimately to be owned by the Employer, shall be to the account of the Employer. Should any such inspection or registration need to be re-arranged due to the fault of the Contractor or his Sub-Contractor, the additional fees to such inspection and /or registration shall be borne by the Contractor. Contractors Field Operation. The Contractor shall keep the Employer informed in advance regarding his field activity plans and schedules for carrying-out each part of the works. Any review of such plan or schedule or method of work by the Employer shall not relieve the Contractor of any of his responsibilities towards the field activities. Such reviews shall also not be considered as an assumption of any risk by the Employer or any of his representatives and no claim of the Contractor will be entertained because of the failure or inefficiency of any such plan or schedule or method of work reviewed. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the safety, adequacy and efficiency of tools and plants and his erection methods. All the materials stored in the open or dusty location must be covered with suitable weather-proof and flameproof covering material as applicable. The Contractor shall be responsible for making suitable indoor storage facilities at various locations to store all items /materials which require indoor storage. 6. Construction Management Time is the essence of the Contract and the Contractor shall be responsible for performance of his works in accordance with the specified construction schedule. If at any time, the Contractor is falling behind the schedule for reasons attributable to him, he shall take necessary action to make good for such delays by increasing his work force or by working overtime or otherwise to
25
accelerate the progress of the work and to comply with schedule and shall communicate such actions in writing to the Employer, satisfying that his action will compensate for the delay. The Contractor shall not be allowed any extra compensation for such action. 7. Field Office Records The Contractor shall set up his site offices at different locations to facilitate smooth working. The site offices shall be manned by his supervisors/ other staff. The Contractor shall maintain at his Site office up-to-date copies of all drawings, specifications and other supplementary data complete with all the latest revisions thereto. The Contractor shall also maintain, in addition, the
continuous record of all changes to the above Contract Documents, drawings, specifications, supplementary data etc. effected in the field and on completion of his total assignment under the Contract shall incorporate data to indicate as installed conditions of the material supplied and erected under the contract. Such drawings and engineering data shall be
submitted to the Employer in required number of copies. 8. Protection of Property and Contractors Liability: The Contractor will ensure provision of necessary safety equipment such as barriers, sign-boards, warning lights and alarms etc. to provide adequate protection to persons and property. The Contractor shall be responsible to give reasonable notice to the Employers and the Owners of public or private property and utilities when such property and utilities are likely to get damaged or injured during the performance of his works and shall make all necessary arrangements with such owners, related to removal and/or replacement or protection of such property and utilities. 9. Insurance: The Contractor shall arrange & keep alive all the required insurance covers for his Employees/third parties as under:9.1 Workmens Compensation Insurance:
26
This insurance shall protect the Contractor against all claims applicable under the Workmens Compensation Act, 1948 (Government of India). This policy shall also cover the Contractor against claims for injury, disability disease or death of his or his Sub-Contractors employees, which for any reason are not covered under the Workmens employees, which for any reason are not covered under the workmens Compensation Act, 1948. The liabilities shall not be less than: Workmens Compensation Employees Liability As per statutory Provisions As per statutory Provisions
9.2
Comprehensive Automobile Insurance
This insurance shall be in such a form to
protect the Contractor
against all claims for injuries, disability, disease and death to members of public including the Employers men and damage to the property of others arising from the use of motor vehicles during on or off the site operations, irrespective of the ownership of such vehicles. The minimum liability covered shall be as herein indicated: Fatal Injury : : Property Damage : Rs. 100,000 each person Rs. 200,000 each occurrence Rs. 100,000 each occurrence
In case the employer is made to pay such compensation, the Contractor will be liable to reimburse the Employer such amount even in addition to the compensation indicated above. 9.3 Comprehensive General Liability Insurance
9.3.1 The insurance shall protect the Contractor against all claims arising from injuries, disabilities, disease or death of members of public or damage to property of others, due to any act or omission on the part of the Contractor, its agents, its employees, its representatives and SubContractors or from riots, strikes and civil commotion. 9.3.2 The above are only illustrative list of insurance covers normally required and it will be the responsibility of the Contractor to maintain all necessary insurance coverage to the extent both in time and amount to
27
take care of all its liabilities either direct of indirect, in pursuance of the Contact. 10. Protection of Measurements and Reference Points: The Contractor shall ensure that any finds such as relics, antiques, coins, fossils, etc. which he may come across during the course of performance of his works either during excavation or elsewhere, are properly protect3ed and handed over to the Employees. Similarly, the Contractor shall ensure that the bench marks, reference points etc. which are marked either with the help of Employer shall or by the Employer shall not be disturbed in any way during the performance of its works. If, any work , is to be performed which disturbs such
reference, the same shall be done only after these are transferred to other suitable locations under the direction of the Employer. The
Contractor shall provide all necessary materials and assistance to such relocation of reference points etc. 11. 11.1 Work and Safety Regulations: The Contractor shall ensure safety of all the workmen, materials plant and equipment belonging to him or to the others, working at the Site. The Contractor shall also provide for all safety notices and safety equipment required by the relevant legislations and deemed necessary by the Employer. 11.2 The Contractor will notify, well in advance to the Employer, its intention to bring to the site any Container filled with liquid or gaseous fuel or explosive or petroleum substance or such chemicals which may involve hazards. The employer shall have the right to prescribe the conditions, under which such a container is to be stored, handled and used during the performance of the works and the Contractor shall strictly adhere to and comply with such instructions. The Employer shall also have the right, at his sole discretion, to inspect any such container or such construction plant/equipment for which materials in the container is required to be used and dif in his opinion, its use is not safe, he may forbid its use. No Claim due to such prohibition or towards additional safety provisions called for by him shall be entertained by the Employer.
28
Further, any such decision of the Employer shall not, in any way, absolve the Contractor of his responsibilities under the Laws of land and in case use of such a Container or entry there of into the Site area is forbidden by the Employer, the Contractor shall use alternative methods with the approval of the Employer without any cost implication to the Employer or extension of work schedule. 11.3 Where it is necessary to provide and/or store petroleum products or petroleum mixtures and explosives, the Contractor shall be responsible for carrying out such provision and/or storage in accordance with the rules and regulations laid down in Petroleum Act, 1934, Explosives Act, 1948 or any other statuary acts in regard there of and amendments thereof, and petroleum and carbide of Calcium Manual published by the Chief Inspector of Explosives of India. All such storage shall have prior approval of the Employer. In case, any approval is necessary from the Chief Inspector (Explosives) or any statutory authorities, the Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining the same. 11.4 All equipment used in construction and erection by Contractor shall meet Indian/International Standards land where such standards do not exist, the Contractor shall ensure these too be absolutely safe. All equipment shall be strictly operated and maintained by the Contractor in accordance with manufacturers operation manual and safety instructions and as per any existing Guidelines/rules in this regard. 11.5 Periodical examinations and all tests for all lifting/hoisting equipment and tackle shall be carried-out in accordance with the relevant provisions of Factories Act 1948. Indian Electricity Supply Act and
associated Laws/Rules in force from time to time. A register of such examinations and tests shall be properly maintained by the Contractor and will be promptly produced as land when desired by Employer or by the persons authorized by him. 11.6 The Contractor shall provide suitable safety equipment of prescribed standard to all employees and workmen according to the need as may be directed by the Employer who will also have the right to examine these safety equipment to determine their suitability, reliability, acceptability and adaptability.
29
11.7
The Contractor employing more than 250 workman whether temporary, casual, probationer, regular or permanent or on contract, shall employ at least one full time officer exclusively as safety officer to supervises safety aspects of the equipment and workman. The name and address of such Safety Officer of the Contractor will be promptly informed in writing to the Employer with a copy to the Safety Officer-Incharge before he starts work or immediately after any change of the incumbent is made during currency of the Contract.
11.8
In case any accident occurs during the construction/erection or other associated activities undertaken by the Contractor, thereby causing any minor or major or total injury to his employees due to any reason whatsoever, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to promptly inform the same to the Employer and also to all the authorities envisaged under the applicable laws.
11.9
The Employer shall have the right to stop the work, if in its opinion the work is being carried out in such a way as may cause accidents and endanger the safety of the persons and /or property. In such cases, the Contractor shall be informed in writing about the nature of the hazards and possible injury /accident and he shall remove shortcomings promptly. The Contractor after stopping the specific work, can if felt necessary, appeal against the order of stoppage of work to the Employer within 3 days of such stoppage of work and the decision of the Employer in this respect shall be conclusive.
11.10 The Contractor shall not be entitled for any damages /compensation for stoppage of work due to safety reasons and the period of such stoppage of work will not be taken as an extension of time for completion of work and will not be the ground for waiver of any part of Contractors liability for timely completion of the works. 11.11 The Contractor shall follow and comply with all safety rules, relevant provisions of applicable laws pertaining to the safety of workman, employees plant and equipment as may be prescribed from time to time without any demur, protest or contest or reservation. In case of any conflict between statutory requirement and safety rules referred above, the most stringent clause shall be applicable.
30
11.12 If the Contractor fails in providing safe working environment as per Safety Rules or continues the work even after being instructed to stop work by the Employer, the Contractor shall promptly pay to the Employer on demand, compensation at the rate of Rs. 5000/- per day or part thereof till the instructions are complled with and so certified by the Employer. 11.13 If the Contractor does not take all safety precautions and /or fails to comply with the safety Rules as prescribed by the Employer or as prescribed under the applicable law for the safety of the equipment, plant and personnel and the Contractor does not prevent hazardous conditions which may cause injury to his own employees or employees of other Contractors, or Employer or any other person at site or adjacent thereto, the Contractor shall be responsible for payment of compensation in the form of first hand relief as per the following schedule:-
a)
Fatal Injury or accident causing death
Rs. 1,00,000/per person
: : : Applicable for
death/injury
b)
Major injuries or accident causing 25% or more
Rs. 20,000/per person
: :
to any person whosoever
Permanent disability
The contractor,however, shall be responsible for full amount of compensation admissible as per the law of land Permanent disability shall have the same meaning as indicated in Workmens Compensation Act. The compensation mentioned above shall be in addition to the compensation payable to the workmen/ employees under the relevant provisions of the Workmens Compensation Act and rules framed there under or any other applicable law as applicable from time to time. In case the Employer is made to pay any such compensation, the
31
Contractor will be liable to reimburse the Employer such amount (s) even in addition to the compensation indicated above.
12.
Code Requirements
The erection requirements and procedures to be followed during the execution of the project shall be in accordance with the applicable Indian / International standards /regulations, as indicated in Technical Specifications, good engineering practice, the Drawings and other applicable Indian codes, laws and regulations.
32
SECTION VII-C
Technical Specification of Equipments

Sr No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Description PCC Poles 9M (200 kg WL) ACSR 50 mm2 Stay Wire 7/8 SWG(GSS) GI wire(GSL 8 SWG) MS Nuts and Bolts Porcelain insulators and insulators fittings for 11 kV overhead power lines GO switch Lightening Arrestor 9 KV Barbed wire 11 kV XLPE Aerial Bunched Cable Heat shrinkable termination kit for 11 kV Cables 25KVA three phase Alu wound T/F 16 KVA three phase copper wound T/F Single Phase Energy Meter Three Phase Energy Meter MCB For Single Phase Meter MCB For Three Phase Meter LT XLPE Armoured cable No. CSC-VII/R-1/DH/UH/P&D/2009-2010 CSC-X/R-1/DH/UH/P&D/2009-2010 CSC-VI/R-1/DH/UH/P&D/2009-2010 CSC-XVI/R-1/DH/UH/P&D/2009-2010 HSD/S-364/ST-163 CSC-XXIX/DH/UH/P&D/2009-2010 CSC-XXVIII/DH/UH/P&D/2009-2010 with amendment Old specification Old Specification CSC-LV/DH/UH/P&D/2009-2010 CSC-XXXVI/DH/UH/P&D/2009-2010 CSC-III/R-1/DH/UH/P&D/2009-2010 CSC-IV/DH/UH/P&D/2009-2010 CSC-IIIL/R-1/DH/UH/P&D/2009-2010 CSC-IIL/R-1/DH/UH/P&D/2009-2010 CSC-XXXXI/DH/UH/P&D/2009-2010 CSC-XXXXII/DH/UH/P&D/2009-2010 CSC-XI/DH/UH/P&D/2009-2010 & CSC-XXXI/DH/UH/P&D/2009-2010
33
Specification No. CSC-VII-R-I/DH/UH/P&D/2009-10
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR
PCC POLES 8/9 METER LONG
(WL-200 K.G. F.O.S-2.5)
Issue of the Month: May 2010 (CSC Approval date 23.4.2010)
Common Specifications Committee UHVN & DHBVN
Page 1 of 9
Technical specification for PCC Poles (F.O.S. 2.5) 8/9 M Length

(Working load 200 kg.) 1. Scope: This specification covers manufacture, assembly, testing at manufacturers works of PCC Poles with an over all length of 8 M and 9 M and working load of 200 kg. at 0.6 M from the top, suitable for use in overhead L.T. lines. 2. APPLICABLE STANDARDS: Except when they conflict with requirements in this specification, the poles shall comply with the relevant provisions made in the following Indian Standards Specification or equivalent IEC. a. IS: 1678-1960, specification for prestressed concrete pole for overhead power, traction and telecommunication lines. b. IS: 2905-1966, Methods of test for concrete poles for overhead power and telecommunication lines. c. IS: 7321-1974, code of practice for selection, handling and erection of concrete poles for overhead power and telecommunication lines. 3. CLIMATIC CONDITIONS: The equipment/material to be supplied against this specification shall be suitable for satisfactory operation under the following climatic Conditions i) ii) iii) iv) v) vi) vii) viii) ix) x) xi) Location At various locations in the state of Haryana 60 -5 40
Maximum ambient temperature (oC) Minimum ambient air temperature (oC) Maximum average daily ambient temperature (oC) Maximum yearly weighed average 32 ambient temperature (oC) Maximum altitude above mean sea level 1000 (m) Minimum Relative Humidity (%) 26 Maximum Relative Humidity (%) 95 Average no of Rainy days/ year 120 Average annual rainfall 900 mm Maximum wind pressure 195 kg/m sq. The equipment shall be for use in moderately hot and humid tropical
climate, conducive to rust and fungus growth. 4. Terminology: For the purpose of this standard the following definitions shall apply: 4.1 Average permanent load: That fraction of the working load, which may be considered of long duration over a period of one year.
Page 2 of 9
4.2
Load factor: The ratio of ultimate transverse load to the transverse load at first crack
4.3
Transverse: The direction of the line bisecting the angle contained by the conductor at
the pole. In the case of straight run this will be normal to the run of the pole. 4.4 Transverse load at first crack: For design, the transverse load at first crack shall be taken as not less than the value of the working load. 4.5 Working load: The maximum load in the transverse direction that is ever likely to occur, including the wind pressure on the pole. This load is assumed to act at a point 600 mm below the top with the butt end of the pole planted to the required depth as intended in the design. 4.6 Ultimate failure: The conditions existing when the pole ceases to sustain a load increment owing to either crushing of concrete or snapping of the prestressing tendon or permanent stretching of the steel in any part of the pole. 4.7 Ultimate transverse load: The load at which failure occurs, when it is applied at a point 600 mm below the top and perpendicular to the axis of the pole along the transverse direction with the butt end of the pole planted to the required depth. 5.0 5.1 Materials: Cement: The cement used in the manufacture of prestressed concrete poles shall be ordinary or rapid hardening Portland cement conforming to IS: 269 1976 (Specifications for rapid hardening Portland cement). 5.2 Aggregates: Aggregates used for the manufacture of prestessed concrete poles shall conform to IS 383-1970 (Specification for coarse and fine aggregates from natural sources for concrete) the nominal max. size of aggregates shall in no case exceed 12 mm. 5.3 Water: Water should be free from chlorides, sulphates, other salts and organic matter. Potable water will be generally suitable. 5.4 Admixtures: Admixtures should not contain calcium chloride or other chlorides and salts which are likely to promote corrosion of prestressing steel. 5.5 Pre-stressing Steel: The pre-stressing steel wires, including those used as untensioned wires, should conform to IS 1785 (part I) 1966 (specification for plain hard drawn steel
Page 3 of 9
wire for prestressed concrete part-I cold drawn stress relieved wire) IS:1785 (part II)-1967 (specification for plain hard drawn steel wire for prestressed concrete partII as drawn wire) or IS: 6003-1970 (specification for indented wire for prestressed concrete). 5.6 Concrete The concrete mix shall be designed to the requirements laid down for controlled concrete (also called design mix concrete) in IS: 1343-1960 (code of practice for prestressed concrete) and IS: 456-1964 (code of practice for plain and reinforced concrete), subject to the following special conditions. a) b) c) Minimum works cube strength at 28 days should be at least 420 kg/cm2 The concrete strength at transfer should be at least 210 kg/cm2 The mix should contain at least 380 kg of cement per cubic meter of concrete. d) The mix should contain as low water content as is consistent with adequate workability. If it becomes necessary to add water to increase the workability, the cement content also should be raised in such a way that the original value of water cement ratio is maintained. 6. Welding and Lapping of steel: The high tensile steel wire shall be continuous over the entire length of the tendon. Welding shall not be allowed in any case. However, Jointing or coupling may be permitted/provided the strength of the joint or coupling is not less than the strength of each individual wire. 7.0 7.1 Manufacture: All prestressing wires and reinforcements shall be accurately fixed as shown in the drawings and maintained in position during manufacture. The untensioned reinforcement, as indicated in the drawing, should be held in position by the use of stirrups, which should go round all the wires. 7.2 All wires shall be accurately stretched with uniform prestress in each wire. Each wire or group or wires shall be anchored positively during casting. Care shall be taken to see that the anchorages do no yield before the concrete attains the necessary strength. 7.3 Covers: The cover concrete measured from the outside of the prestressing tendon shall be normally 20 mm. 7.4 Compacting: The concrete shall be compacted by spinning, vibrating, shocking or other suitable mechanical means. Hand compaction shall not be permitted. 7.5 Curing: The concrete shall be covered with a layer of sacking, canvas, hessian or similar absorbent material and kept constantly wet up to the time when the
Page 4 of 9
strength of concrete is at least equal to the minimum strength of concrete at transfer of prestess. Thereafter, the pole may be removed from the mould and watered at intervals to prevent surface cracking of the unit, the interval should depend on the atmospheric humidity and temperature. 7.6 The prestressing wires shall be detensioned only after the concrete has attained the specified strength at transfer (i.e. 210Kg./cm2). The cubes cast for the purpose of determining the strength at transfer should be cured, as far as possible, under conditions similar to those under which the poles are cured. The transfer stage shall be determined based on the daily tests carried out on concrete cubes till the specified strength indicated above is reached. Thereafter, the test on concrete shall be carried out as detailed in IS 1343-1960 (code of practice for prestessed concrete). The manufacturer shall supply, when required by the purchaser or his representative, results of compressive test conducted in accordance with IS 456-1964 (code of practice for plain and reinforced concrete ) on concrete cubes and from the concrete used for the poles. If the purchaser so desires, the manufacturer shall supply cubes for test purposes and such cubes shall be tested in accordance with IS: 456 1964 (code of practice for pre & reinforced concrete). The detensioning shall be done by slowly releasing the wires, without imparting shock or sudden load to the poles. The rate of detensioning may be controlled by any suitable means either mechanical (screw type) or hydraulic. The poles shall not be detensioned or released by cutting the prestessing wires using flames or bar croppers while the wires are still under tension. 8. a) Earthing: Earthing shall be provided: By having a length of 8 SWG GI wire embedded in concrete during manufacture and the ends of the wires left projecting from the pole to a length of 175 mm, at 250 mm from top and 150 mm below ground level. b) By providing two holes of suitable dimensions 250 mm from top and 150 mm below ground level to enable the GI wire to be taken from the top hole to the bottom hole through central hollow. The earth wire shall not be allowed to come in contact with the prestressing wires. 9. Tests 9.1 Transverse strength tests: 9.1.1 Poles made from ordinary Portland cement shall be tested only on the completion of 28 days and poles made from rapid hardening cement only on the completion of 14 days after the day of manufacture. 9.1.2 The pole may be tested in either horizontal or vertical position. If tested in horizontal position, provisions shall be made to compensate for the
Page 5 of 9
overhanging weight of the pole for this purpose the overhanging portion of the pole may be supported on a movable trolley or similar device. 9.1.3 The pole shall be rigidly supported at the butt end for a distance equal to the agreed depth of planting i.e. 1.5m. 9.1.4 Load shall be applied at a point 600 mm from the top of the pole and shall be steadily and gradually increased to the design value of the transverse load at first crack. The deflection at this load shall be measured. A prestressed concrete pole shall be deemed not to have passed the test if visible cracks appear at a stage prior to the application of the design transverse load for the first crack. The load shall then be reduced to zero and increased gradually to a load equal to the first crack load plus 10% of the minimum ultimate transverse load, and held up for 2 minutes. This procedure shall be repeated until the load reaches the value of 80% of the minimum ultimate transverse load and thereafter increased by 5 % of the minimum ultimate transverse load until failure occurs. Each time the load is applied, it shall be at the point of failure & shall be measured to the nearest five kilograms. The pole shall be deemed not to have passed the test if the observed ultimate transverse load is less than the design. The pole shall be deemed not to have passed the test if the observed ultimate transverse load is less than the design ultimate transverse load. 9.2 Measurement of cover: After completion of the transverse strength test, the sample pole shall be taken and checked for cover. The cover of the pole shall be measured at 3 points, one within 1.8 meter from the butt end of the pole, the second within 0.6 meter from the top end the third at an intermediate point and the mean value compared with the specified value. The mean value of the measured cover should not differ by more than +/1mm from the specified value. If these requirements are not met, the workmanship with reference to aligning of the end plates and prestressing wire assembly of mould should be improved and inspection at production stage tightened suitably. 10 Inspection: Inspection of material and supervision of tests in accordance with the relevant ISS is mentioned in column 2 above and supporting drg. and schedules and approved manufacture specification shall be carried out by the purchaser or duly authorised representative. The material shall be inspected and tested before despatch by an authorised representative of the Nigam in respect of quality. The manufacturer shall provide to the inspecting officer all reasonable facilities without
Page 6 of 9
charge to satisfy him that the material is being furnished in accordance with the specifications. The purchaser or his authorised representative shall have access at all reasonable time to manufacturers work to inspect and witness to tests of the material manufactured. The purchaser has the right to have the tests carried out at the cost of supplier by an independent Govt. agency wherever there is dispute regarding the quality of material supplied. 11. Stacking The supplies shall stack the poles in such a way that it is possible for the inspecting officer to select and inspect the poles, as he may choose to inspect. All such facilities for taking out the selected poles will be extended by the supplier free of charge 12. Marking: The pole shall be clearly and indelibly marked with following
particulars either during or after manufacture but before testing at a position so as to be easily read after erection in position. a) b) c) Month and year of manufacture Transverse strength of pole in kg. Makers serial no. and mark.
UHBVN and planting depth will hence forth be embossed on each pole. Firms give month wise schedule of manufacture against PO to facilitate inspection during manufacturing process. Whenever poles are tested out of any lot lying in UHBVN stores, cost of the poles and testing charges will be charged to stock charge.
Checking of cover & steel
Out of every 500 poles, one may be take for climate strength, testing, cover checking after crushing and checking of un-tensioned / tensioned wire.
13.
GUARANTEE / WARRANTEE The supplier shall be responsible to replace, free of cost, with no
transportation or insurance cost to the Purchaser, up to destination, the whole or any part of the material which in normal and proper use proves the defective in quality or workmanship, subject to the condition that the defect is noticed within 18 months from the date of receipt of material in stores OR 12 months from the date of commissioning whichever period may expire earlier. The consignee or any
other officer of Nigam actually using the material will give prompt notice of each
Page 7 of 9
such defect to the supplier. The replacement shall be effected by the supplier within a reasonable time, but not, in any case, exceeding 45 days. The supplier shall, also, arrange to remove the defective within a reasonable period, but not exceeding 45 days from the date of issue of notice in respect thereof, failing which, the purchaser reserve the right to dispose of defective material in any manner considered fit by him (Purchaser), at the sole risk and cost of the supplier. Any sale proceeds of the defective material after meeting the expenses incurred on its custody, disposal handling etc., shall however be credited to the suppliers account and set off against any outstanding dues of the purchaser against the supplier. The warranty for 12/18 months shall be one time. 14. FAKE INSPECTION CALLS In case the supplier makes a fake inspection call i.e., the material is not found ready by the Inspecting Officer deputed by the Nigam for inspection, the supplier shall be liable to pay the expenses incurred by the Nigam on this account subject to minimum of a fixed penalty of Rs. 20, 000/- for each such fake call made by him. 15. CHALLENGE CLAUSE The material offered / received after the inspection by the authorized inspecting Officer may again be subjected to the test for losses or any other parameters from any testing house / in house technique of the Nigam having requisite capabilities and facilities. The results if found deviating / unacceptable or in non-compliance with approved GTPs, the lot shall be rejected and bidder shall arrange to supply the within thirty (30) days of such detection at his cost including to & fro transportation. In addition to this a penalty @ 10% of cost of the rejected lost of material shall be imposed
General Manager/P&D Cum-Member Secretary CSC UHBVN, Panchkula.
Page 8 of 9
SCHEDULE OF GUARANTEED AND OTHER TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR PCC POLES (TO BE SUBMITTED BY THE TENDERER).
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12.
Over length of pole Working load at 0.6 Meters from top Factor of safety Bottom depth Top depth Breath No. of tensioned wires per pole No. of untensioned wires per pole Length of each untensioned wire Concrete quantity Steel quantity Cement quantity
m kg.
cm cm cm. no. no.
m3/pole kg/pole kg/pole
Page 9 of 9
______________________________________________________________________
SpecificationNo.CSCXRI/DH/UH/P&D/20102011

TECHNICALSPECIFCATION FOR HARDDRAWNSTRANDEDSTEELCORED ALUMUINIUMCODUCTORS(20,30&50mm2)

IssueMonth:May2010
CommonSpecificationsCommittee UHBVN&DHBVN
(CSC approval date 23.4.2010)
Page 1 of 9
______________________________________________________________________
Technical Specification for Hard drawn stranded Steel Cored Aluminium Conductorforoverheadlow,medium11kVtransmissionlines.(20mm2, 30mm2&50mm2)
1. SCOPE: Thisspecificationcoversthedesign,manufacture,testingbeforedispatch,supply&delivery
FORdestination,ofSquirrel20mm2,weasel30mm2&Rabbit50mm2ACSRconductorforuseon11 kVmediumandlowtensionoverheadpowertransmissionlines. 2. APPLICABLESTANDARD: Exceptwhentheyconflictwiththespecificrequirements.Inthesespecifications,theconductors
shall comply in all respects with the latest Indian Standard Specification IS: 398(partII)1996, 4826 1976.(Galvanizedcoalingonroundsteelwires),IS:15211972(MethodoflensesTesting),IS:1980(Reels &Drumsforbareconductors),orthelatestversionthereof. 3. MATERIAL: The conductor shall be made from the hard drawn Aluminum and galvanized Aluminium steel
wireshavingmechanicalandelectricalpropertiesasperclause4,5&6.TheAluminumandgalvanized steelwiresshallhavephysicalconstantsconformingtoclause3&4respectivelyofIS:398/PartII 1996orlatestversionthereof.Thehotdippedorelectrolyticprocessgalvanizedcoatingonsteelwires maybeapplied.TheuniformityofgalvanizingandweightofcoatingshallbeinaccordancewithIS: 48261976 or latest version thereof. The Steel wires shall have evenly and uniformly coating with electrolytichighgrade99.95%purityZinccomplyingwithlatestissueofIS:209forZinc.Thesteelstrands shallbehotdipgalvanizedandshallhaveaminimumZinccoatingof250gm/m2afterstranding. 4 CLIMATICCONDITIONS: Theequipment/materialtobesuppliedagainstthisspecificationshallbesuitableforsatisfactory
operationunderthefollowingclimaticConditions i) Location Atvariouslocationsinthestateof Haryana ii) iii) iv) v) Maximumambienttemperature(oC) Minimumambientairtemperature(oC) Maximumaveragedailyambienttemperature( C) Maximum yearly weighed average ambient temperature(oC) vi) vii) viii) ix) x) xi) Maximumaltitudeabovemeansealevel(m) MinimumRelativeHumidity(%) MaximumRelativeHumidity(%) AveragenoofRainydays/year Averageannualrainfall Maximumwindpressure 1000 26 95 120 900mm 195kg/msq.
o
60 5 40 32
Theequipmentshallbeforuseinmoderatelyhotandhumidtropicalclimate,conducivetorust
andfungusgrowth.
Page 2 of 9
______________________________________________________________________
5. SIZES: Thesizesandpropertiesforstrandedsteelcoredaluminumconductorsshallbeasunder: STRANDEDALUMINIUMCONDUCTORSGALVANISEDREINFORCED Stranding & Sectional Total wirediameter areaofAI sectional area Approx. Overall dia. Calculated Resistance at 20oC Max. 7 8 Kg/Km. Ohm/Km 85 1.374 128 0.9116 214 0.5499 Approx mass Approx Calculated Breaking Load 9 KN 7.71 11.36 18.60
Nominal Aluminium area
Al Steel 1 2 3 4 5 6 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 20Squirrel 6/2.11 1/2.11 20.71 24.43 6.33 30Weasel 6/2.59 1/2.59 31.21 37 7.77 50Rabbit 6/3.35 1/3.35 52.21 61.90 10.05 6. ALUMINIUMWIRES ThepropertiesofAluminumwinostobeusedintheconstructionofthestrandedwiresshall beasfollows: Solid conductors used in the construction of stranded steel reinforce Aluminum Conductors
galvanized Diameter Cross sectional Nominal Diameter vireo 4 mm2 3.497 5.269 8.814 Mass Resistance Breaking at20oCMax. Load before stranding (Max.) 6 7 Kg/Km. Ohm/Km 8.237 0.63 5.490 3.265 0.89 1.43 0.85 1.36 Breaking Load after stranding (Max.) 8 KN 0.60
Nominal 1 mm2 2.11
Min. 2 mm2 2.09 2.56 3.32
Max. 3 mm2 2.13 2.62 3.38
2 2.59 3 3.35 7
5 mm2 9.45 14.24 23.82
STEELWIRES: The properties of the steel wire to be used in the construction of the stranded Steel Cored
AluminumWiresbeasunder: Solid steel wires used in the construction of Aluminium Conductors galvanized, steel
reinforced: Nominal Diameter Cross Mass sectional area or Nominal diameter wire 3 mm 2.15 2.64 3.42 4 mm2 3.497 5.269 8.814 5 Km/Kg 27.27 41.09 68.75 Breakingload(Min).
1 mm 2.11 2.59 3.35 8.
Min. 2 mm 2.07 2.54 3.28
Max
Before stranding 6 KN 4.60 6.92 11.58
After stranding 7 KN 4.37 6.57 11.00
FREEFROMDEFECTS: Thewiresshallbesmoothandfreefrominequalities,spillsandsplits.Thefinishedconductor
shallbesmooth,compact,uniformandfreefromallimperfectionsincludingspills&splits,diemarks, scratches, abrasions, scuff marks, kinks, dents, press marks, overriding, looseness, pressure and/or unusual bangle noise, on tapping, material inclusions, white rust, powder formation or black spots, dirt,gritetc 9. JOINTSINWIRESANDCONDUCTORS:
Page 3 of 9
______________________________________________________________________
AluminumconductorsSteelreinforced: No joint shall be permitted in the individual Aluminum wires in the outermost layer of the
finishedconductor.Notwojointsshalloccurinthealuminumwiresclosertogetherthan15metersof eachotherinthecompletestrandedconductor. During standing no Aluminum wire welds shall be
madeforthepurposeofachievingtherequiredconductorlength. 10. i. ii) iii. Steelwires:Nojointsshallbepermitted. STRANDING: The wires used in construction of stranded conductor shall before stranding satisfy all the requirementsofthisstandardforsolidwires. Thesuccessivelayersshallbestrandedinoppositedirections.Thewiresineachlayershallbe evenlyandcloselystrandedroundtheunderlyingwireorwires. Layratio:theratioforaluminumincaseofACSRshallbewithinlimitsgivenbelow: RatioAluminiumwire DiaofSteelWire 1.000 LayRationforAluminiumWire Min 10 Max. 14
No.ofWires Al. 6 11. Steel 1 TESTS
The sample of individual wires for the tests shall normally be taken before stranding. The shall of carry out wire tests spools the on and test samples 10% of taken steel should wire be but coils. taken at least
manufacture from when 10%
Aluminum by the
However, from the
desired
purchaser
sample
stranded wire. They shall be obtained by cutting 1.2 meters from the outer ends of the finished conductor form not more than 10% of the finished reels. The material consumed or destroyed during testing will be to the account of the supplier. The wires shall comply with the following test as per IS: 398 (PartII)1996: TypeTests i. ii. iii. iv. v. vi. vii. viii. MeasurementofdiametersofindividualAl.&Steelwiles. MeasurementofLayratioofeachlayer. Breakingloadofindividualwires. Ductilitytest. Wrappingtest. Resistancetest. Galvanizingtest. Thetypetestreport(s)submittedbythebidder/supplierfromanyNABLaccreditedlaboratory shallbeacceptableforparticipationofthebidderintheprocurement/empanelmentprocess.In case NABL accredited laboratory happens to be that of manufacturer itself added precaution shall be taken to get type test and other tests witnessed in the laboratory by Nigam representativeatthetimeofacceptanceofmaterial.
AcceptanceTests: i. ii. iii. iv. Visualexamination. MeasurementofdiametersofindividualAl.&Steelwiles. MeasurementofLayratioofeachlayer. Breakingloadofindividualwires.

Page 4 of 9
______________________________________________________________________
v. vi. vii. viii. Ductilitytest. Wrappingtest. ResistancetestonAluminumwires. Galvanizingtest
RoutineTests: Theroutinetests shallbedonesameasacceptancetestsandshallbecarriedoutbefore&after
stranding 12. PACKING&MARKING: The conductor shall be wound in reels on non returnable wooden drums provided with
lagging of adequate strength constructed to protect, the conductor against damage & displacement during transit, storage and subsequent handing which should be strong enough to withstandthestressesduringhandlingandtransportation. 12.1 PACKING: Theconductorshallbewoundinreelsonnonreturnablewoodendrums,whichshouldbestrong
enoughtowithstandthestressesduringhandling&transpiration. 12.1.1 Thegrossmassofvariousconductorsshallnotexceedbymorethan10%ofthevaluesgivenin thefollowingtable: Conductorsize 20mm2Al.Area(7/2.11mm) 30mm2Al.Area(7/2.59mm) 50mm2Al.Area(7/3.35mm) GrossMass 1000Kg. 1000Kg. 1500Kg.
12.1.2 Thenominalwirelengthshallbe2KM.butlongerlengthsshallbeacceptable.Shortlengthsnot 12.2 lessthan1Kmeachshallbeacceptabletothemaximumextentof10%ofthequantityordered. MARKING:
Thefollowinginformationshallbemarkedoneachdrum: a) b) c) d) e) f) g) h) i) j) k) 13 Manufacturersname. Trademarkifany. DrumorIdentificationnumber. Sizeofconductor. No.oflengthsconductor. Grossmassofthepacking. Notmassofconductor ISIcertificationmark,ifany. Positionoftheconductor. Name&Addressoftheconsignee. Month&Yearofmanufacture. INSPECTION Alltestsandinspectionshallbemadeattheplaceofmanufacturerunlessotherwisespecially
agreed upon by the manufacturer and the purchaser at the time of purchase. The manufacturer shall afford the inspector representing the purchase all responsible facilities, without charge, to satisfy him that the material is being furnished in accordance with this specification. The purchaser or his authorized representative shall have access at all responsible time to manufactures works to
Page 5 of 9
______________________________________________________________________
inspect and witness the tests of the conductor being manufactured, As regards correctness of the lengthofACSRConductor,thesameissubjecttofinalcheckingandmeasurementbytheconsigneeand thefirmshallberesponsibleforalltheshortages,damagesetc.ifany.Thesamplesaretakenfortest afterstrandingandifanyselectedreelfailsintheretest,themanufacturemaytesteachandevery reel and submit them for further Inspection. All rejected material should be suitably marked and segregated. No material shall be dispatched from its point of manufacture before it has been satisfactorily
inspectedandtestedunlessthePurchaser.Inwritingwaivesofftheinspection.Inthelatercasealso, theconductorshallbedispatchedonlyaftersatisfactorytestingforalltestsspecifiedarecompletedand approvedbyPurchaser.TheUHBVN/DHBVNreservestherighttohavethetestscarriedoutatthecostof manufacturer / supplier by an independent agency whenever there is a dispute regarding the quality of supply. TheacceptanceofanyquantityofmaterialshallinnowayrelievetheSupplierofanyofhis
responsibiliesformeetingallrequirementsofthespecificationsandshallnotpreventsubsequent rejectionifsuchmaterialislaterfoundtobedefective i. ii. a. Qtyofmaterialoutoflotrecommendedtobephysicallycheckedshallbeasunder: ForACSRconductorupto30mmsq.: 10%subjecttoaminimumofonedrum. ForACSRconductorabove30mmsq.: Theinspectingofficershellselect10%ofthedrumsofferedforInspection at random and
checkasunder: i. ii. iii. iv. b. i. ii). c. 14 Grossweightofeachdrum. Lengthofconductoroneachdrum. Weightofeachemptydrum. TheinspectingofficerthenshallcalculatetheaverageweightperKMoftheconductoronthe basisofnetweightandlengthofconductorof10%drumscheckedasaboveandshallalso calculateaverageweightofemptydrum. Forthebalance90%drums: Theinspectingofficershallmeasurethegrossweightofeachdrum. Afterdeductingtheaverageweightofoneemptydrum(aiv),theinspectingofficershallfind outthenetweightofconductoroneachdrum. The inspecting officer shall provide his seal on both ends of ACSR
conductor of all the drums offered for inspection as (a) & (b) above. The inspecting officer shall write in the inspection note the verified
length and weight of conductor of individual drum out of 10% drums as per a above and calculate length and verify gross weight of each drum as per (b) above. Consignee will take the measurement on the basis of inspectionnotereceivedbyhim. GUARANTEDTECHNICALPARTICULARS: GTPsoftheconductorshallbegivenintheAppendixIattached,herewiththespecification.Any
other particulars considered necessary by the supplier might also be given in addition those listed in the appendix. 16.
GUARANTEE/WARRANTEE
Page 6 of 9
______________________________________________________________________
Thesuppliershallberesponsibletoreplace,freeofcost,withnotransportationorinsurancecost tothePurchaser,uptodestination,thewholeoranypartofthematerialwhichinnormalandproperuse provesthedefectiveinqualityorworkmanship,subjecttotheconditionthatthedefectisnoticedwithin 18monthsfromthedateofreceiptofmaterialinstoresOR12monthsfromthedateofcommissioning whichever period may expire earlier. The consignee or any other officer of Nigam actually using the materialwillgivepromptnoticeofeachsuchdefecttothesupplier.Thereplacementshallbeeffectedby thesupplierwithinareasonabletime,butnot,inanycase,exceeding45days.Thesuppliershall,also, arrangetoremovethedefectivewithinareasonableperiod,butnotexceeding45daysfromthedateof issue of notice in respect thereof, failing which, the purchaser reserve the right to dispose of defective materialinanymannerconsideredfitbyhim(Purchaser),atthesoleriskandcostofthesupplier.Any sale proceeds of the defective material after meeting the expenses incurred on its custody, disposal handlingetc.,shallhoweverbecreditedtothesuppliersaccountandsetoffagainstanyoutstandingdues ofthepurchaseragainstthesupplier.Thewarrantyfor12/18monthsshallbeonetime. 17. FAKEINSPECTIONCALLS In case the supplier makes a fake inspection call i.e., the material is not found ready by the
InspectingOfficerdeputedbytheNigamforinspection,thesuppliershallbeliabletopaytheexpenses incurredbytheNigamonthisaccountsubjecttominimumofafixedpenaltyofRs.20,000/foreach suchfakecallmadebyhim. 18. CHALLENGECLAUSE The material offered / received after the inspection by the authorized inspecting Officer may
again be subjected to the test for losses or any other parameters from any testing house / in house technique of the Nigam having requisite capabilities and facilities. The results if found deviating / unacceptableorinnoncompliancewithapprovedGTPs,thelotshallberejectedandbiddershallarrange to supply the within thirty (30) days of such detection at his cost including to & fro transportation. In additiontothisapenalty@10%ofcostoftherejectedlostofmaterialshallbeimposed GeneralManager/P&D CumMemberSecretaryCSC UHBVNPanchkula
Page 7 of 9
______________________________________________________________________ GUARANTEDTECTIICALPARTTCULARSPFCONDUCTOR 1.
2. Codeword. Makersname,addressandcountry. a.) b.) c.) 3. Aluminumrods. Steelwires/reels. Completeconducer.
Strandingandwirediameter. a) b) Aluminum. Steel.
4. 5. 6.
Nominalequivalentcopperareainsq.mm. NominalequivalentAluminumareainsq.mm. Grosssectionalareainsq.mmof. a) b) c) Aluminumstrand. SteelStrand. Conductorstrand.
7. 8. 9.
ActualAluminumareainsq.mm. Diameterofcompleteconductorinmm. MinimumbreakingloadinKV. a) b) Aluminumwire. Steelwire. Before Stranding After Stranding
10.Minimumbreakingloadofconductor. 11.PurelyofAluminumrods. 12.Zinccoating. a) b) c) d) Numberof1minutedips. Weightofzinccoating. ProcessofGalvanizing. QualityofZinc.
13.Maximumworkingtensionofconductor. 14.MassinKgperKm a) Aluminum. b) Steel. c) Conductor 15.ResistanceinOhms/Kmat20C a) Aluminum. b) 16.a) ACSRConductor. Continuousmax.cementratingofconductorinstillairat50C ambientTemperatureAmps.
b) TemperatureriseforabovecurrentinDegreeC. 17.Modulousofelasticity(Practical)ofconductor. 18.Coefficientoflinearexpansion. a) a) Aluminum. Steel.
b) Conductor. 19.Percentageofcarboninsteelwirerods.
Page 8 of 9
______________________________________________________________________
20.Standardlength. 21.Toleranceifanyinstandardlength. 22.Initialandfinalsagsandtensionandstringchartswhetherfurnished. 23.No.ofstandardslengthinonereel/drum. 24.Dimensionofthereel. 25.Massoftheconductorinonereel/druminKg. 26.Massofthereeldrum. 27.Grossmassofreel/drumincludingwt.oftheconductor. 28.Standardaccordingtowhichtheconductorwillbemanufactureandtested. 29.Otherparticularsifany. 30.WhetherTestCertifiableenclosed. Yes/No 31.JointsinStrands a) Steel b) Aluminumof. c) Methodofmakingjoints. d) UltimateTensilestrengthofjoint.
Name&AddressofSupplier
Page 9 of 9
______________________________________________________________________
Specification No. CSC-VI-R-I/DH/UH/P&D/2010-11
FOR
GSS WIRE OF 7/8 SWG (4MM)
Issue of the Month: (CSC approval date 23.4.2010)
Page 1 of 4
______________________________________________________________________
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR GSS WIRE OF 7/8 SWG 4 mm and 7/14 SWG (2.24mm)
1. SCOPE: This specification covers the manufacture, testing and inspection of GSS Wire of sizes 7/8 SWG / (4mm) and 7/14 SWG (2.24mm). 2. STANDARDS: The GSS wires shall conform to IS: 2141-1979, IS-4826 (1979) and 2633 (1964) or the latest version thereof. 3. CLIMATIC CONDITIONS:
The equipment/material to be supplied against this specification shall be suitable for satisfactory operation under the following climatic Conditions
i) ii) iii) iv) v) vi) vii) viii) ix) x) xi) Location Maximum ambient temperature (oC) Minimum ambient air temperature (oC) Maximum average daily ambient temperature (oC) Maximum yearly weighed average ambient temperature (oC) Maximum altitude above mean sea level (m) Minimum Relative Humidity (%) Maximum Relative Humidity (%) Average no of Rainy days/ year Average annual rainfall Maximum wind pressure 1000 26 95 120 900 mm 195 kg/m sq. At various locations in the state of Haryana 60 -5 40 32
The equipment shall be for use in moderately hot and humid tropical climate, conducive to rust and fungus growth.
TECHNICAL PARTICULARS:
In case where joints are permitted they shall be made by welding or brazing. Joints in the same wire shall be departed by a length not less then that indicated at point (III) under Technical parameters (clause 4) and joint in the different wires shall not be less than 15 M apart.
Page 2 of 4
______________________________________________________________________ 4. TESTS:
The tests as per IS: 2141-1979 or its latest version including the tests for chemical analysis is provided therein shall be carried out. The zinc coating of the galvanized wire shall be as specified in IS: 4826/1979 with latest amendments and testing shall be carried out as specified in ISS: 2633/1964 or the latest amendment thereof. 5. INSPECITON: The material shall be inspected and tested before dispatch by an authorized representative of the Nigam in respect of quality. In case the supplier is not in position to get these tests carried out at his works, such tests may got be carried out by him at any Govt. recognized test agency at his own expenses.
6.
FAKE INSPECTION CALLS In case the supplier makes a fake inspection call i.e., the material is not found ready by the
Inspecting Officer deputed by the Nigam for inspection, the supplier shall be liable to pay the expenses incurred by the Nigam on this account subject to minimum of a fixed penalty of Rs. 20, 000/- for each such fake call made by him. 7
. TEST CERTIFICATES: The supplier shall supply one set of test certificates from a recognized Govt. agency in respect of quality as per IS: 2141-1979 with latest amendments thereof for approval of the purchaser. 8. MARKING : Each coil of GSS wire shall be marked legibly with the: a. Manufacturers name or trade mark. b. Lot number and coil number. c. A brief description and quality of material. d. Weight of the coil. e. ISI certification mark may also be marked. 9. PACKING: The supplier shall be responsible for proper packing of material so as to avoid any damage during the transport and storage and to ensure correct dispatch to the destination. The length of strand shall be as per ISS.
Page 3 of 4
______________________________________________________________________ 10. PLACE OF MANUFACTURE:
The name and place of manufacture should be indicated in the tender.
11.
CHALLENGE CLAUSE The material offered / received after the inspection by the authorized inspecting Officer
may again be subjected to the test for losses or any other parameters from any testing house / in house technique of the Nigam having requisite capabilities and facilities. The results if found deviating / unacceptable or in non-compliance with approved GTPs, the lot shall be rejected and bidder shall arrange to supply the within thirty (30) days of such detection at his cost including to & fro transportation. In addition to this a penalty @ 10% of cost of the rejected lost of material shall be imposed General Manager/P&D Cum-Member Secretary CSC UHBVN Panchkula.
Page 4 of 4
______________________________________________________________________
Specification No. CSC-XVI-R-I/DH/UH/P&D/2010-11
FOR
GI WIRE
Issue of the Month: (CSC approval date 23.4.2010)
Page 1 of 6
______________________________________________________________________
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR G.I. WIRE 1. 2. SCOPE: This specification covers the manufacture, testing and inspection of G.I. wires. APPLICABLE STANDARDS: Except when they conflict with the specific requirements of this specification, the G.I. wires shall comply with the provisions of IS: 280-1978 and IS: 7887-1975 or the latest version thereof. 3. CLIMATIC CONDITIONS: The equipment/material to be supplied against this specification shall be suitable for satisfactory operation under the following climatic Conditions i) ii) iii) iv) v) vi) vii) viii) ix) x) xi) Location Maximum ambient temperature (oC) Minimum ambient air temperature (oC) Maximum average daily ambient temperature (oC) Maximum yearly weighed average ambient temperature (oC) Maximum altitude above mean sea level (m) Minimum Relative Humidity (%) Maximum Relative Humidity (%) Average no of Rainy days/ year Average annual rainfall Maximum wind pressure 1000 26 95 120 900 mm 195 kg/m sq. At various locations in the state of Haryana 60 -5 40 32
The equipment shall be for use in moderately hot and humid tropical climate, conducive to rust and fungus growth. 4. I) II ) III ) TECHNICAL PARICULARS: Size of G.I. wire Tensile strength Quality 4mm dia 56 to 95 kgf per sq.mm Hard
Page 2 of 6
______________________________________________________________________
5. 5.1 5.2 5.3 6.
MATERIAL : The wires shall be drawn from the wire rod confirming to IS: 7887-1975 or the latest version thereof. The requirement for chemical composition for the wires shall confirm to IS: 7887. The wires shall be sound, free from split surface flaws, rough jagged and imperfect edges and other detrimental defects on the surface of the wires. GALVANISING: The wires shall be galvanized with Heavy coating as per IS: 4826-1979 or the latest
version thereof. 7. TOLERANCE IN DIAMETER: The tolerance on nominal diameter at any section of wire shall not exceed (+) (-) 2.5%. Further, the maximum difference between the diameter at any two cross- Sections of wires shall not exceed 2.5%. 8. TESTS : The following tests shall be carried out in accordance with IS: 280-1978 or the latest version thereof as per sampling criteria stipulated therein. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 9. Dimensional check (dia) refer clause 7 above. Visual inspection regarding freedom from defects-refer clause 5.3 above. Tensile test. Wrapping test. Coating test-refer clause 6 above. Chemical composition.
TEST CERTIFICATES: The supplier shall supply from any Govt. recognized test agency the test certificates for the
material offered as per IS: 280-1978 or the latest version thereof for the approval of purchaser. If the G.I. wire is bearing ISI marking then the certificate from the approved Govt. agencies will not be required. It will not however obviate the necessity of inspection /testing by the inspecting officers of the Nigam.
Page 3 of 6
______________________________________________________________________
10.
INSPECITON: The material shall be inspected and tested before dispatch as IS: 280-1978 or latest
version thereof by an authorized representative of the Nigam. In case the supplier is not in a position to get these tests carried out at his works such tests may be got carried out by him at any Govt. recognized tests agency at his own expenses. 11. PACKING : The wires shall be supplied in 50-70 kg. Coils, each coils having single continuous length. Each coil of wire shall be suitably bound and fastened compactly and shall be protected by suitable wrapping. 12. MARKING: Each coil shall be provided with a label fixed firmly on the inner part of the coil bearing the following information. 1. Manufactures name or trade mark. 2. Lot number and coil number.
3. Size. 4. Grade.
5. Mass. 6. Length. 7. Material may also be marked with ISI certification mark. 13. FAKE INSPECTION CALLS In case the supplier makes a fake inspection call i.e., the material is not found ready by the Inspecting Officer deputed by the Nigam for inspection, the supplier shall be liable to pay the expenses incurred by the Nigam on this account subject to minimum of a fixed penalty of Rs. 20, 000/- for each such fake call made by him. 14. PLACE OF MANUFACTURE : The name and place of manufacture should be given in the tender.
Page 4 of 6
______________________________________________________________________
15.
CHALLENGE CLAUSE The material offered / received after the inspection by the authorized inspecting Officer
may again be subjected to the test for losses or any other parameters from any testing house / in house technique of the Nigam having requisite capabilities and facilities. The results if found deviating / unacceptable or in non-compliance with approved GTPs, the lot shall be rejected and bidder shall arrange to supply the within thirty (30) days of such detection at his cost including to & fro transportation. In addition to this a penalty @ 10% of cost of the rejected lost of material shall be imposed General Manager/P&D Cum-Member Secretary CSC UHBVN, Panchkula.
Page 5 of 6
______________________________________________________________________
GUARATEED TECHNICAL DATA: 1. Tensile strength. 2. Quality. 3. Galvanized. 4. Min. weight of one coil.
Page 6 of 6
SPECIFICATION NO. HSD/S-364/ST-163
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR BLACK HEXAGONAL M.S. BOLTS AND NUTS.
OFFICE OF THE CHIEF ENGINEER/PLG. & CONST. TRANSMISSION DESIGN DTE., HARYANA STATE ELECY. BOARD, IDYUT NAGAR, HISAR.
ISSUE OF MONTH :__________
Technical Specification for Black Hexagonal M.S. Bolts & Nuts. 1. SCOPE : This specification covers the manufacture, testing before despatch, supply and delivery F.O.R. destination of black hexagonal MS Bolts & Nuts of various sizes. 2. APPLICABLE STANDARDS : Unless otherwise modified in this specification, the bolts and nuts shall comply with Indian Standard Specifications IS: 1363 - 1967 as amended from time to time. 3. CLIMATIC CONDITIONS : All the material is required to work satisfactorily under the following site conditions : 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 Max. temperature Min. temperature Max. relative humidity Min. relative humidity 47.50C -2. 50C 100% 26% Nearly 120
3.5 Average No. of rainy days days. Per Annum. 3.6 Average annual rain fall 3.7 Average number of dust storms days /Annum Isoceraunic level
900 mm
35 45
3.8
3.9
Max. wind pressure
195Kg /m2
3.10
Altitude above mean sea Level.
Less than 1000 Mtrs.
4.
3.11 Pollution WORKMANSHIP :
Moderate
Full threaded bolts shall not be used. The bolts and nuts shall have hexagonal heads which shall be neatly finished concentric and square with the shank and free from burrs, scale and other defects. Threads in nuts shall not be torn or ragged and shall be of proper contour.
The fits of the nuts shall be
such that there will be no locking of the nuts. Nuts and Bolts of the same size shall be interchangeable. The thread of nuts & bolts shall have coarse pitch screw threads as per I.S.S. - 4218-1967 or its latest amendments and shall meet with all applicable technical supply conditions covered under this standard. 5. 5.1 PARTICULARS OF MATERIAL : MECHANICAL PROPERTIES : The mechanical properties of bolts covered in this standard shall
conform to the property clause 4.6 and those for nuts shall conform to the property clause 4 specified in IS: 1367-1967 or its latest edition. 6. GRADE : Bolts & Nuts covered in this specification shall conform to Black Grade B, specified in IS: 1367-1967. 7. DESIGNATION : Black Bolts & Nuts covered in this specification shall be designated as per table I of IS : 1363-1967. 8. DIMENSIONS : The dimensions for black bolts & nuts shall be as given in table 2 & 3. The bolts and nuts shall have coarse pitch screw threads conforming to IS : 4218-1967 (ISO Metric Screw Threads).
Preferred length diameter combinations for black hexagonal bolts are given in table-4 IS : 1363-1967. 9. REQUIREMENTS : 9.1 The method of sampling and acceptance criteria of black hexagonal
Bolts and Nuts shall be in accordance with IS: 2614-1964. 9.2 The Bolts & Nuts conforming to this standard shall comply with the
requirements of IS: 1367-1967 in regard to requirements not specified in this standard. 10 TESTS : All types of tests including routine tests shall be carried out according to IS : 1367-1967 or its latest amendment. 11. INSPECTION : The material shall be inspected and tested before despatch by authorised representative of the Board in respect of its quality. The
manufacturer shall provide to the inspecting officer, of the purchaser, all reasonable facilities, without charge, to satisfy him that the material is being furnished in accordance with the specification. The purchaser or his authorized representative shall have access at all reasonable times to manufacturers works to inspects and witness the tests of the material manufactured. The purchaser has the right to have the tests carried out at the cost of the supplier by an independent Govt, agency, whenever there is dispute regarding the quality of material supplied. 12. PLACE OF MANUFACTURE : The tenderer shall state the place of manufacture, testing and name of the manufacturer of the various items included in his tender. 13. PACKING AND TRANSPORT : The supplier shall be responsible for suitable packing of all the material and marking on the consignment, so as to avoid any damage during transport and storage and to ensure correct despatch to the destination. The packing shall be conforming to the requirement laid down in IS: 3256-1965 or its latest amendment. 14. DRAWING AND LITERATURE : Illustrated and descriptive literature on the material offered must be submitted along with the tender. 15. RAW MATERIAL : No assistance whatsoever for arranging the raw material for manufacture of Bolts & Nuts shall be provided by the purchaser. The delivery shall not be dependent upon availability of raw material. 16. MARKING : The material shall be marked with the ISI certification mark. The sealed container of bolts & nuts shall be marked with: a) Manufacturer name & trade mark. b) Place of manufacturers. c) The name & designation of consignee ( to be furnished by the purchaser). d) Ultimate destination as required by the purchaser. e) The marking shall be stencilled in delible ink on gunny bags. f) Net weight with description of material. Sd/Superintending Engineer/Design, for Chief Engineer/P&C, Transmission, Design Directorate, HSEB, Hisar.
ANNEXURE A
Sr. No.
Description
Quantity Required
1.
Black Hexogonal M.S. Bolts
Rs. ________________
2.
Black Hexagonal M.S. Nuts
Rs. ________________
TECHNICALSPECIFICATION FOR 11 KV LIGHTNING ARRESTOR.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR 11 KV LIGHTNING ARRESTER FOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 5 KA, SERIES B.
1. SCOPE :
This specification covers the design, manufacture, testing, inspection at manufacturers works & delivery of 11 KV lightning arrestors.
2.
APPLICABLE STANDARDS :
The material shall conform in all respects to the relevant IEC standards with latest amendments thereof. The bidder shall use ISS where corresponding IEC is not available. However, where both the standards are available, IEC will be used. IEC or other National Standards are permitted where these are equivalent or superior to IEC. In such cases salient points of difference between the standards adopted and the IEC standards shall be clearly brought out in the relevant schedule Four copies of such standards with authentic English translation shall be finished alongwith the offer.
3.
CLIMATIC CONDITIONS : The equipment is required to operate satisfactorily under the following site conditions : TEMPERATURE : A) B) Maximum temperature of air Minimum temperature of air 50 Degree C -2.5 Degree C.
RELATIVE HUMIDITY : A) B) Maximum Minimum Isoceraunic Level 100% 26% 45
Average rainfall per year Altitude
900 mm Below 1000 M. Above sea level. 150 Kg./Sq.m. Nearly 4 months In a year.
Maximum wind pressure No. of rainy days per year
4.
TECHNICAL PARTICULARS : The Lightning Arrestors shall be of Metal Oxide Gapless type suitable for outdoor installation on 11000 volts, 50 cycles per ;second, 3 phase A.C. system with neutral solidly grounded. The highest line to line system voltage should be 12.0 KV (rms) and other particulars are as under : A) B) C) Voltage rating in KV RMS Nominal discharge current rating Maximum residual test voltage specified 9 KV rms. 5 KVA. 34 KV peak with 8/20 micro second current waves.
5.
DRAWINGS : The tendered along with tender, should offer dimensional drawings and illustrated descriptive literature of the equipment.
6.
TESTS : The type routine and acceptance as per IS : 3010 (Part-III)/IEC Ch-4 (1991) with latest version thereof shall be carried out.
7.
INSPECTION :
The material shall be inspected and tested before despatch by an authorized representative of the Nigam in respect of quality. The
manufacturer shall provide the necessary facilities for such inspection. In case the supplier is not in a position to get these test carried out at his works, such tests may be got carried out by him at any Govt. recognized testing agency at his own expense.
8.
TEST CERTIFICATES :
The supplier shall supply certificates as per IS 3070/99 4 with latest amendment thereof from a recognized Government agency for approval of the purchaser.
9.
MARKING :
Each lightning arrestor shall be provided with a name plate or plae legibly and indelibly marked with the name or trade mark of the manufacturer and country of Manufacture rated voltage, nominal discharge current, type destination and serial number of the Lightning Arrestor, identification mark on each separately housed unit to enable it to be replaced in correct position after a multi unit arrestor has been dismantled should also be marked ISI certification mark may also be marked.
10.
GUARANTEED & TECHNICAL PARTICULARS :
The ;tenderers shall supply the relevant information and technical particulars called for in the schedule of guaranteed and technical particulars as per Annexure A. 11. QUALITY ASSURANCE :
To ensure that the goods/equipment under the scope of this contract whether manufactured at the bidders works or at its sub-contractors premises or at any other place of work are manufactured following Quality Assurance Program. Such programs shall be outlined by the bidder and shall be submitted along with the bid. A quality assurance program of the bidder submitted by the bidder must cover the following. 11.1 The bidders organization structure for the management and implementation of the proposed quality assurance program. 11.2 11.3 11.4 Documentation control system. Qualification data of key personnel. The procedure for purchase of material parts, components and selection of sub-contractor including vendor analysis, source inspection, incoming raw materials inspection, verification of materials purchased etc. 11.5 A quality plan detailing out the specific quality control procedure adopted or controlling the quality of equipment during manufacturing. 11.6 System of quality audits.
12.
QUALITY ASSURANCE PROGRAM :
The quality assurance program shall be discussed with the successful bidder after the award of the contract and the final version mutually agreed between the purchaser and the bidder shall form a part of the Contract Agreement signed between the purchaser and the bidder.
10
ANNEXURE A
GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS.
1. 2. 3. 4.
Rated Lightning Arresters Voltage. Rated Lightning Arresters Current. Maximum continuous operating voltage. Maximum residual voltage with 8/20 microsecond wave at 2.5 KA 5.0 KA 10.0 KA
1.
High current short duration withstand current ( .4/10 microsecond wave)
2. 3.
Maximum energy discharge capability. Maximum steep current impulse Residual Voltage at 5 KA discharge current.
4.
One minute power frequency withstand voltage for arrester housing. a. b. Dry Wet
5. 6.
Total creepage distance of arrester. Temporary over voltage withstand capability. 0.1 second. 1.0 second. 10.0 second.
11
SECTION VII-D
DRAWINGS
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
UTTAR & DAKSHIN HARYANA BIJLI VITRAN NIGAM
Specification No. CSC- XXIX/DH/UH/P&D/2009-2010
TECHNICALSPECIFICATION FOR PORCELAIN INSULATROS AND INSULATORS FITTINGS FOR 11 KV OVERHEAD POWER LINES
Issue of the Month:
Common Specifications Committee UHBVN & DHBVN
Page 1 of 11
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR PORCELAIN INSULATORS INSULATORS FITTINGS FOR 11 KV OVERHEAD LINES: 1. SCOPE :
AND
2.
This specification covers the details of the porcelain insulators and insulator fittings for use on 11 KV overhead power lines met with in rural Electric distribution systems. APPLICABLE STANDARDS : Except when they conflict with the specific requirements of this specification, the insulators shall comply with the Indian Standard Specification IS: 731 1971 or the latest version thereof and the insulator fittings shall comply with the Indian Standard Specification IS: 2486 (Part-I), IS 2486 (Part-II) 1974 & IS: 3188 or the latest version thereof or equivalent international standards.
3.
CLIMATIC CONDITIONS : The equipment is required to operate satisfactory under the following site conditions: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. Max. ambient air temperature Min. ambient air temperature Average Daily Max. ambient temperature Max. yearly temperature weighted average 600C (-)50C 400C ambient 320C 1000 26 95 120 900 mm 195 Kg./m Sq.
Max. altitude above mean sea level (Meters) Minimum Relative Humidity (%age) Max. Relative Humidity (%age) Avg. No. of Rainy days/year Avg. annual rainfall Maximum wind pressure GENERAL REQUIREMENT :
4. 4.1
The porcelain shall be sound free from defects thoroughly vitrified and smoothly glazed. Unless otherwise specified, the glaze shall be brown in colours. The glaze shall cover all the porcelain parts of the insulator except those areas which serve as support during firing or are left unglazed for the purpose of assembly. The design of the insulator shall be such that stresses due to expansion and contraction in any part of the insulator shall not lead to deterioration. The porcelain shall not engage directly with hard metal.
4.2
4.3
Page 2 of 11
4.4
Cement used in the construction of the insulator shall not cause fracture kby expansion or loosing by contraction and proper care shall be taken to locate the individual parts correctly during cementing. The cement shall not give rise to chemical reaction with metal fittings and its thickness shall be as uniform as possible. The insulators should preferably be manufactured in automatic temperature controlled kilns to obtain uniform baking and better electrical & mechanical properties. CLASSIFICATION AND DIMENSIONS :
4.5
5. 5.1 5.2 5.3
Both pin & strain insulators shall conform to type B of IS: 731. The dimension of pin insulators shall be as shown in the drawings. The strain insulators shall be ball & socket type or Tongue & clevis type, as required by the purchaser. The dimensions of these insulators shall be as per IS: 2486 (Part-II). TEST VOLTAGES : The test voltages of insulators shall be as under:
6.
Highest system voltage
Visible discharge test
Wet power frequency withstand test.
Power frequency puncture withstand test (Pin Insulators)
Power frequency puncture withstand test (Strain Insulators)
Impulse voltage withstand test.
KV 12
(rms) KV (rms) 9
KV 35
(rms) KV 105
(rms) KV (rms) KV 1.3 times 75 the actual dry flash over voltage of insulator
(Peak)
7. 7.1
FAILING LOAD : Electro mechanical failing load (for Pin Insulators only). The
insulators shall be suitable for a minimum failing load of 5 KN applied in transverse direction.
7.2
Electro mechanical failing load (for strain insulators only).
The
insulators shall be suitable for a minimum failing load of 45 KN applied in axially.
Page 3 of 11
8.
CREEPAGE DISTANCE : The maximum creepage distance shall be as under: Highest voltage system Normal & moderately polluted atmosphere 230 mm Heavily polluted Atmosphere Pin Insulator 320 mm strain insulator 400 mm
12 KV
Higher value of creepage distance has been specified for strain insulators as these are normally used in horizontal position in 11 KV lines. 9. TESTS: The insulators shall comply with the following tests as per IS 731 or equivalent international standards. 9.1 TYPE TESTS : The following shall constitute the type tests: A) B) C) D) E) F) G) H) I) J) K) L) Visual examination. Verification of dimensions. Impulse voltage withstand test. Wet power frequency voltage withstand test. Temperature cycles test. Electro mechanical failing load test. (for strain insulator only). Mechanical failing load test. (for Pin Insulator only). Puncture test. Porosity test. Galvanizing test. Visible discharge test. 24 hours mechanical strength test. (for strain insulators only).
9.2
ACCEPTANCE TESTS : The test samples after having withstood the routine test shall be subjected to the following acceptance tests in the order indicated below:
Page 4 of 11
A) B) C) D) E) F) 9.3
Verification of dimensions. Temperature cycle tests. Electro mechanical failing load test (for strain insulator only). Puncture test (for strain insulator only). Porosity test and. Galvanizing test.
ROUTINE TESTS : The following test shall be carried out as routine tests: A) B) C) Visual examination. Mechanical routine test (for strain insulator only). Electrical routine test. (for strain insulator only).
10. 10.1
MARKING: Each insulator shall be legibly and indelibly marked to show the following: A) Name or trade mark of the manufacturer. B) Month and year of manufacture. C) Min. failing load in KN. D) ISI certification mark, if any. Marking on porcelain shall be printed and shall be applied before firing. PACKING : All insulators (without fittings) shall be packed in wooden crates suitable for easy and rough handling land acceptable for rail transport, where more than one insulator is packed in a crate wooden separators shall be fixed between the insulators to keep individual insulator in position without movement within the crate.
10.1.1
11.
PART-B INSULATOR FITTINGS : 12. SCOPE : This specification covers details and test requirements for: 1) Pins for 11 KV Pin Insulators. 2) Fittings for strain insulators.
Page 5 of 11
13.
APPLICABLE STANDARD : Pins shall comply with the requirements of IS: 2486 (Part I & II) with latest amendments. Fitting for strain insulator shall comply with the requirements of IS: 2486, Part-I to IV with latest amendments or equivalent international standards.
14.1 14.1.1
Pins for Pin Insulators. General requirements : The pins shall be a single piece obtained preferably by the process of forging. They shall not be made by joining, welding, shrink fitting or any other process from more than one piece of material. They shall be of good finish, free from flaws and other defects. The finish of the cellar shall be such that a sharp angle between the cellar and the shank is avoided. All ferrous pins, nuts & washer except those made of stainless steel shall be galvanized. The threads of nuts & tapped holes shall be cut after galvanizing and shall be well oiled or greased.
14.2
DIMENSIONS : Pins shall be of small steel head type S-I as per IS : 3486 (Part II) having stalk length of 165 mm and shank length of 150mm with minimum failing load of 5 KN.
14.3
TEST : Insulator pins shall comply with the following test as per IS: 2486 (Part-I) or equivalent international standards.
14.3.1
ACCEPTANCE TEST : a) b) c) Checking of threads on heads. Galvanizing test. Mechanical test.
14.3.2
ROUTINE TEST : Visual examination test.
14.3.3
TYPE TEST : a) b) c) d) Checking of threads on heads. Galvanizing test. Mechanical test. Visual examination test.
Page 6 of 11
15. 15.1
STRAIN INSULATORS SETS : GENERAL REQUIREMENTS : All forging and casting shall be of good finish and free from laws and other defects. All edges on the outside of fittings such as at the eye, clevis & holes, shall be rounded. All parts of different fittings which provide for interconnection shall be made such that sufficient clearance is provided at the connection point to ensure free movement and suspension of the insulator string assembly. All eye and clevis connections shall be free but the care shall be taken that too much clearance between eye & the tongues of the clevis is avoided. All ferrous fittings and the parts other than those stain less steel, shall be galvanized, small fittings like spring washers, nuts etc. may be electroplated with zinc.
15.1.1
TYPE : Clevis and tongue type insulator set shall be supplied, the nominal dimensions of the clevis and tongue type insulator set shall be as given in IS: 2486.
15.1.2
TESTS : Strain insulator sets shall comply with the following tests as per IS: 2486 (Part I).
15.1.2.1
TYPE TESTS : A) B) C) Mechanical test. Electrical resistance test (for tension clamps only). Heating cycles test (for tension clamps only).
15.1.2.2
SAMPLE TEST : A) B) Dimensional. Galvanizing check electroplating test.
15.1.2.3
ROUTINE TEST : A) B) Visual check. Mechanical test.
15.2
STRAIN CLAMPS : Suitable aluminum alloys clamps shall be provided alongwith the fittings to suit ACSR conductors 7/2. 11 mm 7/3. 35mm. The ultimate strength of clamps should not be less than 3000 Kgs. Page 7 of 11
16. 16.1
MARKING : The caps and clamps shall have mark on them with the following information : a) b) Name or trade mark of the manufacture. Country of manufacture.
17. 17.1
PACKING : For packing of GI pins, strain clamps & related hardware, double gunny bags or wooden cases if deemed necessary shall be employed. The heads & threads portions of pins & the fittings shall be properly protected against damage. The gross weight of the
packing shall not normally exceed 50 Kg. Different fittings shall be packed in different bags or cases and shall be complete with their minor accessories fitted in place. All nuts shall be hand tightened over the bolts & screwed up to the farthest point. 17.2 The packages containing fittings may also be marked with the ISI certification mark. 18. TEST & TEST CERTIFICATES : The tenderers shall submit Photostat copies of all the tests including type test as prescribed in the relevant ISS from any accredited laboratory 19. GUARANTEED & OTHER TECHNICAL PARTICULARS : These particulars shall be furnished strictly as per Annexure A in duplicate. Any deviation from this specification shall be clearly
brought out separately. 20. PLACE OF MANUFACTURE : The tender shall state the place of manufacturer, testing and name of the manufacturer of the various items included in his Tender. 21. INSPECTION : Inspection of material and supervision of test in accordance with the relevant standards as mentioned in clause 2 & 13 above and supporting drawing and schedules, and approved manufacturer specification shall be carried out by the purchaser or his duly authorized representative. The material shall be inspected and
tested before dispatch by an authorized representative of the DHBVN in respect of quality. The manufacturer shall provide to the Page 8 of 11
inspecting officer all reasonable facilities without charge to satisfy him that the material is being furnished in accordance with the specification. The purchaser or his authorized representative shall have access to all reasonable time to manufacturers works to inspect and witness the test of the equipment manufactured. The purchaser has the right to have the tests carried out at the cost of supplier by an independent Govt. agency wherever there is a dispute regarding the quality of material supplied. The manufacturer shall be responsible to pay penalty of Rs 20,000/- for each occasion at which the fake inspection call has been made or the material is rejected during testing/inspection by the authorized agency/representative of the Nigam. This penalty would be in addition to the expenses incurred by the Nigam in deputing the Inspecting Officer, carrying out such inspection. 22. Challenge Clause:The material offered/received after the inspection by the authorized inspecting officer may again be subjected to the test for or any parameter from any testing house/in-house technique of the Nigam & the results if found deviating un-acceptable or not complying to approved GTPs the bidder shall arrange to supply the replacement within thirty (30) days of such detection at his cost including to & fro transportation. In addition , penalty @10% of cost of the inspected lot of material shall be imposed. 23. Warranty Period:The supplier shall be responsible to replace, free of cost, with no transportation or insurance cost to the purchaser, up to destination, the whole or any part to the material which in normal and proper use proves the defective in quality or workmanship, subject to the condition that the defect is noticed within 18 months from the date of receipt of material in stores or 12 months from the date of commissioning whichever period may expire earlier. The consignee or nay other officer of Nigam actually using the material will give
Page 9 of 11
prompt notice of each such defect to the supplier. The replacement shall be effected by the supplier within a reasonable time, but not, in any case, exceeding 45 days. The supplier shall, also, arrange to remove the defective within a reasonable period, but not exceeding 45 days from the date of issue of notice in respect thereof, failing which, the purchaser reserve the right to dispose of defective material in any manner considered fit by him (purchaser), at the sole risk and cost of the supplier. Any sale proceeds of the defective material after meeting the expenses incurred on its custody, disposal handling etc., shall however be credited to the suppliers account and set off against any outstanding dues of the purchaser against the supplier. The warranty for 12/18 months shall be one time.
Director/Technical-I, UHBNV, Panchkula
Director/Project, CGM/PD&C, DHBVN, Hisar UHBVN, Panchkula
CGM/P&D, DHBVN, Hisar.
FA & CAO/MM, UHBNV, Panchkula
FA & CAO/MM, DHBVN, Hisar
GM/P&D, UHBNV, Panchkula
GM/P&D, DHBVN, Hisar
Page 10 of 11
ANNEXURE A GURANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF PORCELAIN INSULATORS FOR 11 KV OVERHEAD POWER LINE :
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18.
Makers name and country. Nominal voltage. Highest voltage. Dry one minute power frequencies withstand voltage. Wet Dry one minute power frequencies withstand voltage. Power frequencies withstand voltage. Impulse withstand voltage (1/50 second positive waves ). Visible discharge test voltage. Impulse flashover voltage (1/50 micro second positive waves). Impulse flashover voltage (1/50 micro second negative waves). Dry flashover voltage. Wet flashover voltage. Min. failing load. Minimum creepage distance. Weight per unit. Size of insulators. Standard to which the insulator shall be manufactured and tested. Tolerance in dimensions, if any.
Page 11 of 11
Specification No. CSC-
/DH/UH/P&D/2009-2010
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF 11 kV 400 A GO SWITCHES
Issue Month:
C:\Documents and Settings\Administrator\Desktop\14-12-09\PDC\CSC-XXV to XXXI\CSC-XXVIII.docPage
1 of 8
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR 11 kV 400 A GANG OPERATED SWITCHES

1. SCOPE This specification covers the design, manufacture, testing at manufacturers works of supply & delivery of 11KV 400 A G.O. switches complete with manually operated equipment and accessories required for their satisfactory operation for their use on distribution sub-station and tapping/sectionalizing points of 11 KV lines. APPLICABLE STANDARDS & DESCRIPTION All material used for manufacturing 11 KV G.O. Switches i.e. 11 KV Post Insulators, G.I.Pipe, MS Channel, Brass Male/Female contacts & Arcing Horns shall comply with the Indian Standard Specification IS: 2544, IS: 5340 (Part-III) and IS: 9921 (Part I to V). However, Material manufactured as per any other international standard offering material, quality and workmanship of equivalence or better shall also be acceptable. The detailed description of equipment shall be as under: 11 KV, 400 Amps, triple pole gang operated, outdoor type, single throw, single break tilting type manually operated. Air Break Switches, suitable for vertical mounting on structures 6 meters above ground level fitted with 2 no. 11 KV Post Insulators per phase, i.e. 6 no. Post Insulators per switch of standard make conforming to latest versions of IS-2544 & IS-5350 (Part-III) complete with fixed & moving contacts base of gun metal cast/, duly electroplated and jaw (U) fixed with spring able strips. The movable contacts i.e. blades will be made of gunmetal/brass/copper casting, duly electroplated. Multi-bolt type clamps of non-ferrous metal will be provided for incoming and outgoing connections. Fixed and moving contacts complete with G.I. Arcing horns fitted on 11KV Post Insulators will be mounted on suitable MS Channel (Vertical). Phase coupler bar will be of 32mm diameter galvanized iron pipe. Operating rod shall be of 25 mm inner diameter and 32 mm outer diameter G. I. Pipe having free length of 5100 mm excluding the length of handle. The sizes of rods used for arcing horns would be 2 SWG M.S. The complete equipment shall be as per latest version of IS-9921 (Part-I to V). MS Channel, C.I. casting for lever and side plates are to be hot dipped Galvanized as per relevant ISS. All other ferrous parts including nuts, bolts and washers are to be hot dipped galvanized. All Current carrying nuts, bolts and washers are to be hot dipped galvanized. The equipment supplied shall also conform to detailed specification with guaranteed technical particulars and approved drawings attached herewith. PARTICULARS OF SYSTEM. The switches shall be used on three-phase 11 KV 50 Hz A.C. Power system having solidly grounded neutral. CLIMATIC CONDITIONS: The equipment/material to be supplied against this specification shall be suitable for satisfactory operation under the following climatic Conditions i) Location At various locations in the state of Haryana ii) Max ambient temperature (deg.c) 60 iii) Min ambient air temperature (deg. c) -5 iv) Max average daily ambient temperature 40 (deg. c)
2 of 8
2. i)
ii)
3.
4.
Max. yearly weighed average ambient 32 temperature (deg. C) vi) Max. altitude above mean sea level 1000 (Meters) vii) Minimum Relative Humidity (%age ) 26 viii) Max. Relative Humidity (%age) 95 ix) Avg. no of Rainy days/ year 120 x) Avg. annual rainfall 900mm xi) Maximum wind pressure 195 Kg./m2 The equipment shall be for use in moderately hot and humid tropical climate, conducive to rust and fungus growth. 5. Rating Nominal system voltage Rated voltage Rated current Rated Frequency Peak current in closed position. One minute power frequency withstand voltage between I) Earth & poles ii) Across terminal of open switch. Rated lightning impulse withstand voltage between I) Poles & Earth. ii) Across terminal of open switch. Min. short time current
v)
12 KV 11 KV 400 Amps. 50 HZ 46 KA
28 KV (rms) 32 KV (rms)
75 KV (Peak) 85 KV (Peak) 18.42 KA for 1 second.
6.
SWITCH INSULATION Insulation to ground, insulation between open contacts and insulation between phases of the completely assembled G.O. Switches shall be capable of withstanding the dielectric test voltages specified in IS-9921-Part-IV. Insulation between open contacts of a pole shall at least be 15 % more than the insulation between the live parts of pole to ground, so that If any flashover occurs when switch is open, it shall be to the ground. All insulators provided to form a stack shall conform to the relevant Indian Standard Specifications. The porcelain shall be homogeneous and free from all cavities and flaws. Design of insulators shall ensure ample insulation, mechanical strength and rigidity for satisfactory operation under site conditions. The design shall also ensure that the losses caused by capacitive current or conduction through dielectric are minimum and that leakage due to moist and dirty insulators surfaces is least. All metal caps and supports shall be cemented to the porcelain whereas the blades and contact blocks shall be bolted to the metal parts of the insulators thus making the replacement of damaged insulators easy. All ferrous metal parts, flanges, bolts and nuts etc. shall be galvanized. The porcelain post insulators should be from the leading manufacturers like LAMCO, CGL, OBLEM, ELPRO, Raychem RPG, WS, Jayashree, only. G.O. SWITCH OPERATION AND OPERATING MECHANISM The switches shall be suitable for local manual operation. The Operating mechanism shall comprise of operating pipe with intermediate couplings and manual operating handle. Height of operating handle may vary from 1000 to 1300mm. The operating mechanism shall give good mechanical leverage with minimum loose/lost motions. There shall be suitable pad-locking arrangement for both ON and OFF positions.
7.
3 of 8
8.
BEARING Graded cast rocking type levers supported on side plates/fabricated type as per drawings. Bearing housing shall be weather proof and facilities shall be provided for easy lubrication. PACKING & TRANSPORTATION. The supplier shall be responsible for suitable packing of all the material and marking on the consignment to ensure correct dispatch to the destination. All G.O. Switches shall be packed suitably capable of withstanding rough handling for transportation to the various consignees so as to avoid any shortage and damage occurring during transit. Separators shall be fixed between the post insulators and other breakable parts of GO Switch and also between individual GO Switches so as to prevent relative movement to avoid damage. All the labels used on each packing shall be of tin securely bounded with wire and shall have the descriptive marking stamped thereon. All GO Switches damaged during transportation shall be to the suppliers account. DESIGN FEATURE Contact System The male and female contacts assemblies shall be of sturdy construction and design to ensure Electro dynamic withstand ability during short circuits. Thermal withstand-ability during short circuits. Constant contact pressure even when the live parts of the insulator stacks are subject to tensile stresses due to linear expansion of connected bus bar of flexible conductors either because of temperature variation or strong winds. Self-wiping action during closing and opening. Self-alignment assuring closing of the switch without calling for any adjustment. Temperature Rise Maximum temperature attained by any part of the isolating switches when in service at site under continuous and exposed continuously to the direct rays of sun and the air having temperature of 60 degree centigrade shall not exceed the permissible limits fixed by latest edition IS-9921 (Part-I to V). Maximum temperature rise under the above noted condition should not exceed the permissible limits when corrected for the difference between ambient temperature at site and the reference ambient temperature in IS-9921 (Part-I to V).
9.
10. 10.1
I. II. III.
IV. V. 10.2
10.2.1 Arcing horns A set of adjustable arcing horns made from 2 SWG G. I. Wire shall be mounted on each insulator stack of G.O. Switch. The supplier shall supply a graph showing impulse and power frequency spark over voltage for various gap settings of arcing horns. 11. CURRENT CARRYING PARTS All current carrying parts shall be of non-ferrous metal or alloys and shall be designed to limit sharp points/edges. Design of isolating contacts shall permit easy maintenance and renewal of contacts. NAME PLATES The switches shall be provided with a nameplate, which contains the information in accordance with IS-9921 (part I to V). The name plates will be weather and rust proof.
4 of 8
12.
13.
COMPLETENESS OF EQUIPMENT All fittings, accessories or apparatus which may not have been specially mentioned in this specification but which are otherwise necessary for satisfactory working of G.O. switches shall be deemed to have been included in the scope of supply. TYPE TESTS The principle components of G.O switches shall be Type Tested as per relevant clauses of IS-9921 (part-I to V) or latest version there of. Two sets of copies of Type Test certificates carried out only at CPRI, ERDA, NPL or any other Govt. of India approved lab / testing house shall be accepted. Further type tests carried out from the said testing houses on similar equipment, not earlier than 3 years on date of opening of bids shall be acceptable. Bids not accompanied with copies of Type Test certificates from CPRI, ERDA, NPL or any other Govt. of India approved lab / testing house, are liable to be rejected. The firm shall state the testing facilities available at their works. The following shall comprise type tests. (a) Tests to verify the insulation level, including withstand tests at powerfrequency voltage on auxiliary equipment. (b) Tests to prove that the temperature rise of any part does not exceed the limits. (c) Tests to prove the capability of the disconnector or earthing Switch to carry the rated peak withstand current and the rated short-time withstands current. (d) Tests to prove the short circuit making capacity of earthing switches. (e) Tests to prove satisfactory operation and mechanical endurance.
14.
15. ROUTINE TESTS Routine tests as per latest edition of IS-9921 (part-I to V) shall be carried out at works of the manufacturer. The following shall comprise Routine tests:(a) (b) (c) Power frequency voltage dry test. Measurement of the resistance of the main circuit. Operating test. Copies of Routine test certificates shall be supplied along with the acceptance tests carried out in the presence of purchasers authorized representative. All tests reports shall be submitted and shall be got approved by the purchaser or his authorized representative before dispatch. 16. INSPECTION Testing and inspection of material in accordance with the relevant ISS as mentioned in clause Applicable standards above and as per drawings approved by the purchaser, shall be carried out by the purchaser or his duly authorised representative at works of the manufacturers. The manufacturer shall provide to the inspecting officer all reasonable facilities without charge to satisfy him that the material is being furnished in accordance with the specification. The purchaser or his authorised representative shall have access at all reasonable times to manufacturers works to inspect and witness the tests of the equipment manufactured.
5 of 8
The purchaser has the right to have the tests carried out at the cost of the supplier by an independent Govt. agency, wherever there is a dispute regarding the quality of material supplied. 17. Drawings The bidder shall submit two sets of detailed dimensional drawing indicating there in the material used for various components. Manufacture of material shall not be commenced before receipt of approved drawings from the purchaser. Material not complying with dimensional drawings shall be rejected. Guaranteed Technical Particulars Guaranteed Technical Particulars as detailed in Annexure I shall be submitted along with the Tender. Tenders with out accompanying GTPS shall not be accepted.
18.
19.
20.
GUARANTEE / WARRANTEE The supplier shall be responsible to replace, free of cost, with no transportation or insurance cost to the Purchaser, up to destination, the whole or any part of the material which in normal and proper use proves the defective in quality or workmanship, subject to the condition that the defect is noticed within 18 months from the date of receipt of material in stores OR 12 months from the date of commissioning whichever period may expire earlier. The consignee or any other officer of Nigam actually using the material will give prompt notice of each such defect to the supplier. The replacement shall be effected by the supplier within a reasonable time, but not, in any case, exceeding 45 days. The supplier shall, also, arrange to remove the defective within a reasonable period, but not exceeding 45 days from the date of issue of notice in respect thereof, failing which, the purchaser reserve the right to dispose of defective material in any manner considered fit by him (Purchaser), at the sole risk and cost of the supplier. Any sale proceeds of the defective material after meeting the expenses incurred on its custody, disposal handling etc., shall however be credited to the suppliers account and set off against any outstanding dues of the purchaser against the supplier. The warranty for 12/18 months shall be one time. CHALLENGE CLAUSE The material offered/received after the inspection by the authorized inspecting officer may again be subjected to the test for losses or any other parameter from any Testing House/in-house technique of the Nigam & the results if found deviating un-acceptable or not complying to approved GTP's the bidder shall arrange to supply the replacement within thirty (30) days of such detection at his cost including to & fro transportation. In addition to this penalty @10% of cost of the inspected lot of material shall be imposed. This issues with the approval of Common Specifications Committee.
General Manager/P&D Cum-Member Secretary CSC UHBVN Panchkula
6 of 8
Annexure-I GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR 11KV, 400 Amps G.O. SWITCHES
G.O. SWITCHES:1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. Name of manufacturer No. of breaks per pole. No. of poles Rated voltage Rated frequency Rated current Minimum short time current (KA for 1sec.) Max. temp. rise of contacts Material of moving contact Material of arcing horns Material and size of operation handle & rod Size of base channels Type of bearings. Minimum clearance between phases Minimum clearance between phases & earth. 1.2/50 microsecond Impulse withstand voltage i) ii) 17. (B) Across isolating distance Between poles and earth.
One minute power frequency withstand voltage
POST INSULATORS 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. Name of manufacturer Type of insulators Height of the insulator: Creepage distance (Min.) Weight of each unit
7 of 8
23.
Flash over voltage: (i) Dry power frequency (ii) (iii) (iv) Wet power frequency Impulse withstand voltage of 1.2/50 micro seconds(+ve) Impulse withstand voltage of 1.2/50 micro seconds(-ve)
24. (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) 25. 26. 27.
Withstand voltages Power frequency one minute dry withstand voltage Power frequency one minute impulse wet withstand voltage Impulse withstand voltage micro seconds (+ve polarity) Impulse withstand voltage of 1.2/50 micro seconds (-ve polarity) Power frequency puncture withstand voltage of unit Cantilever strength upright position Cantilever strength in under hung position Tensile strength
Name of Signatory with stamp
8 of 8
Subject: Amendment in Technical Specification of 11 kV 400 A GANG OPERATED SWITCHES

Sr. No. 1. 6. SWITCH INSULATION Clause No. Existing The porcelain post insulators should be from the leading manufacturers like LAMCO, CGL, OBLEM, ELPRO, Raychem RPG, WS, Jayashree, only Amended The porcelain post insulators should be of any make , however , separate type test for 11 kV post insulator shall have to be supplied by the supplier in addition to the overall type test being submitted for GO switch as a complete unit
TECHNICALSPECIFICATION FOR 11 KV LIGHTNING ARRESTOR.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR 11 KV LIGHTNING ARRESTER FOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 5 KA, SERIES B.
1. SCOPE :
This specification covers the design, manufacture, testing, inspection at manufacturers works & delivery of 11 KV lightning arrestors.
2.
APPLICABLE STANDARDS :
The material shall conform in all respects to the relevant IEC standards with latest amendments thereof. The bidder shall use ISS where corresponding IEC is not available. However, where both the standards are available, IEC will be used. IEC or other National Standards are permitted where these are equivalent or superior to IEC. In such cases salient points of difference between the standards adopted and the IEC standards shall be clearly brought out in the relevant schedule Four copies of such standards with authentic English translation shall be finished alongwith the offer.
3.
CLIMATIC CONDITIONS : The equipment is required to operate satisfactorily under the following site conditions : TEMPERATURE : A) B) Maximum temperature of air Minimum temperature of air 50 Degree C -2.5 Degree C.
RELATIVE HUMIDITY : A) B) Maximum Minimum Isoceraunic Level 100% 26% 45
Average rainfall per year Altitude
900 mm Below 1000 M. Above sea level. 150 Kg./Sq.m. Nearly 4 months In a year.
Maximum wind pressure No. of rainy days per year
4.
TECHNICAL PARTICULARS : The Lightning Arrestors shall be of Metal Oxide Gapless type suitable for outdoor installation on 11000 volts, 50 cycles per ;second, 3 phase A.C. system with neutral solidly grounded. The highest line to line system voltage should be 12.0 KV (rms) and other particulars are as under : A) B) C) Voltage rating in KV RMS Nominal discharge current rating Maximum residual test voltage specified 9 KV rms. 5 KVA. 34 KV peak with 8/20 micro second current waves.
5.
DRAWINGS : The tendered along with tender, should offer dimensional drawings and illustrated descriptive literature of the equipment.
6.
TESTS : The type routine and acceptance as per IS : 3010 (Part-III)/IEC Ch-4 (1991) with latest version thereof shall be carried out.
7.
INSPECTION :
The material shall be inspected and tested before despatch by an authorized representative of the Nigam in respect of quality. The
manufacturer shall provide the necessary facilities for such inspection. In case the supplier is not in a position to get these test carried out at his works, such tests may be got carried out by him at any Govt. recognized testing agency at his own expense.
8.
TEST CERTIFICATES :
The supplier shall supply certificates as per IS 3070/99 4 with latest amendment thereof from a recognized Government agency for approval of the purchaser.
9.
MARKING :
Each lightning arrestor shall be provided with a name plate or plae legibly and indelibly marked with the name or trade mark of the manufacturer and country of Manufacture rated voltage, nominal discharge current, type destination and serial number of the Lightning Arrestor, identification mark on each separately housed unit to enable it to be replaced in correct position after a multi unit arrestor has been dismantled should also be marked ISI certification mark may also be marked.
10.
GUARANTEED & TECHNICAL PARTICULARS :
The ;tenderers shall supply the relevant information and technical particulars called for in the schedule of guaranteed and technical particulars as per Annexure A. 11. QUALITY ASSURANCE :
To ensure that the goods/equipment under the scope of this contract whether manufactured at the bidders works or at its sub-contractors premises or at any other place of work are manufactured following Quality Assurance Program. Such programs shall be outlined by the bidder and shall be submitted along with the bid. A quality assurance program of the bidder submitted by the bidder must cover the following. 11.1 The bidders organization structure for the management and implementation of the proposed quality assurance program. 11.2 11.3 11.4 Documentation control system. Qualification data of key personnel. The procedure for purchase of material parts, components and selection of sub-contractor including vendor analysis, source inspection, incoming raw materials inspection, verification of materials purchased etc. 11.5 A quality plan detailing out the specific quality control procedure adopted or controlling the quality of equipment during manufacturing. 11.6 System of quality audits.
12.
QUALITY ASSURANCE PROGRAM :
The quality assurance program shall be discussed with the successful bidder after the award of the contract and the final version mutually agreed between the purchaser and the bidder shall form a part of the Contract Agreement signed between the purchaser and the bidder.
ANNEXURE A
GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS.
1. 2. 3. 4.
Rated Lightning Arresters Voltage. Rated Lightning Arresters Current. Maximum continuous operating voltage. Maximum residual voltage with 8/20 microsecond wave at 2.5 KA 5.0 KA 10.0 KA
1.
High current short duration withstand current ( .4/10 microsecond wave)
2. 3.
Maximum energy discharge capability. Maximum steep current impulse Residual Voltage at 5 KA discharge current.
4.
One minute power frequency withstand voltage for arrester housing. a. b. Dry Wet
5. 6.
Total creepage distance of arrester. Temporary over voltage withstand capability. 0.1 second. 1.0 second. 10.0 second.
DAKS HIN HARYANA BIJ LI VITRAN NIGAM

Office of the Chief General Manager/P&D,
Vidyut S a da n, Vidyut Na gar, His a r-125005
Tel: 01662-221285, 221830 (GM/P&D) Fax: 01662-220481
Te c h n ic a l S p e c ific a tio n Fo r GALVANIS ED S TEEL BARBED WIRE
Chie f Ge neral Ma nage r / P &D, DHBVN, His ar Is s ue o f the Month:
Page 94 of 129
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR GALVANISED STEEL BARBED WIRE 1. SCOPE: This Specification covers the manufacture, testing & inspecting of galvanised steel barbed wire (glidden type) formed with 2 line wires twisted together, one containing the barbs. APPLICABLE STANDARD: Except when they conflict with the specific requirements in this specification, the conductors shall comply in all respect with the Indian standard specification No. IS: 278 (1978) & 4826 (1979) or the latest version thereof. CLIMATIC CONDITIONS: The Barbed wire is required to work satisfactorily under the following climatic conditions:0
2.
3.
3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 3.7 3.8 3.9 3.10
Max. temperature Min. temperature Max. relative humidity Min. relative humidity Average number of rainy days Nearly Average annual rain fall Average number of dust storms days per annum Isoceraunic level Max. wind pressure; Altitude above mean sea level less than
50 C - 2.5 C 0 100% 26% Nearly 120 days. 900 mm 35 45 195 Kg/ Sq meter. Less than 1000 Mtrs.
4. TECHNICAL P ARTICULAR: (i) Nominal dia meter of line wire: (ii) (iii) (iv) Nominal dia meter of point wire: Nominal distane between two barbs: Weight of completed barbed wire:
2.24 mm + 0.08 mm 2.00 mm + 0.08 mm 75 mm + 12 mm Max. 106 g/M Min. 97 g/m
(v) (vi) 5.
Tensile strength of wire Minimum breaking load of completed Barbed wire
40 to 60 Kg f/mm 300 Kgf.
TESTS: The tests as per IS:278/1978 including the tests for chemical analysis provided therein shall be carried out. The uniformity of zinc coating sPhagell1b19 otfe4s6t6ed as specified in IS: 4826-1979.
6.
TEST CERTIFICATE: The supplier shall supply one set of certificates from recognized govt. agency in respect of quality as per IS: 278-1979 with latest amendments for approval of the purchaser. MARKING: Each coil of barbed wire shall be legibly marked with the name of the manufacturer, the type of the barbed wire, the diameter of the line & point wire/barb spacing and length & weight of the coil. Barbed wire may also be marked with IST certification mark. INS P ECTION: All tests & inspection shall be made at the place of manufacture unless otherwise especially agreed upon by the manufacturer and the purchaser at the time of purchase. The manufacturer shall afford the inspector /representing of the purchaser all reasonable facilities, without charge, to satisfy him that the material is being furnished in accordance with this specification. The purchaser or his authorised representative shall have access at all reasonable times to manufacturers works to inspect & witness tests of the conductor being manufactured. As regards correctness of the length of galvanized steel barbed wire, the same is subject final checking and measurement by the consignee & the firm shall be responsible for all shortages, damages etc, if any. GUARANTEED TECHNICAL P ARTICULARS : Guaranteed technical particulars of the barbed wire should be given in the Annexure A attached herewith the specification. Any other particulars considered necessary by the supplier may also be given in addition to these listed in the Annexure. PACKING & WEIGHT OF COIL: The barbed wire shall be supply in coils weighting 15 Kgs to 30 Kgs. **
7.
8.
9.
10.
Page 120 of 466
Annexure A GUARANTEED TECHNICAL P ARTICULARS OF GALVANISED STEEL BARBED WIRE 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. Code word. Makers name address & country Nominal dia meter of line wire Nominal distance between two barbs: Tensile strength of wire. Minimum breaking load of barbed wire. Weight of complete barbed wire. Nominal dia meter of point wire. Standard length. Tolerance, if any. Standard to which confirm. i) Galvanising. ii) 12. Barbed wire.
Other particulars, if any.
_______________________________________________________________________
Specification No. CSC- 55/DH/UH/P&D/2010-2011
TEHNCIAL SPECIFICATION FOR HT AERIAL BUNCHED CABLE WITH XLPE INSULATION
Issue Month: Sep. 2010
Common Specifications Committee UHBVN &DHBVN

Page 1 of 10
_______________________________________________________________________
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR X-LINKED POLYPTHYLENE INSULATED AND PVC SHEATHED H.T. AERIAL BUNCHED CABLES.
1.
SCOPE: This specification covers manufacture, testing before dispatch, supply and delivery of ISI marked, 11 KV grade XLPE insulated screened all Aluminium conductor and PVC sheathed power cables conforming to IS-7098 (PartIi)/1985 with up to date amendments, suitable for solidly earthed system manufactured with dry cure technology (Nitrogen gas i.e with inert gas curing during using CCV system or with STOPLAS).
2.
APPLICABLE STANDARDS The cable covered under this specification shall conform in all respect with the latest editions of IS-14255: 1995, IS:7098 (Part-II)/1985, IS-398 (part-4) 1979, IS:10810(series)& IS: 8130-1984 or IEC equivalent thereof. The aluminium conductor complying to IS: 8130-1984 shall be used.
3.
CLIMATIC CONDITIONS: The material to be supplied against this specification shall be suitable for satisfactory operation under the following climatic Conditions i) Location At various locations in the state of Haryana 60 -5 40
Maximum ambient temperature (oC) Minimum ambient air temperature (oC) Maximum average daily ambient temperature (oC) v) Maximum yearly weighed average ambient 32 o temperature ( C) vi) Maximum altitude above mean sea level (m) 1000 vii) Minimum Relative Humidity (%) 26 viii) Maximum Relative Humidity (%) 95 ix) Average no of Rainy days/ year 120 x) Average annual rainfall 900 mm xi) Maximum wind pressure 195 kg/m sq. The material shall be for use in moderately hot and humid tropical ii) iii) iv) climate, conducive to rust and fungus growth 4. CONDUCTORS: The Aluminium conductors shall comply with the requirements as specified in IS-8130-1984 with up to date amendments. The stranded conductor
shall be clean and reasonably uniform in size and shape and its surface shall be free from sharp edges. Not more than two joints shall be allowed in any of the wires form and every complete length of conductor and no joint shall be within 300 mm of any other joint in the same layer. Joints shall be brazed, silver soldered or electric or gas welded. No joint shall be made in the conductor once, it has been stranded.
Page 2 of 10
_______________________________________________________________________
5.
INSULATION: The insulation shall be chemically cross linked polyethylene conforming to the physical, electrical and ageing properties as required in the specification, cross-linking may be done by exposure to organize peroxide with nitrogen curing CCV line, method with the intention to ensure lowest free formation. Only natural unfilled compound shall be used for insulation of cables. The average thickness of insulation when measured in
accordance with relevant clause of the specification shall not be less than the standard thickness value specified. The smallest of the measured
values of thickness shall not fall below the standard thickness values as specified in IS:7098 (Part-II) / 1985 by more than 0.1+0.1 standard thickness in mm. 6. SCREENING: The screening of insulated cables shall consist of conductor screening and insulation screening. i) Screening materials: Two types of materials may be used for screening of cables non-metallic and metallic. ii) Conductor screening: Conductor screening shall be non-metallic and shall consist of either semiconducting compound or a layer of extruded-semi-conducting linked ploythine compound of thickness not less than 0.5mm. iii) Insulation screening: The insulation screening shall consist of non-metallic semi-conducting part in combination with a metallic part. Non-metallic part shall be applied either directly over the insulation of each core and shall consist of either a semiconducing tape or a layer of extruded semi-conducting compound or a combination of these materials. iv) Metallic Screening The metallic part shall be applied over the individual core. Metallic
screening shall consist of copper tape sheath and shall be non-magnetic when applied to either in single core or multi-core cables. For single core cables, armouring shall constitute the metallic part of the screening. 7. OUTER SHEATH: Over the armouring the cable shall be provided with extruded PVC outer sheath. The composition of the PVC compound for outer sheath shall be Pre-Type ST2 of IS-5831-1984. The colour of the outer sheath shall be black. The average thickness of the sheath shall not be less than the
standard values specified in the IS when measured as laid in IS-7098 (PartII) / 1985. The smallest thickness of the measured values of sheath shall
Page 3 of 10
_______________________________________________________________________
not fall below the standard value, (s) specified, by more than 0.2+0.2 (ts) mm. 8. CORE IDENTIFICATION: The core identification shall be done by providing coloured strip under Copper Tape. 9. MESSENGER WIRE: Messenger wire, shall consist of Aluminium alloy wires. Aluminium alloy wires, shall be as per IS:398 (Part-IV) / 1978 and wing shall be tested as per relevant IS. 10. LAYING UP: Three Power Cores shall be twisted over bare messenger wire with right hand direction of lay. This will form the Aerial Bunched Cable. 11. 11.1 TESTS: Copies of the type test certificates in respect of all the type-tests as per IS:7098 (Part-2) / 1985 for similar type of XLPE cables, from any Government recognized testing labs shall be submitted along with the tender. 11.1.2 LIST OF TYPE TESTS: a) TESTS ON CONDUCTOR: i) ii) iii) b) c) Tensile test (for Aluminium) Wrapping test (for Aluminium) Resistance test
Test for thickness of insulation and sheath. Physical tests for insulation. i) ii) iii) iv) v) Tensile strength and elongation at break. Ageing in air oven. Hot test. Shrinkage test. Water absorption (Gravimetric)
d)
Physical tests for outer sheath:i) ii) iii) iv) Tensile strength and elongation at break. Ageing in air oven. Shrinkage test. Hot deformation.
e) f) g) h)
Bleeding and blooming test (for outer sheath). Partial discharge test. Bending test. Dielectric power factor test: i) ii) As a function of voltage As a function of temperature
Page 4 of 10
_______________________________________________________________________
i) j) k) l) m) 11.2
Insulation resistance (Volume resistivity) test. Heating cycle test. Impulse withstand test. High voltage test. Flammability test List of type test for messenger wire: a) Breaking load test on individual Aluminium Alloy wire. b) c) Resistance test. Elongation test.
12.2. ACCEPTANCE TESTS: The following shall be carried out as acceptance tests: a) b) c) d) e) f) g) h) i) 13. Tensile test (for Aluminium) Wrapping test (for Aluminium) Conductor resistance test. Test for thickness of insulation and sheath. Partial discharge test (for screened cables only) High voltage test. Hot set test for insulator. Tensile strength and elongation at break test for insulation and sheath. Insulation resistance (Volume resistively) test ROUTINE TESTS: The following shall be carried out as routine tests: a) b) c) Conductor resistance test (for Aluminium and copper) Partial discharge test (for screened cables only) High voltage test. Type test / acceptance test / routine tests and or other test required as per relevant Indian Standard shall be got conducted. 14. INSPECTION: An authorized representative of the Nigam shall inspect, examine and test the equipment/material in respect of quality, size and ratings as per relevant ISS/IEC with latest amendments at the manufacturers works during or after the manufacture of goods prior to dispatch on receipt of a clear notice of minimum two weeks in advance to be reckoned from the date of receipt of the same by the purchaser. No material will be allowed to be dispatched without prior inspection and approval. The inspecting officer of the
purchaser may also inspect the material during the course of manufacture. In case, inspection of any consignment is waived off by the purchaser, the supplier will be required to furnish the requisite test certificates (for acceptance as well as routine tests) for approval. It will be the responsibility of the supplier to make adequate arrangements for testing of material at
Page 5 of 10
_______________________________________________________________________
their works without any additional charge to the purchaser.
All testing
instruments and appliances will be made available and material destroyed/consumed during testing will be to the account of the supplier. The purchase reserves the right to carry out Type Test as per Indian Standard Specifications with latest version thereof. These tests will be
carried out at an Independent & recognized test house/agency/laboratory. All expenses whatsoever for carrying out these tests shall be to the suppliers account. The purchaser has the right to have the tests carried out at any Govt./Recognized Test agency in case of dispute in quality, size and ratings as per relevant ISS. 15 FAKE INSPECTION CALLS In case the supplier makes a fake inspection call i.e., the material is not found ready by the Inspecting Officer deputed by the Nigam for inspection, the supplier shall be liable to pay the expenses incurred by the Nigam on this account subject to minimum of a fixed penalty of Rs. 20,000/- for each such fake call made by him. 16. GUARANTEE / WARRANTEE The supplier shall be responsible to replace, free of cost, with no transportation or insurance cost to the Purchaser, up to destination, the whole or any part of the material which in normal and proper use proves the defective in quality or workmanship, subject to the condition that the defect is noticed within 78 months from the date of receipt of material in stores or 72 months from the date of commissioning whichever period may expire earlier. The consignee or any other officer of Nigam actually using the material will give prompt notice of each such defect to the supplier. The replacement shall be effected by the supplier within a reasonable time, but not, in any case, exceeding 45 days. The supplier shall, also, arrange to remove the defective within a reasonable period, but not exceeding 45 days from the date of issue of notice in respect thereof, failing which, the purchaser reserve the right to dispose of defective material in any manner considered fit by him (Purchaser), at the sole risk and cost of the supplier. Any sale proceeds of the defective material after meeting the expenses incurred on its custody, disposal handling etc., shall however be credited to the suppliers account and set off against any outstanding dues of the purchaser against the supplier. The warranty for 72/78 months shall be one time. 17. SEQUENTIAL MARKING: Supplier shall provide non erasable sequential marking on one core of AB Cable at every one metre distance before assembly of different cores to
Page 6 of 10
_______________________________________________________________________
form the cable. However, the length of cable for acceptance shall be based on length of finished cable and not on the basis of sequential marks. 18. PACKING & MARKING: The cable shall be supplied in suitable non-returnable wooden drums of suitable size in standard lengths subject to a tolerance of +/- 5%. The cable shall be wrapped with polythene under wooden covering. Each meter
length shall be embossed with the trade name of manufacturer and the work UHBVN CABLE. The ends of the cable shall be sealed by means of non-hygroscopic sealing material. In addition to this each drum shall carry the following information either stenciled on flange or label attached to it. a) b) c) d) e) f) g) h) i) j) k) l) m) n). 19 Manufacturers name. Trade mark, if any. A reference to ISS i.e. IS-7098 (Part-II) / 1985. Length of the cable on the drum. Voltage grade and type of the cable. Colour of outer sheath. Nominal cross-sectional area of the cable conductor. Purchase order No. & Date. Name and address of consignee. Number of cores. Gross weight of packed and net weight of the power cable. Drum No. & its direction of rotation (with an arrow) Year of manufacture. ISI MARK. ISI mark cable shall be preferred. FAKE INSPECTION CALLS In case the supplier makes a fake inspection call i.e., the material is not found ready by the Inspecting Officer deputed by the Nigam for inspection, the supplier shall be liable to pay the expenses incurred by the Nigam on this account subject to minimum of a fixed penalty of Rs. 20,000/- for each such fake call made by him. 20. GUARANTEE / WARRANTEE The supplier shall be responsible to replace, free of cost, with no transportation or insurance cost to the Purchaser, up to destination, the whole or any part of the material which in normal and proper use proves the defective in quality or workmanship, subject to the condition that the defect is noticed within 78 months from the date of receipt of material in stores or 72 months from the date of commissioning whichever period may expire earlier. The consignee or any other officer of Nigam actually using the material will give prompt notice of each such defect to the supplier. The
Page 7 of 10
_______________________________________________________________________
replacement shall be effected by the supplier within a reasonable time, but not, in any case, exceeding 45 days. The supplier shall, also, arrange to remove the defective within a reasonable period, but not exceeding 45 days from the date of issue of notice in respect thereof, failing which, the purchaser reserve the right to dispose of defective material in any manner considered fit by him (Purchaser), at the sole risk and cost of the supplier. Any sale proceeds of the defective material after meeting the expenses incurred on its custody, disposal handling etc., shall however be credited to the suppliers account and set off against any outstanding dues of the purchaser against the supplier. The warranty for 72/78 months shall be one time. 21. CHALLENGE CLAUSE The material offered/received after the inspection by the authorized inspecting officer may again be subjected to the test for losses or any other parameter from any Testing House/in-house technique of the Nigam & the results if found deviating un-acceptable or not complying to approved GTP's the bidder shall arrange to supply the replacement within thirty (30) days of such detection at his cost including to & fro transportation. In addition to this penalty @10% of cost of the inspected lot of material shall be imposed.
22.
SCHEDULE OF PARTICULARS:-
GUARANTEED
AND
GUIDING
TECHNICAL
The tenderers must supply the detailed guaranteed and other technical particulars as detailed in Appendix-I. For values, use of Dash Do Blank or As per ISS/IEC will not be entertained.
General Manager/P&D Cum-Member Secretary CSC UHBVN Panchkula.
Page 8 of 10
_______________________________________________________________________
APPENDIX-I
GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR HT AERIAL BUNCHED CABLE WITH CROSS - LINKED POLYETHYLENE (XLPE) INSULATION & BARE MESSENGER WIRE (FOR NEUTRAL & EARTHING)
S.N.
Particulars
HT Aerial Bunched Cables Size-1 Size-2 Size-3 Size.. so on
1 2 3 i) ii) iii) iv) v)
vi) vii) viii) ix) 4. i) ii) iii)
iv) v) vi) vii) 5 i) ii)
iii) 6
Makers name & address Rated voltage Phase conductor details No. of phase conductors Nominal cross-sectional area of each conductor-mm No. & size of strands (mm) Minimum tensile strength of each strand-N/mm Diameter of compacted conductor along with tolerance (mm). Approximate mass (Kg/Km) Maximum DC resistance at 20o C (Ohm/Km) Insulation thickness (mm) Standard to which this material conforms Messenger (Neutral conductor) Nominal sectional area of each conductor in mm No. & size of strands (mm) Diameter of compacted conductors along with tolerance (in mm) Approx. mass (Kg/Km) Minimum Tensile strength in KN Max. DC resistance at 20o C (Ohm/Km) Standard specification to which this material conform Insulation of phase conductor Material Whether all properties as mentioned in the technical Specifications are guaranteed if not indicate deviations in properties Standard specification to which this material shall conform Finished cable (complete bunched cable) Overall diameter (approx.) in mm
Page 9 of 10
i)
_______________________________________________________________________
ii) 7. i) ii) iii) 8 9 i) ii) 10. 11 12. 13. 14 15
Total mass (approx.) in Kg/Km Drum Tare weight of drum Whether drum is wheel mounted Standard specification to which drum shall conform Standard length of each cable and its tolerance Total length of cable in a drum and its tolerance Mass of finished cable in a drum and its tolerance Whether material bears ISI certification mark Serial number of ISI license and its validity Max. Continuous current carrying capacity Max. Continuous conductor temperature due to load Embossing Any other particulars
(Suppliers Name & Address)
Page 10 of 10
Specification No. CSC-XXXVI/DH/UH/P&D/2009-2010
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF HEAT SHRINKABLE / PUSH ON TYPE TERMINATIONS FOR 11 KV XLPE CABLES
Issue of the Month: Jan. 2010
Page 1 of 10
1.
SCOPE :This specification covers the design, manufacture, assembly and testing of heat shrinkable/push on type terminations suitable for 11 KV 3-core XLPE insulated, screened, armoured, with aluminium conductor cables suitable for earthed system and confirming to IS:7098(Part-II)-1985 with latest amendment, if any.
2.
STANDARD :The performance as well as type test requirements of all type of kits referred under scope shall conform to stipulations of IS : 13573/1992 or VDE-0278 with latest amendments, if any. All the electrical & physical parameters of terminations should also conform to the corresponding parameters of XLPE cables referred under SCOPE of this specification, as per IS: 7098 (Part-II)-1985 (with latest amendments, if any) or equivalent international standards..
3.
CLIMATIC CONDITIONS :1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. Max. ambient air temperature Min. ambient air temperature Average Max. Daily ambient temperature Max. yearly temperature weighed average 600C C -5OC 400C ambient 320C 1000 26 95 120 900 mm 195 Kg./m Sq.
Max. altitude above mean sea level (Meters) Minimum Relative Humidity (%age) Max. Relative Humidity (%age) Avg. No. of Rainy days/year Avg. annual rainfall Maximum wind pressure
4.
REQUIREMENT :The heat shrinkable/push on type terminations offered shall be of proven design and make, which have already been extensively used ;and fully type tested.
5.
GENERAL REQUIREMENT :The purpose of this specification is to specify the performance requirements of termination kits for the use on 50 C/S 3 phase system with earthed neutral for working voltage of 11 KV. Earthing arrangement shall be as per relevant standard and details of earthing arrangement offered shall be submitted alongwith the tender.
Page 2 of 10
5.1
The material to be used should be inert and capable of resisting degradation during the service of cable system. The kit shall be provided with protection against rodents and termite attack. Heat Shrinkable Type (Terminations) : The term heat shrinkable refers to extruded or moulded polymeric materials which are cross-linked to develop elastic memory and supplied in expanded or otherwise deformed size/shape, subsequently heating in a non-constrained state to a temperature above the shrink temperature resulting in the material recovering or shrinking to its original shape. Since the sealant or adhesives (to be used for environment sealing) between the ;heat shrinkable materials and XLPE cables shall be exposed to high electrical stresses, they must be track resistant. The heat shrinkable polymer materials being used for external leakage insulation between the high voltage of conductors and grounds should be weather resistant. All cuts/nicks inadvertently occurred to XLPE insulation must be rendered discharge free by using suitable discharge suppression compound. The heat shrinkable tubing may be either extruded or moulded type. Higher thickness of heat shrinkable sleeves shall be preferable to counter erosion due to pollution. Push on type (Terminations only) : Rubber components should be made from proven quality of tuber with tested curing properties. The semi conducting portion of the stress cone should be vulcanized with insulation so that both semi conducting and insulation portion becomes an integrated part. The stress cone must ;be of proven design of stress control. The moulding of rubber components should be aimed to achieve a smooth finish on interior and exterior of the components. The stress cone should probably be reusable type. In case of outdoor terminations, the suitable provision for covering the cable cores with re-useable protective system from the crotch seal to the bottom of stress cone should be made.
5.2 5.2.1
5.2.2
5.2.3
5.2.4
5.2.5
5.2.6
5.3 5.3.1
5.3.2
5.3.3 5.3.4
5.3.5 5.3.6
Page 3 of 10
5.4 5.4.1
Other Requirements : Proper stress control, stress grading and non tracking arrangement in the terminations shall be offered by means of proven methods, details of which shall be elaborated in the offer. Detailed sectional view of assemblies shall be submitted alongwith the offer. The kits offered shall provide the total environment sealing, the details of which shall be offered alongwith the offer.
5.4.2
5.4.3 5.4.4
Provision for effective screening over each core be made and bidders shall categorically conform this aspect in their offer. The material and components not specifically stated in the specification, but which are essential for satisfactory operation of the equipments shall be included without any extra cost. The terminations shall be of better tracking resistant properties and fully reliable earthing system to maintain continuous contact with screening/armouring as the case may be. The armour earthing arrangement shall form part of the termination. Terminations shall have provision for shield connections and earthing. The kits shall be suitable for storage without deterioration at a temperature upto 50oC for more than 5 years. The fault level (as well as duration) withstand capability of terminations should be strictly matching with these parameters of cables for which the kits are intended to be used. The words DHBVN/UHBVN alongwith trade name of manufacturer, month/year of manufacturer, size etc. shall be embossed/engraved or suitably marked with indelible ink/paint for the purpose of identification. Suitable creepage extension/rain protection sheds for outdoor termination shall be provided. The adequate provisions for eliminating the chances of entrapment of air at the steps formed by semicon screen shall be made. The gripping tubing (termination boot) for the cable where trifurcation takes place, shall also be part of kit and covered under scope of this supply of this specification. Name of sub-supplier for the raw material and standard according to which their raw material are tested, must be furnished alongwith the offer.
5.4.5
5.4.6 5.4.7
5.4.8
5.4.9
5.4.10
5.4.11
5.4.12
5.4.13
5.4.14
Page 4 of 10
5.4.15
Detailed kit contents, whether manufactured by the bidder or bought from outside (with name of sub vendor) for each component must be indicated in the offer. The; terminations shall be supplied in kit forms. All insulating and sealing materials, consumable items, conductor fittings, earthing arrangements and lugs etc. shall be included in the individual kit. An instruction manual in English, indicating the complete method/procedure to be adopted for installation of kits, preferably with more and more diagrams/pictorial presentation shall be supplied with each kit. Various items quantity there of against each kit must be indicated in the instruction manual. GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS :The terminations shall have same electrical and thermal characteristics as those of cables with which these are intended to be used. The tenderers must furnish the guarantee technical particulars for each type/size of kit ;in Annexure-A.
5.4.16
5.4.17
6.
7.
CONSUMABLES OR RE-USABLE PUSH ON TYPE KITS :The details of consumable viz-a-viz reusable parts for each size of push on type (indoor/outdoor separately) termination must be supplied on a separate sheet. The %age of consumables for reusing these kits must be indicated for each size.
8.
DRAWINGS :Complete detailed dimensional drawings showing all details of kit contents/bill of material for each size type. Note : Any tender without complete guaranteed technical particulars and dimensional drawings shall be liable for rejection :
9.
TRAINING :In case of placement of an order against this tender enquiry, the tenderer shall have to impart free of cost demonstration to selected number of Nigam personnel by installing few kits any where in Haryana, places of Purchasers discretion. If required, supplier may have to give free of cost practical training regarding installation of their product in NiIgam training institutes also.
Page 5 of 10
10. 10.1
TESTS :Type tests : The termination kits of offered design should have been got tested from NABL accredited laboratory as per relevant standards with latest version. 10.2 Acceptance Tests : Initially the following tests shall constitute as acceptance tests :i) Dimensional checking as per approved drawings. ii) Volume resistivity test for various components. iii) AC High voltage test after installation of terminations (as per IS : 13573/1992 or VDE-0278) on appropriate cable. iv) Dielectric strength of major components. v) D.C. High voltage test. vi) Tracking resistance. vii) Ultimatic Elongation. The scope to include more type tests as acceptance tests shall be decided after processing the offers of various bidders/after knowing the details of testing facilities for type tests available with various tenders. IMPORTANT : The tenderers must specifically mention in their offer about the details of testing facilities for various type test as per IS : 13573/1992 and or VDE-0278, available at their works, failing to do so, the offer is liable to be rejected on the presumption that adequate testing facilities are not available with them. ROUTINE TESTS :- The following tests shall constitute routine test : i) ii) iii) iv) Dielectric strength. Density. Heat shock. Shrinkage ratio.
The tenderer must specify the details of routine tests (being conducted at their works ) alongwith the standard applicable, in their offer. The routine test certificates shall be furnished alongwith the inspection call for each offered lot. 11. INSPECTION : The material shall be made, inspected and tested in the presence of the authorized representative of the Nigam at the manufacturers/suppliers works at the cost of the suppliers. In case the supplier is not in a position to get these tests carried out at his works,
Page 6 of 10
then the material should be got tested in the presence of authorized inspecting officer of Nigam from any other testing agency or from the Govt. recognized testing agency. All the expenses incurred to this effect shall be borne by the supplier. The purchaser or his authorized representative shall have access at all reasonable times to the manufacturers works to inspect and witness the tests. The purchaser have the right to have the tests carried out at the cost of the supplier by an independent agency wherever there is dispute regarding the quality of the material supplied. The manufacturer shall be responsible to pay penalty of Rs 20,000/- for each occasion at which the fake inspection call has been made or the material is rejected during testing/inspection by the authorized agency/representative of the Nigam. This penalty would be in addition to the expenses incurred by the Nigam in deputing the Inspecting Officer, carrying out such inspection.
12.
PACKING AND TRANSPORT : The supplier shall be responsible for suitable packing of all the kits of material and marking on the consignment, so as to avoid any damage during transport and storage and to ensure correct dispatch to the destination.
13.
Challenge Clause:The material offered/received after the inspection by the authorized inspecting officer may again be subjected to the test for or any parameter from any testing house/in-house technique of the Nigam & the results if found deviating un-acceptable or not complying to approved GTPs the bidder shall arrange to supply the replacement within thirty (30) days of such detection at his cost including to & fro transportation. In addition , penalty @10% of cost of the inspected lot of material shall be imposed.
14.
Warranty Period:The supplier shall be responsible to replace, free of cost, with no transportation or insurance cost to the purchaser, up to destination, the whole or any part to the material which in normal and proper use proves the defective in quality or workmanship, subject to the condition that the defect is noticed within 24 months from the date of receipt of material in stores or 18 months from the date of commissioning whichever period may expire earlier. The consignee or nay other officer of Nigam actually using the material will give prompt notice of each such defect to the supplier. The replacement shall be effected by the supplier within a reasonable time, but not, in any case, exceeding 45 days. The supplier shall, also, arrange to remove the defective within a reasonable period, but not exceeding 45 days from the date of issue of notice in respect thereof, failing which, the purchaser reserve the right to dispose of defective material in any manner considered fit Page 7 of 10
by him (purchaser), at the sole risk and cost of the supplier. Any sale proceeds of the defective material after meeting the expenses incurred on its custody, disposal handling etc., shall however be credited to the suppliers account and set off against any outstanding dues of the purchaser against the supplier. The warranty for 18/24 months shall be one time.
Page 8 of 10
ANNEXURE-A SCHEDULE OF GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS TERMINATIONS OUTDOOR / INDOOR TERMINATION KIT H.S. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. PUSH ON Manufacturers name & Address. Sr. No. & name and country of origin. Voltage grade. Type of kit offered. Applicable standards. Size. Material of tubing/moulded part/self amalgamating tape etc. Insulation time. Curing time. Time required for energisation after completion of termination. Special devices required, if any. Kit storage temperature (Degree centigrade). (a) Shelf life of kit. (b) Design life of kit. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. List lof contents of kit (to be furnished separately) Material used for stress control. Dielectric strength of insulation material (KV/mm). Materials used in encapsulating compound and environmental sealing. Class of kit. Whether test reports, drawings land instruction leaf lets are enclosed. Volume resistivity. i) ii) 21. Stress control tubing. Non tracking tubing. FOR
Relative permitivity. i) ii) Stress control tubing. Non tracking tubing.
22.
Water absorption. i) Stress control tubing. ii) Non tracking tube.
23.
Tracking resistance.
Page 9 of 10
i) Stress control tube. ii) Non tracking tube. 24. Tensile strength. i) Stress control tube. ii) Non tracking tube. 25. Ultimate elongation (a) (b) Stress control tube. Non tracking tube.
Note : While giving details of technical parameters under Sr. No. 20 to 25 above, the reference of applicable relevant ISS/international standard must be indicated.
Page 10 of 10
______________________________________________________________________
Specification No. CSC-III-R-I/DH/UH/P&D/2010-11
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR

Outdoors types Distribution Transformers of 11 kV/433-250 V Class upto and including 100 kVA i.e (25 kVA to 100 kVA) with CSP (completely self protected) features
Issue Month: May, 2010 (CSC Approval date 23.4.2010)
Common Specification Committee UHBVN & DHBVN
Page 1 of 26
______________________________________________________________________
OUTDOOR TYPE DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS OF 11 kV/433250 V CLASS UP TO AND INCLUDING 100 kVA i.e (25,63 & 100 kVA) WITH CSP (COMPLETELY SELF PROTECTED) FEATURES
1. Scope:
This specification covers, engineering, manufacture, assembly, stage testing, inspection and testing before supply, ready to use besides delivery at site of oil immersed, naturally cooled 3 phase 11 kV/433-250 V completely self protected Distribution Transformers for outdoor use along with metallic enclosure housing LV bushing & MCCB (if provided) with sealing facility.
1.1.
It is not the intent to specify completely herein all the details of the design and construction of equipment. However the equipment shall conform in all respects to high standards of engineering, design and workmanship and shall be capable of performing in continuous commercial operation upto the Bidders guarantee, in manner acceptable to the purchaser, who will interpret the meanings of drawings and specification and shall have the power to reject any work or material which, in his judgment is not in accordance therewith. The offered equipment shall be complete with all components necessary for their effective and trouble free operation. Such, components be deemed to be within the scope of Bidders supply interceptive of whether those are specifically brought out in this specification and / or the commercial order or not.
1.2. 2. 2.1.
Standard Ratings:
The standard Ratings shall be 25, 63 and 100 kVA.
STANDARDS:
The material shall conform in all respects to the relevant Indian /International
standard Specification, with latest amendments thereof some of them are listed below: Title India standard International& Internationally recognized standard IEC 76
Specification for power Transformer outdoor distribution Transformer upto including 100 KVA Specification for Copper wire rod Specification porcelain Transformer bushing Specification for Transformer oil
ISS-2026/1977 ISS-1180 IS-12444 ISS-3347/1967 ISS-335/1983
ASTM B-49 DIN 42531, 23,3 BS 148, D-1473, D1533-1934 IEC Pub 2961969
Specification for colors for ready mixed paints porcelain bushings Specification for High voltage porcelain bushings Specification for Low voltage bushings Specification for outdoor Bushings Specification for Al wire rods Insulating Kraft Paper Specification for Insulating press Board Guide for loading of Oil immersed T/Fs
ISS-5/1961 ISS-2099/1973 ISS-7421/1974 ISS-3347 ISS-5484 ISS-9335 ISS-1576 ISS- 6600/1972 IEC Pub 296-1969
DIN 42531 to 33 ASTM B-233 IEC 554 IEC 641 IEC-76
Page 2 of 26
______________________________________________________________________
The bidder shall use ISS, however, where this standard is not available corresponding IEC may be followed. Material conforming to ISS or the internationally accepted standards, which ensure equal or higher quality than the standards mentioned above, would also be acceptable. In case the Bidders who wish to offer material conforming to the standards, salient points of difference between the standards adopted and the specific standards shall be clearly brought out in relevant schedule. Four copies of such standards with authentic English translations shall be furnished along with the other.
3. SERVICE CONDITIONS:The Distribution Transformers & other equipment/material to be supplied against this specification shall be suitable for satisfactory operation under the following climatic Conditions as per IS-2026 (Part-I) latest revision i) ii) iii) iv) v) vi) vii) viii) ix) x) xi) Location Maximum ambient temperature (oC) Minimum ambient air temperature (oC) Maximum average daily ambient temperature (oC) Maximum yearly weighed average ambient temperature (oC) Maximum altitude above mean sea level (m) Minimum Relative Humidity (%) Maximum Relative Humidity (%) Average no of Rainy days/ year Average annual rainfall Maximum wind pressure At various locations in the state of Haryana 60 -5 40 32 1000 26 95 120 900 mm 195 kg/m sq.
The equipment shall be for safe operation in moderately hot and humid tropical climate, conducive to rust and fungus growth.
4.
PRINCIPAL PARAMETERS:The transformers shall be suitable for outdoor installation with three phase
50 Hz, 11 KV system in which the neutral is effectively earthed and they should be suitable for service under fluctuations in supply voltage upto plus 10 to minus 15%.
Sr. No. Item

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
10
Continuous rated capacity System voltage (max.) Rated voltage HV Rated voltage LV Line current HV Line current LV Frequency No. of phases Connection HV
Connection LV
25 KVA 12.5 KV 11 KV 433-250 V 1.31 A 33.33 A 50c/s +5% Three Delta

Star (Neutral Brought out)

11 12 13
Vector group Type of cooling changing arrangement
Dyn-II ONAN Not applicable

Page 3 of 26
Dyn-II ONAN Not applicable
Dyn-II ONAN Not Applicable 3
______________________________________________________________________
14 Noise level at rated voltage and frequency Permissible temperature rise over ambient i) if top oil measured by thermometer ii) if winding measured by resistance Maximum clearances i) HV phase to phase (phase to earth (mm) ii) LV phase to phase (phase to earth 45 db 45 db 45 db
15
35 Deg. C
35 Deg. C
35 Deg. C
40 Deg.C
40 Deg.C
40 Deg.C
-----AS per IS-1180 Latest---------255 140---
---------75
40----
5. 5.1.
TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS: MATERIAL CRGO METAL
5.1.1. The core shall be stack / wound type generally of high grade rolled grain annealed steel lamination having low loss and good grain properties, coated with hot oil proof insulation, bolted together and to the frames firmly to prevent vibration or noise. The complete design of core must ensure permanency of the core losses with continuous working of the transformers. The value of the maximum flux density allowed in the design and grade of lamination used be clearly stated in the offer. The bidder should offer the core for inspection and approval by the purchaser during manufacturing stage. Bidders shall give notice for inspection with the following documents as applicable as a proof towards use of prime core material. 5.1.1.1. 5.1.1.2. 5.1.1.3. 5.1.1.4. 5.1.1.5. 5.1.2. 5.1.2.1. 5.1.2.2. Invoice of the supplier Mills Test Certificate Packing List Bill of Loading Bill of entry certificate to customs Core clamping for CRGO Stacked core. MS channel shall be used on top and bottom Core channel on LV side to be reinforced at equidistance, if holes/cutting is done for LT lead in order to a avoid bending of channel. 5.1.2.3. 5.1.2.4. MS channel shall be painted with varnish or oil resistant paint Clamping & Tie-rods shall be made of HT steel and shall be parkarised.
Page 4 of 26
______________________________________________________________________ 5.1.3. 5.1.3.1. Core clamping for CRGO wound core. Core clamping shall be with top and bottom U-shaped core clamps made of sheet steel clamped HT steel tie rods for efficient clamping 5.1.3.2. 5.1.3.3. MS core clamps shall be painted with varnish or oil-resistant paint. Suitable provision shall be made in the bottom core clamp/ bottom plate of the transformer to arrest movement or the active part. 5.1.4. The transformers core shall be suitable for over fluxing (due to combined effect of voltage and frequency) upto 12.5% without injurious heating at full load conditions and shall not get saturated. The Bidder shall furnish necessary design data in support of this situation. 5.1.5. No load current shall not exceed 2% of full load current and will be measured by energizing the transformer at 433 volts, 50c/s on the Secondary. Increase of voltage of 433 volts by 12.5% shall not increase the no load current disproportionately high. Test for magnetic balance by connecting the LV phase by phase to rated phase voltage and measurement of an, bn, cn voltage will be carried out. 5.1.6. The core material should be imported directly from the reputed manufacture. Core material shall be processed by slitting only. Core cutting/slitting be done in front of inspecting officers deputed by UHBVN. Details of the core shall be filled & supplied as per Annexure-II. 5.2. 5.2.1. AMORPHOUS METAL. The core shall be high quality Amorphous ribbons having very low loss formed into wound cores of rectangular shape, bolted together to the frames firmly to prevent vibration or noise. The complete
design of core must ensure permanency of the core loss with continuous working of the transformers. The value of the flux density allowed in the design shall be clearly stated in the offer. Curve showing the properties of the metal shall be attached with the offer. 5.2.2. 5.2.2.1. Core Clamping for Amorphous metal Transformers. Core clamping shall be with top and bottom U-shaped core clamps made of sheet steel clamped HT steel tie rods for efficient clamping. 5.2.2.2. 5.2.2.3. MS core clamps shall be painted with varnish or oil-resistant paint. Suitable provision shall be made in the bottom core clamp/ bottom plate of the transformer to arrest movement of the active part. 5.2.3. The transformers core shall be suitable for over fluxing (due to combined effect of voltage and frequency) upto 12.5% without injurious heating at full load conditions and shall not get saturated.
Page 5 of 26
______________________________________________________________________ The Bidder shall furnish necessary design data in support of this situation. 5.2.4. No load current shall not exceed 2% of full load current and will be measured by energizing the transformer at 433 volts, 50c/s on the Secondary. Increase of voltage of 433 volts by 12.5% shall not increase the no load current disproportionately high. Test for magnetic balance by connecting the LV phase by phase to rated phase voltage and measurement of an, bn, cn voltage will be carried out. NOTE: I) Wherever variable prices are provided IEEMA formula should be applicable in such a way that indices applicable for CRGO are used for amorphous material also since the indices for latter are not declared by IEEMA. II) 5.3. 5.3.1. The value of maximum flux density allowed shall be 1.6 T. WINDINGS:Material: Double paper covered insulated electrolytic Aluminium Conductor for windings and electrolytic copper for leads. 5.3.2. LV winding shall be in even layers so that the neutral formation will be at top. 5.3.3. The winding construction of single HV coil wound over LV coil is preferable. 5.3.4. 5.3.5. Inter layer insulation shall be Epoxy dotted Kraft paper. Proper bonding of inter layer insulation with the conductor shall be ensured. Test for Bonding Strength to be conducted. 5.3.6. Dimensions of winding coils are very critical. Dimensional tolerances for winding coils shall be with in limits as specified in GTP. 5.3.7. Vertical ducts and spacers shall be provided within each coils for H.V and L.V winding. 5.3.8. Current density for HV and LV coils. This should not be more than 1.5 A/sq. mm. for windings & 0.8 A/sq. mm for leads. 5.4. Oil: - The insulating oil shall comply with the requirements of relevant standards IS 335/1993 or BS: 148. 5.5. Losses: The total losses (includes no-load & load losses) at 50% and 100% loading equivalent to BEE 4-Star rating shall not exceed the values given below: Voltage Ratio 11000/433 11000/433 11000/433 kVA Rating 25 63 100 Max. losses at 50% (Watts) 190 340 475 Max. losses at 100% (Watts) 635 1140 1650
Page 6 of 26
______________________________________________________________________
The above losses are maximum allowable and here would not be any positive tolerance. Bids with higher losses than the above specified values would be treated as non-responsive. Bidders are requested to quote the price as FOR destination on standard losses. The Bid will be evaluated on the basis of standard losses instead of Equated capitalized cost. No benefit of low losses to the bidder in case the losses are less than standards losses at any time.
5.5.1. Percentage Impedance:

The value of Impedance of transformer at 75 Deg. C shall be 4.5% subject to the tolerance specified in the standard IS: 2026-1977.
5.5.2. Temperature rise

The temperature rise over ambient shall not exceed the limits described below:
i)
ii)
Top oil temperature rise measured by thermometer: 35 deg. C Winding temperature rise measure by resistance: 40 deg. C
Bids not meeting the above limits of temperature rise will be treated as non-responsive.
5.6.
PENALTY FOR NON PERFORMANCE:
5.6.1. Purchaser reserves the right to reject any transformer during the test at
suppliers works, if it is found that actual measured losses are more than the values quoted by the bidder 5.6.2. Transformer with temperature rise and impedance beyond the Guaranteed values. 5.6.2.1. Purchaser reserves the right to reject any transformer during the test at suppliers works, if the temperature rise exceeds the guaranteed values. 5.6.2.2. Purchaser reserves the right to reject any transformer during the test at suppliers works, if the impedance values differ from the guaranteed values including tolerance. 5.6.2.3. Purchaser also reserves the right to retain the rejected transformer and take it
into service until the Bidder replaces it with a new transformer at no extra cost. The delivery as per contract will be counted when the new transformer specification is provided by the manufacture. 5.7. INSULATION MATERIAL:as per
5.7.1. Material:-Electrical grade insulation Kraft papers and press Boards of standard should be used. For the use standard material the names of following firms have been approved. Sr. No. 1 2 Name of insulating Name of the firms material Press board a. Senapathy whitely b. Raman Board Craft paper a. Ballarpur b. Padamjee c. Triveni d. M/s Skytouch Tapes Ltd., Mumbai. e. M/s KLIM Enterprises, Mumbai. f. M/s Vijaya Mercantile Ltd. New Delhi. g. M/s Badri Enterprises, New Delhi.
Page 7 of 26
______________________________________________________________________
3 4 Press pahn paper Gaskets Senapathy whitely a. New cork b. Talbros c. M/s Skytouch Tapes Ltd., Mumbai. d. M/s KLIM Enterprises, Mumbai. e. M/s Vijaya Mercantile Ltd. New Delhi. f. M/s Badri Enterprises, New Delhi.
5.7.2 All spacers, axial wedges / runners used in windings shall be made of pre-compressed pressboard-solid, conforming to type B 3.1 of IEC 641-3-2. In case of cross-over coil winding of HV all spacers shall be properly sheared and dovetail punched to ensure proper locking. All axial wedges/ runners shall be properly milled to dovetail shape so that they pass through the designed spacers freely. Insulation shearing, cutting, milling and punching operations shall be carried out in such out in such a way, that there should not be any burr and dimensional variations. 5.8. TANK:- The rectangular transformer tank can be with radiator fins/rounded or elliptical cooling tubes. The main tank of the
transformers shall be made of good quality steel having a minimum thickness of sides of the tanks 3.15 mm and a minimum thickness of 5.0 mm for top and bottom plates. The tank shall be capable of withstanding a pressure up to 0.8 kg/cm2 and (-) 0.3 kg/cm2 for 30 minutes and 10 minutes respectfully. The word UHBVNL
PROPERTY shall be engraved on the top cover plate and side of the tank body. No negative tolerance shall be allowed. 5.8.1. For Rectangular plain tank:5.8.1.1. The transformer tank shall be of robust construction rectangular in shape and shall be built up of tested MS sheets. 5.8.1.2. The internal clearance of tank shall be such that, it shall facilitate easy lifting of core with coils from the tank without dismantling L.V bushings. 5.8.1.3. All joints of tank and fittings shall be oil tight and no bulging should occur during service. The tank design shall be such that the core and windings can be lifted freely. The tank plate shall be of such strength that the complete transformers when filled with oil may be lifted bodily by means of lifting lugs. Inside of tank shall be painted with varnish/ Hot oil. 5.8.1.4. Manufacturer should carry out all welding operations as per relevant ASME standards and submit a copy of the welding procedure
qualifications and welder performance qualification certificates to the customer. 5.8.1.5. The four walls of the tank shall be made of Two L shaped sheets (without joints) fully welded at the corners from inside so that the joint is
Page 8 of 26
______________________________________________________________________ stronger due to V-shape welding fillet and also outside of the tank for withstanding a pressure of 0.8 kg/cm2 for 10 minutes. 5.8.1.6. The tank shall be reinforced by welded angle on all the outside walls on the edge of the tank to form two equal compartments. Permanent deflection when the tank without oil is subject to a vacuum of 525 mm of mercury for rectangular tank and 760 mm of mercury for round tank, shall not be more than 4 mm in accordance with clause 22.5 of IS:1180 (Part-I/1989) upto 750 mm length and 6mm upto 1250 mm length. The tank shall further be capable of withstanding a pressure of 0.8 kg/cm2 (g) and a vacuum of 0.3 kg/cm2 (g) without any deformation. 5.8.1.7.
The radiators can be of tube type or fin or pressed type steel type to achieve the desired cooling to limit the specified temperature rise. The transformer shall be capable of giving continuous rated output without exceeding the specified temperature rise Bidder shall submit the calculation sheet.
5.8.1.8. Lifting lugs: 4 Nos. welded heavy duty lifting lugs of MS flat 8 mm thick (min) suitably reinforced by vertical supporting flat welded edgewise below the jug on the side wall. 5.8.1.9. Pulling lugs: 4 Nos. of welded heavy duty pulling lugs of MS plate 8 mm thick (mm) shall be provided to pull the transformer horizontally. 5.8.1.10. Top cover fixing bolts of G.I adequately spaced and 6mm Neoprene bonded cork gaskets conforming to IS 42332 part-II shall be placed between tank and cover. The bolts outside tank shall have 2 flat washers & one spring washer. 5.8.1.11. Pressure release value as standard fitment shall be provided on the top
of tank of transformer which should operate at a pressure of 0.3 to 0.5 kg/cm2.
5.8.2. CONSERVATOR: On Transformers of ratings upto 100 KVA with rectangular plain tank the provision of conservators is optional with the clarification that: the transformer with conservator shall comply with IS: 1180 Part-I (Non sealed type) the transformers without conservator shall comply with IS:1180 Part-II (Sealed type) When a conservator is provided oil gauge and the plain or dehydrating breathing devise shall be fixed to the conservator which shall also be provided with a drain plug and a filling hole (1) normal size thread) with cover. The capacity of a conservator tank shall be designed keeping in view the total quantity of oil and its contraction and expansion due to temperature variations, In addition the cover of main tank shall be provided with an air release plug to enable
Page 9 of 26
______________________________________________________________________ air trapped within to be released, unless the conservator is so located as to eliminate the possibility of air being trapped within the main tank. The inside diameter of the pipe connecting the conservator to the main tank should be within 20 to 50 mm and it should be projected into the conservator so that its end is approximately 20 mm above the bottom of the conservator so as to create a sump for collection of impurities. The minimum oil level (corresponding to -5 deg C) should be above the sump level. 5.9. SURFACE PREPARATION & PAINTING.
5.9.1. General 5.9.1.1. All paints shall be applied in accordance with the paint manufacturers recommendations. Particular attention shall be paid to the following: 5.9.1.1.1. Proper storage to avoid exposure as well as extremes of temperature. 5.9.1.1.2. 5.9.1.1.3. Surface preparation prior to painting. Mixing and thinning.
5.9.1.1.4. Application of paints and the recommended limit of time intervals between coats. 5.9.1.1.5. 5.9.1.2. Shelf life for storage. All paints when applied in a normal full coat, shall be free from runs, sags, wrinkles, patchiness, brush marks or other defects. 5.9.1.3. All primers shall be well marked into the surface, particularly in areas where painting is evident, and the first priming coat shall be applied as soon as possible after cleaning. The paint shall be applied by airless spray according to manufactures recommendations. However,
whenever airless spray is not possible, conventional spray be used with prior approval of purchaser. 5.9.1.4. The supplier shall prior to painting nameplates, lettering gauges sight glasses, light fittings and similar such items. 5.9.2. Cleaning and Surface preparation 5.9.2.1. After all machining, forming and welding shall been completed, all steel work surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned of rust, scale, welding slag or spatter and other contamination prior to any painting. 5.9.2.2. Steel surfaces shall prepared by Short blast cleaning or Chemical by Seven Tank process including Phosphating to the appropriate quality. 5.9.2.3. The pressure and volume of the compressed air supply for blast cleaning shall meet the work requirement and shall be sufficiently free from all water contamination to ensure that the cleaning process is not impaired. 5.9.2.4. Chipping, scraping and steel wire brushing using manual or power driven tools cannot remove firmly adherent mill-scale shall only be used where
Page 10 of 26
10
______________________________________________________________________ blast cleaning is impractical. Manufacture to explain such areas in his technical offer clearly. 5.9.3. Protective Coating: 5.9.3.1. As soon as all items have been cleaned and within four hours of the subsequent drying. They shall be given suitable anti-corrosion protection. 5.9.4. Paint Material. Followings are the types of paint that may be suitably used for the items to be painted at shop and supply of matching paint to site: 5.9.4.1. Heat resistant paint (Hot oil Proof) for inside surface. 5.9.4.2. For external surfaces one coat of Thermo Setting powder paint or 1 coats of Zinc chromate primer followed by 2 coats of Synthetic Enamel /Polyurethane base paint. These paints can be either air-drying or stoving. The coating of inside surfaces shall be made with heat resistant paint 5.9.4.3. The colour of the finishing coats shall be dark admiral gray conforming to No. 632 of ISS-5 of 1961 5.9.5. Painting procedure 5.9.5.1. All painting shall be carried out in conformity with both Specification and with the paint manufactures recommendation. All paints in anyone particular system, whether shop or site applied, shall originate from one paint manufacture. 5.9.5.2. Particular attention shall be paid to the manufacturers instructions on storage, mixing, thinning and pot life. The paint shall only be applied in the manner detailed by the manufactures e.g. brush, roller, conventional or airless spray and shall be applied under the manufactures recommended condition Minimum and maximum time intervals between coating shall be closely followed. 5.9.5.3. All prepared steel surfaces should be primed before visible re-rusting occurs or within 4 hours whichever is sooner. 5.9.5.4. Chemical treated steel surface shall be primed as soon as the surface is dry and while the surface is still warm. 5.9.5.5. Where the quality of film is impaired by excess film thickness (wrinkling, mud cracking or general softness) the Supplier shall remove the unsatisfactory paint coating and apply another. As a general rule, dry film thickness should not exceed the specified minimum dry film thickness by more than 25%. In all instances where two or more coats of the same paint are specified, such coating may or may not be of contrasting colours. 5.9.5.6. Paint applied to items that are not be painted shall be removed at Suppliers expense, leaving the surface clean, unstained and undamaged.
Page 11 of 26
11
______________________________________________________________________ 5.9.6. Damaged Paintwork 5.9.6.1. Any damage occurring to any part of a painting scheme shall be made good to the same standard of corrosion protection and appearance as that originally employed. 5.9.7. Any damage paint work shall be made good as follows: 5.9.7.1. The damaged area, together with an area extending 25 mm around its boundary, shall be cleaned down to bare metal. 5.9.7.2. A priming coat shall be immediately applied, followed by a full paint finish equal to that originally applied and extending 50 mm around the perimeter of the original damage. 5.9.7.3. The repainted surface shall present a smooth surface. This shall be obtained by carefully chamfering the paint edges before and after priming. 5.9.8. Dry Film Thickness 5.9.8.1. To the maximum extent practicable the coats shall be applied as a continuous film of uniform thickness and free of pores. Overspray, skips, runs, sags and drips should be avoided. The different coats may or may not be of the same colour. 5.9.8.2. Each coat of paint shall be allowed to harden before the next is applied as per manufacturers recommendation. 5.9.8.3. Particular attention must be paid to full film thickness at edges. 5.9.8.4. The requirements for the dry film thickness (DFT) of paint and the materials to be used shall be as given below. Sr. No. 1 2 Paint Type Area to painted Inside outside Outside Outside be No. of coats Total Dry film thickness (mm) 20 microns 60 microns 30 microns 25 microns each 35/ 10 microns
Thermo setting paint Inside Liquid paint a) Zinc chromate (primer) b) Synthetic Enamel/ Poly Urethene (Finish coat) c) Hot oil paint
01 01 01 02
inside
01
5.10. BUSHINGS: 5.10.1. The bushings shall conform to the relevant standards specified and shall be outdoor. The bushing rods and nuts shall be made of brass material 12 mm diameter for both HT & LT. The HT bushings shall be fixed to the transformers on side with straight pockets and in the same plane or the top cover but LT bushing shall be provided on the side of the tank. The tests as per latest IS 2099 and IS7421 shall be conducted on the transformer bushings.
Page 12 of 26
12
______________________________________________________________________ 5.10.2. For 11 KV, 17.5 KV class bushings shall be used and for 0.433 KV, 1.1KV class bushings shall be used. Bushings of plain shades as per IS-3347 shall be mounted on the side of the Tank and not on top cover. 5.10.3. Dimensions of the bushings of the voltage class shall conform to the
Standards specified. 5.10.4. A minimum phase to phase clearance of 75 mm for LV (upto 1.1 KV
bushings) and 255 mm for HV bushings shall be obtained with the bushing mounted on the transformer. 5.10.5. The bushings shall be fixed on sides with pockets in the same plane or on the top cover. Arcing horns or lightning arrestors shall be provided on HV bushings. 5.10.6. Brazing of all inter connections; jumpers from winding to bushing shall have cross section larger than the winding conductor. All the Brazers shall be qualified as per ASME, Section-IX. 5.10.7. The bushings shall be of reputed make supplied by those manufacturers who are having manufacturing and testing facilities for manufacture of insulators. 5.10.8. The terminal arrangement shall not require a separate oil chamber not connected to oil in the main tank. 5.10.9. The LV bushings & micro-processor based MCCB with time current characteristics in compliance with IS:6600 (if provided) shall be housed within the metallic enclosure with sealing arrangement so as to avoid any possibility of tapping of supply from the bushing terminal. The enclosure shall be made with sheet metal of thickness not less than 2mm and powder coated. Enclosure shall have provision for pad locking arrangements. 5.11. Terminal connectors: The HV bushing stems shall be provided with suitable terminal connectors so as to connect the jumper without disturbing the bushing stem. Connectors shall be with eye bolts so as to receive 55 mm2 conductor for HV. Terminal connectors should must be type tested as per IS : 5561. 5.12. Terminal markings High voltage and Low voltage phase windings shall be marked both in the terminal boards inside the tank and on the outside with capital letter IU, IV, IW and low voltage winding for the same phase marked by corresponding small letter 2u, 2v, 2w. The neutral point terminal shall be indicated by the letter 2n.Neutral terminal to be brought out and connected to local grounding terminal by an Earthing strip. 5.13. FITTINGS: The following standard fittings shall be provided. 5.13.1. 5.13.2. Rating and terminal marking plates non-detachable Ear thing terminal with lugs -2Nos.
Page 13 of 26
13
______________________________________________________________________ 5.13.3. 5.13.4. Lifting lugs for main tank & top cover. Terminal connectors on the HV & for LV bushings-Lugs, glands (being covered in the box) 5.13.5. 5.13.6. 5.13.7. 5.13.8. 5.13.9. 5.13.10. 5.13.11. Thermometer pocket with cap -1 No. Air release device HV bushings -3 Nos. LV bushings - 4 Nos. Pulling lugs 4 Nos. Stiffener angle 40x40x5 mm and vertical strip of 50x5 mm flat Radiators No. & length may be mentioned (as per heat dissipation calculations) 5.13.12. 5.13.13. 5.13.14. 5.13.15. Arcing horns or 9 KV 5 KVA lighting arrestors on HT side -3 Nos. Prismatic Oil level gauge. Drain cum sampling valve Oil filling hole having p. 1- thread with plug and drain valve on the conservator 5.13.16. 5.13.17. 5.13.18. Silica gel breather Base channel 75x40 mm. Pressure relief device.
5.13.19. The supplier shall be responsible to replace, free of cost, with no transportation or insurance cost to the Purchaser, up to destination, the whole or any part of the material which in normal and proper use proves the defective in quality or workmanship, subject to the condition that the defect is noticed within 78 months from the date of receipt of material in stores or 72 months from the date of commissioning whichever period may expire earlier. The consignee or any other officer of Nigam actually using the material will give prompt notice of each such defect to the supplier. The replacement shall be effected by the supplier within a reasonable time, but not, in any case, exceeding 45 days. The supplier shall, also, arrange to remove the defective within a reasonable period, but not exceeding 45 days from the date of issue of notice in respect thereof, failing which, the purchaser reserve the right to dispose of defective material in any manner considered fit by him (Purchaser), at the sole risk and cost of the supplier. Any sale proceeds of the defective material after meeting the expenses incurred on its custody, disposal handling etc., shall however be credited to the suppliers account and set off against any outstanding dues of the purchaser against the supplier. The warranty for 72/78 months shall be one time. 5.14. FASTENERS: All bolts, studs, screw threads, pipe threads, bolt heads and nuts shall comply with the appropriate Indian Standards for metric threads, or the technical equivalent.
Page 14 of 26
14
______________________________________________________________________ Bolts or studs shall not be less than 6 mm in diameter except when used for small wiring terminals. All nuts and pins shall be adequately locked. Wherever possible bolts shall be fitted in such a manner that in the event of failure of locking resulting in the nuts working loose and falling off, the bolt will remain in position. All ferrous bolts, nuts and washers placed in outdoor positions shall be treated to prevent corrosion, by hot dip galvanizing, except high tensile steel bolts and spring washers which shall be electro-galvanised / plated. Appropriate precautions shall be taken to prevent electrolytic action between dissimilar metals. Each bolt or stud shall project at least one thread but not more than three threads through the nut, except when otherwise approved for terminal board studs or relay stems. If bolts nuts are placed so that they are inaccessible by means of ordinary spanners, special spanners shall be provided. The length of the screwed portion of the bolts shall be such that no screw thread may form part of a shear plane between members. Taper washers shall be provided where necessary. Protective washers of suitable material shall be provided front and back or the securing screws. 2 No., anti-theft fasteners of steel on two diagonally opposite corners of the tank shall be provided. All nuts & pins shall be adequately locked. 5.15. MOUNTING ARRANGEMENT : The under base of all transformers shall be provided with two 75X40 mm channels 460 mm long with holes to make them suitable for fixing on a platform or plinth 5.16. OVERLOAD CAPACITY The transformers shall be suitable for loading as per IS: 6600/ 1972 6. a) TESTS :
All the equipment offered shall be fully type tested by the bidder or his collaborator as per the relevant standards including the additional type tests mentioned at clause 6.2. The type test must have been conduced on a transformer of same design. The Bidder shall furnish four sets of type test reports along with Offers without type test reports will be treated as Non-responsive. The type test certificates should not be more than three years old on the date of bid opening. the offer.
b)
c)
Special
tests
other
than
type
and
routine
tests,
as
agreed
between
purchaser and Bidder shall also be carried out as per the relevant standards. The requirements of site tests are also given in this clause.
6.1. ROUTINE TESTS: 6.1.1. Ratio, polarity and phase sequence. 6.1.2. No Load current and losses at service voltage and formal frequency. 15
Page 15 of 26
______________________________________________________________________ 6.1.3. Load losses at rated current and normal frequency. 6.1.4. Impedance Voltage test. 6.1.5. Resistance of windings at each tap, cold (at or near the test bed temp.) 6.1.6. Insulation resistance. 6.1.7. Induced over voltage withstand test. 6.1.8. Separate source voltage withstand test. 6.1.9. Neutral current measurement. 6.1.10. Oil samples (one sample per lot) to comply with IS 1866. 6.1.11. Measurement of 50% load & 100% load losses and magnetizing current at rated frequency and at 90%, 100% and 110% voltage. 6.1.12. Flux balance test. 6.2. TYPE TESTS TO BE CONDUCTED ON ONE UNIT: In addition to the Tests mentioned in para 6.1 following Tests shall be conducted. 6.2.1. Temperature rise test for determining the maximum temperature rise after continuous full load run. The ambient temperature and time of test should be stated in the test certificate. 6.2.2. Impulse voltage test: As per Clause No. 13 (With chopped wave) of IS 2026 part-III latest version. BIL for 11KV shall be 95 KV Peak instead of 75 KV. 6.2.3. Air Pressure Test: As per CI. - 22.5 of IS- 1180/part-I/1989. 6.2.4. Short Circuit withstand test: Thermal and dynamic ability. 6.2.5. Magnetic Balance Test 6.2.6 The prototype transformer on which type test got conducted shall be supplied to UHBVN/ DHBVN duly sealed after completion of type testing in the beginning itself before commencement of supply. The bidder shall
furnish an affidavit that all his balance transformers shall meet with prototype in all respects (internal & external). The Nigam can randomly select any transformer & verify the internal / external details with the prototype sample at any time during warranty period. Type test certificates for the tests carried out on prototype of same specifications shall be submitted along with the bid. The purchase may select any transformer from the offered lot for inspection during subsequent lots for carrying out temperature rise test from any Govt. approved lab. Further the purchaser may select the transformer for type tests randomly. The type test report(s) submitted by the bidder/ supplier from any NABL accredited laboratory shall be acceptable for participation of the bidder in the procurement/ empanelment process. In case NABL accredited laboratory happens to be that of manufacturer itself added precaution shall be taken to get type test and other tests witnessed in the laboratory by Nigam representative at the time of acceptance of material.
Page 16 of 26
16
______________________________________________________________________ 6.3. TESTS AT SITE: The purchaser reserves the right to conduct all tests on Transformer after arrival at site and the manufacturer shall guarantee test certificate figures under actual service conditions. 6.4. ACCEPTANCE TESTS: The transformers shall be subjected to the following routine/acceptance test in presence of purchasers representative at the place of manufacture before dispatch without any extra charges. The testing shall be carried out in accordance with IS: 1180 and IS: 2026 with latest amendments. 6.4.1. Checking of weights, dimensions, fitting and accessories, tank sheet thickness, oil quality, material, finish and workmanship as per GTP/QA Plan and contract drawings. 6.4.2. Physical verifications of core coil assembly and measurement of flux density of one unit of each rating, in every inspection with reference to short circuit test report. 6.4.3. All tests as specified in clause 6.1
6.4.4. One transformer per lot shall be tested at NABL accredited independent laboratory for performance measurement at free of cost. 6.5. TOLERANCES: Unless otherwise specified herein the test value of transformers supplied would be within the tolerance permitted in the relevant standards. No positive tolerance is allowed on guaranteed 50% Load and 100% Load losses. 7. INSPECTION: All tests and inspection shall be made at the place of manufacturer and unless other wise especially agreed upon the manufacturer and the purchaser at the time of purchase. The manufacturer shall afford the inspector representing the purchaser all reasonable facilities, without charge to satisfy him that the material is being furnished in accordance with specification. The bidder shall give 15 days (for local supplies) and 30 days (in case of foreign bidders) advance information to enable the purchaser to depute his representative for witnessing acceptance routine tests. The manufacturer shall provide all services to establish and maintain quality of workman ship in his works and that of his sub-contractors to ensure the mechanical/electrical performance of components, compliance with drawings, identification and acceptability of all materials, parts and equipment as per Nigam intends to purchase only High Quality material. For this purpose stringent testing of the material can be done. Inspection can be got done from third party Inspection agency or from Nigams own officers. Nigam reserves the right of 100% testing of the transformers. The details of source of material shall be supplied duly filled as per Annexure-III.
Page 17 of 26
17
______________________________________________________________________ 8. 8.1. QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN: The Bidder shall furnish following information along with his bid. Information shall be separately given for individual type of material offered. 8.1.1. Statement giving list of important raw materials, names of sub-supplies for the raw materials, list of standards according to which the raw materials are tested. List of tests normally carried out on raw materials in the presence of Bidders representative, copies of test certificates. 8.1.2. Information and copies of test certificates as in (1) above in respect of bought out accessories. 8.1.3. List of manufacturing facilities available. 8.1.4. Level of automation achieved and list of areas where manual processing exists. 8.1.5. List of areas in manufacturing process, where stage inspections are normally carried out for quality control and details of such test and inspection. 8.1.6. List of testing equipment available with the bidder for final testing of equipment along with valid calibration reports shall be furnished with the bid. Manufacturer shall posses 0.1 class instruments for measurement of losses. 8.1.7. Quality Assurance Plan (QAP) with hold points for purchases inspection as per Annexure. 8.2. The successful Bidder shall within 30 days of placement of order submit following information regarding list of new materials as well as bought out accessories and the names of sub-suppliers selected from those furnished along with offer. 9. DOCUMENTATION: The Bidder shall furnish along with the bid the dimensional drawings of the stems offered indicating all the fittings. 9.1. 9.2. 10. Dimensions tolerances Weight of individual components and total weight.
PACKING & FORWARDING:
10.1. The packing shall be done as per the manufacturers standard practice. However, it should be ensured that the packing is such that, the material would not get damaged during by Rail/ Road/ Sea. 10.2. The marking on each package shall be as per the relevant IS. 11. MANDATORY SPARES:
Mandatory spares shall be supplied as per the purchasers requirement. 12. COMPLETELY SELF PROTECTED (CSP) FEATURES The transformers shall have the following CSP features: 12.1. Internal HV fuse on the HT side of transformer: Specification for the HV fuse: Expulsion/any other suitable type of fuse placed in series with the primary winding. The fuse is mounted normally inside 18 Page 18 of 26
______________________________________________________________________ of the primary bushing for the three phases and it is connected to the high voltage winding through a terminal block. This has to protect that part of the electrical distribution system, which is ahead of the distribution transformers from faults, which occur inside the distribution transformers i.e. either on the windings or some other part of the transformers. It shall be ensured that the fuse does not blow for faults on the secondary side (LT side) of the transformer i.e. the blowing characteristics of the fuse and LT breaker shall be so coordinated such that the fuse shall not blow for any faults on the secondary side of the transformer beyond LT breakers and those faults shall be cleared by the LT breaker only. 12.1.1. Internally mounted oil immersed LT breaker on the LV side of the
transformer: 12.1.1.1. 3 Pole LT circuit breaker: All LT faults after the breaker shall be clear
by this breaker. As such it shall be designed for perfect coordination with the HT fuse link. The bidder shall furnish the time/current characteristics of LT circuit breaker of 11 KV fuses for various current multiples.
The two characteristics shall be drawn on the same sheet to indicate coordination between the circuit breaker and fuse. The Bidder shall carry out coordination test as indicated above and this forms one of the tests as for acceptance test. The breaker shall be coordinated thermally with the transformer design to follow closely the variations of coil acceptance test. The breaker shall be coordinated thermally with the transformer design to follow closely the variations of coil temperature due to fluctuating load and ambient temperatures. This is to be accomplished by connecting the breaker in series between the secondary windings and the secondary bushings. The breaker shall be located in the same oil as the core and coil assembly so that the bimetal are sensitive to the temperature of oil as well as the load current The circuit breaker shall also be closed and opened manually standing on ground. The current carrying parts of breakers shall be copper plus a set of copper tungsten current interrupting contacts. The cross section of the current carrying parts of the breakers shall withstand the full load current at a current density not more than 2.5 A/Sq.mm (for additional mechanical strength the area should be more). 2.1.1.2. 12.1.1.3. 12.1.1.4. 12.1.1.5. 12.1.1.6. 12.1.1.7. 12.1.1.8. 12.1.1.9. Unity P.F. & 0.8 P.F. 125% load 100% load 75% load 50% load 25% load Regulation at
Page 19 of 26
19
______________________________________________________________________
The bidder may offer microprocessor based MCCB with line current characteristics confirming to IS:156600 of appropriate rating & good quality from reputed manufacturer in the metal-box of the distribution transformer instead of internal LV breaker. NOTE: - The breaker-trip setting shall be done considering loading of 130% loading for 6 hours duration at an average ambient temperature of 400 C for internal breaker as well as MCCB (if provided).
14.0
Transformer & Metallic box Sealing facility

The transformer should have facility to seal the transformers Top
Plate & its body and also the Metal box, housing the LV bushing and MCCB (if provided) along with the transformer. The metal box shall have pad-lock arrangement & complete protection from dirt, better. rain-water & other pollutants & shall comply to IP:53 protection or
15.0
RATING AND TERMINAL MARKING PLATES:

There shall be rating plates on the transformer containing the information specified
in clause 15.2 of IS: 2026-1977 (part-i).
50% & 100% load losses of the transformer
should also be mentioned on the rating plate. The following additional information must also be punched on the plate and imposed two opposite sides of the body of T/F.
i)
ii) iii) v)
Purchase Order No & Date.

Date of inspection. Make Guarantee period
4-Star rating label in accordance with colour design, logo etc., shall be provided on the transformer as per the design / recommendations of Bureau of Efficiency (BEE).
16.0
GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS

The guaranteed technical particulars of the transformer shall be given by
the tenderer (Annexure-I) along with the tender. Tenders without GTPS shall be out rightly rejected
17.0
CHALLENGE CLAUSE
The material offered / received after the inspection by the authorized
inspecting Officer may again be subjected to the test for losses or any other parameters from any testing house / in house technique of the Nigam having requisite capabilities and facilities. The results if found deviating / unacceptable or in non-compliance with approved GTPs, the lot shall be rejected and bidder shall arrange to supply the within thirty (30) days of such detection at his cost including to & fro transportation. In addition to this a penalty @ 10% of cost of the rejected lost of material shall be imposed
General Manager/P&D Cum-Member Secretary CSC UHBVN Panchkula. 20
Page 20 of 26
______________________________________________________________________ ANNEXURE-1
GUARANTEED TRANSFORMERS
&
OTHER
PARTICULARS
FOR
DISTRIBUTION
(To be furnished by the Manufacturer) SI.N Description 100KVA 1. Make & Manufacturer 2. Place of Manufacture 3. Voltage in KVA 4. Rating in KVA 5. Core Material used and Grade a) Flux density b) Over fluxing without saturation (Curve to be furnished by the Manufacturer in support of his claim) 6. Maximum temperature rise of a) Windings by resistance method b) Oil by Thermometer 7. Magnetizing (No load) Current at a) Normal Voltage b) Maximum Voltage 8. Core loss in watts a) Normal Voltage b) Maximum Voltage 9. Resistance of Windings at 20 deg. C (with 5% tolerance) a) HV Winding (ohms) b) LV Winding (ohms) 10. Full load losses (watts) at 75 deg. c 11. Total Losses at 100% load at 75 deg. c 12. Total Losses at 50% load at 75 deg. c 13. Current density used for a) HV Winding b) LV Winding 14. Clearances a) Core & LV b) LV & HV c) HV Phase to Phase
Page 21 of 26
25 KVA
63 KVA
11000/433 V 25 KVA
11000/433 V 63 KVA
11000/433 V 100 KVA
21
______________________________________________________________________ d) End insulation clearance to Earth e) Any point of winding to tank 15. Efficiency at 75 deg. C. a) Unity P.F. & b) 0.8 P.F 1) 125 % load 2) 100 % laod 3) 75 % load 4) 50 % load 5) 25 % load 16. Regulation at a) Unity P.F. b) 0.8 P.F. at 75 deg. C 17. % Impedance at 75 deg. C 18. Flash Test HV 28 KV/ 50 HZ for 1 minute LV 3 KV/ 50 HZ for 1 minute 19. Over potential Test Double Voltage & 20. Double frequency for 1 minute 21. Impulse test 22. Weight content of a) Core Lamination (min.) b) Windings (min.) c) Tank & Fittings (Thickness of side walls & thickness of top/bottom plate of DT) d) Oil e) Oil qty (min.) f) Total Weight 23. Oil Data 1. Qty for first filling (mm) 2. Grade of oil used 3. Makers name 4. BDV at the time of filling 24. Transformer: 1) Overall length X breadth X height 2) Tank length X breadth X height 3) Thickness of plates for a) Side plate (min.) b) Top & Bottom plate (min.) 25. Radiation: 1) Heat dissipation by tank walls exclusive & bottom 2) Heat dissipation by cooling tube
Page 22 of 26
22
______________________________________________________________________ 3) Dia. & thickness of cooling tube 4) Whether calculation sheet for selecting cooling area to ensure that the transformer is capable of giving continuous rated output without exceeding temperature rise is enclosed. 26. Inter layer insulation provided in design for 1) Top & bottom layer 2) In between all layer 3) Details of end insulation 4) Whether wedges are provide at 50 % turns of the HV coil 27. Insulation materials provided a) For Conductors (1) HV (2) LV b) For Core 28. Material and Size of the wire used 1) HV a) SWG/mm b) Dia 2) LV a) Strip size. b) No. of Conductors in parallel. c) Total area of cross section (sq. mm.) 29. Is the name plate gives all particulars as required in Tender 30. MCCB (if provided) as per Nigam latest technical specification. 31. Whether BEE recommended 4-star Label Plate fixed on the DT 32. Particulars of Bushings HV/ LV i) Makers name ii) Type IS-3347/IS- 1180 iii) Rating as per I.S. iv) Dry power frequency voltage withstand test v) Wet power frequency voltage withstand test Note: The following shall be specifically confirmed 1. Whether the offer conforms to the limits of impedance mentioned in the specification 2. Whether the offer conforms to the limits of temperature rise mentioned in the specification. 3. Whether the losses of the transformers offered are within the limits specified 4. Whether the transformers offered is already type for the design and test reports enclosed.
Page 23 of 26
23
______________________________________________________________________
ANNEXURE-II ADDITIONAL DETAILS SI. No. Description 1. Core Grade 2. Core diameter ( mm) 3. Gross Core area (cm) 4. Net Core area (cm) 5. Flux density (Tesla) 6. Wt. of Core (kg.) 7. Loss per kg. of Core at the Specified Flux density (Watts) 8. Core window height 9. Center to center distance of the core (mm) 10. No. of LV. Turns 11. No. of HV turns 12. Size of LV Conductor bare/ covered (mm) 13. Size of HV conductor bare/ covered (mm) 14. No. of parallels 15. Current density of LV winding amps/sq.mm. 16. Current density of HV winding amps/ sq.mm 17. Wt. of the LV winding for Transformer kg. 18. Wt. of the HV winding for Transformer kg. 19. No. of LV Coils/phase 20. No. of HV coils/phase 21. Height of LV Windings mm 22. Height of HV Windings mm 23. ID/OD of LV Winding mm 24. ID/OD of HV winding mm 25. Size of the duct in LV winding mm 26. Size of the duct in HV winding mm 27. Size of the duct between HV & LV mm 28. HV winding to LV winding clearance mm 29. HV winding to tank clearance mm 30. Calculated impedance % 31. HV to earth creepage distance mm 32. LV to earth creepage distance mm
Page 24 of 26
24
______________________________________________________________________
ANNEXURE-3 SOURCE OF MATERIALS/PLACES OF MANUFACTURE TESTING AND INSPECTION SI. No. Item Source of Material Place of Place of testing and Manufacture inspection 1. Laminations 2. Aluminium Conductor 3. Insulated winding wires 4. Oil 5. Press Boards 6. Kraft Paper 7. MS Plated / Angles/ Channels 8. Gaskets 9. Bushing HV/ LV 10. Paints
Page 25 of 26
25
______________________________________________________________________
ACRONYMS --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Reference Abbreviations Name and Asset --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------IEC International Electro Technical Commission Bureau Central de la Commission Electro Technique International, Rue de verembe Geneva, Switzerland.
ISO
International Organization for Standardization. Danish Board of Standardization Aurchoegyej-12 DK-2900, Heerpup DENMARK
ISS
Indian Standard Bureau of Indian Standards Nanak Bhawan 9, Bahadur Shah Zafar Marg, NEW DELHI-110002, INDIA
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Page 26 of 26
26
UHBVN & DHBVN CSC SPECS
Specification No. CSC-IV/DH/UH/P&D/2009-2010 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR 11/0.433 KV 6.3, 10, 16, 20 COPPER WOUND CSP TYPE & 40 KVA ALUMINIUM WOUND CSP TYPE, (WITH COMPLETELY SELF PROTECTED) DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS
General Manager/P&D, DHBVN, Hisar
General Manager/P&D, UHBVN/DHBVN, Panchkula
Issue of the Month: APRIL.2009
C:\Documents and Settings\Administrator\Desktop\28-01-10\PDC\CSC -IV.doc
Page 1 of 27
TECHNICAL SPECIFICTIONS FOR 11/0.433 KV 6.3, 10, 16 & 20 KVA COPPER WOUND & 40 KVA ALUMINIUM WOUND, WITH COMPLETELY SELF PROTECTED DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS 1. SCOPE This specification covers the engineering, design, manufacture and testing, stage inspection, testing before supply & delivery of 6.3, 10, 16 & 20 KVA Copper wound & 40 KVA Aluminium wound distribution transformers, with CSP features required for outdoor sub-stations in earthed neutral, electric distribution with Normal / System Voltage of 11/12 KV. The offered material shall be complete with all components necessary for their effective & trouble free operation. Such components shall be deemed to be within scope of bidders supply irrespective of whether these are specifically brought out in the specifications. 2. STANDARDS. The transformer shall conform in all respects to IS-1180:2026 as amended from time to time except where specified otherwise. The fittings and
accessories shall also comply generally with the requirement of the latest edition of the respective IS. 3. SERVICE CONDITIONS:The Distribution Transformers & other equipment/material to be supplied against this specification shall be suitable for satisfactory operation under the following climatic Conditions as per IS-2026 (Part-I) latest revision i) Location At various locations in the state of Haryana ii) Max ambient temperature (deg.c) 60 iii) iv) v) vi) vii) viii) ix) x) xi) Min ambient air temperature (deg. c) Max average daily ambient temperature (deg. c) Max. yearly weighed average ambient temperature (deg. C) Max. altitude above mean sea level (Meters) Minimum Relative Humidity (%age ) Max. Relative Humidity (%age) Avg. no of Rainy days/ year Avg. annual rainfall Maximum wind pressure -5 40 32 1000 26 95 120 900mm 195 Kg./mm Sq.
The equipment shall be for use in moderately hot and humid tropical climate, conducive to rust and fungus growth. 4. TYPE AND RATING The transformers shall have core type construction and oil immersed, naturally air cooled and shall be suitable for outdoor service as step down transformers. The rating and electrical characteristics of the transformers shall be as follows:-
Page 2 of 27
1) 2) 3) 4) 6) 7) 8) 9) 5.
Continuous Capacity Rated HT Voltage Rated LT Voltage Frequency Connection (HT) Connection (LT) Vector Group Type of Cooling
6.3, 10, 16, 20 & 40 KVA 11 KV 433-250 Volts 50 Hz + 5% Delta Star Dyn-11 ONAN
TEMPERATURE RISE Each transformer shall be capable of operating continuously at its normal rating without exceeding following temperature rises with the above service conditions given in clause 3 :i) ii) iii) 35oC in oil by thermometer. 40oC in winding by resistance. Hot Spot temperature not to exceed 95oC when calculated over an annual weighted average temperature of 35o C as per IS: 2026 (Part-II Clause 4.9.4)
The limit of temperature rise mentioned above will have to be satisfied by the manufacturer by carrying the Heat Run test by feeding losses calculated at 100o C corresponding to the rated current. 6. 6.1 LOSSES AND IMPEDANCE VALUES: The losses at 50% & 100% load shall not exceed the value given in the following table: KVA Max. losses at 50% load in Max. losses at 100% o Rating Watts at 75 C load in Watts at 75oC 6.3 53 245 10 16 20 40 98 135 157 200 300 440 535 920
The losses are maximum allowable and there would not be any plus tolerance. No weightage in prices for offers with lower losses shall be given for these sizes of transformers. 6.2 IMPEDANCE The percentage impedance at 75oC shall be up to 4.5% subject to tolerance as per IS: 2026-1977. 6.3 (a) FLUX DENSITY Flux density at normal voltage shall not be more than 1.60 Tesla. (b) OVER FLUX Over flux in the transformer core shall be limited to 12.5% to ensure that in the event of over voltage to the extent of 12.5%, the core does not get saturated. (c) NO LOAD CURRENT No load current at 100% voltage and 50 Hz shall not be more than 2% of the full load current and shall be subject to tolerance as per ISS. No. load current at V/F=112.5% of normal V/F shall not exceed 4%. The supplier shall furnish necessary design data in support of this stipulation.
Page 3 of 27
7.
PROTECTION AGAINST TRANSIENTS In order to ensure that the transformers
will
withstand
lightening/disturbances, the impulse withstand strength of transformers windings shall not be less 75 KV peak (1.2/50 micro second positive wave). 8. INSULATION RESISTANCE OF WINDINGS: The minimum insulation resistance values in Mega Ohms between winding and earth when the transformer is filled with oil should be: Insulation Resistance in Mega Ohms between winding to earth. 20oc 11000 Volts (HV) 433 Volts (LV) 800 400 30oC 40oC 50oC 60oC 400 200 200 100 100 50 50 25
Insulations Resistance in Mega Ohms between HV & LV windings:HV & LV 9. TEST VOLTAGE: 1600 800 400 200 100
Transformers shall be capable of withstanding the
power frequency and impulse test voltage prescribed below:Nominal system Highest voltage system voltage 11 KV (rms) 12 KV (rms) Test Power frequency voltage 75 KV (peak) 28 KV (rms) Impulse Voltage
10.
OVERLOAD CAPACITY: The safe overload capacity of the transformer and duration of over load for satisfactory operation at site under maximum temperature conditions shall be clearly stated in the tender. The temperature limits under the specified over load capacity should also be stated.
11.
PARALLEL OPERATION: The transformers shall be capable of operating satisfactorily in parallel with one another under all conditions of load whether balanced or not, and under varying power factor.
12.
TANK The main tank of the transformers shall be made of good quality steel having a minimum thickness of sides of the tanks 3.15 mm and a minimum thickness of 5.0 mm for top and bottom plates. The tank shall be capable of withstanding a pressure up to 0.8 kg/cm2 and (-) 0.7 kg/cm2 for 30 minutes and 10 minutes respectfully as prescribed in clause 27.2 (i) of this specification. The word UHBVN/DHBVN PROPERTY shall be engraved on the top cover plate and side of the tank body. The following information (in addition to be provided in rating and diagram plate) shall be punched on two opposite sides of the body of T/F. a) b) c) d) Property of UHBVN/DHBVN P.O No & date. Date & year of manufacture. Make
Page 4 of 27
Satisfactory lifting lugs shall be properly secured to the top of the tank or to the tank sides. The design of the tank and lugs (size 8 mm MS Plate) shall be as such as to permit the complete transformers filled with oil being lifted by means of the lugs, without risk of any damage. 13. PRESSURE RELEASE DEVICE The transformer shall be equipped with a self-sealing pressure release device, designed to operate at a maximum pressure of 8 psi (0.564 kg/ cm2). The PRD shall be provided in the low-voltage terminating portion of the tank above top oil level. Inlet port shall be inch or longer NPT. Releasing pressure shall be 0.3 kg/cm2. 14. TERMINALS AND BUSHINGS: a) The high and low voltage terminals shall be outdoor porcelain bushings type for bare Aluminium connection. The bushing rod shall be of brass and shall conform to ISS-3447 (Part-III). LT rods shall be manufactured through drawing and HT rods shall be duly forged and in case casting shall be accepted. Each, terminal including the neutral shall be distinctly marked and colored for phase voltage on both the primary and secondary sides in accordance with the diagram of connections supplied with the transformers. The system of marking shall be in accordance with the
requirements of IS: 1180 amended to date. b) The HV bushings shall be as per IS: 2099 with latest version and IS: 3347. The LV bushings shall be as per IS: 7721 (with latest amendment(s) if any). c) All porcelain used in the bushing shall be homogeneous free from other flaws affecting its mechanical strength or dielectric quality. These should be well vitrified, tough and impervious to moisture. A minimum phase to phase external clearance of 75 mm for LV bushings and 255 mm for HV bushings shall be obtained with bushings mounted on the transformers. d) The external terminal clearances shall be maintained after fixing Bimetallic clamps/thimbles. Where HT/LT bushings are fitted on the side of the tank, the same shall be fitted on a conical/rectangular pocket in the tank body and not on the pipe/flange.
Page 5 of 27
15.
SEALING GASKETS: All sealing washers/gasket shall be made of oil and heat resistant Nitrile/neoprene rubber/synthetic rubber bonded cork type RC-70C Gaskets. Gaskets made of natural rubbers or cork sheet are not
permissible. 16. COOLING: All the transformers shall be capable of giving a continuous output without exceeding the specified temperature rise. 17. TRANSFORMER OIL: The transformer oil used shall comply with the requirements of the specification as per Annexure-B enclosed in addition to the provision in the IS: 335-1993 (Latest). Oil sample will also be taken out from fresh stock of T/F oil to be tested as per latest IS: 335-1993. 18. INSULATION MATERIAL:-
18..1. Material:-Electrical grade insulation Kraft papers and press Boards of standard should be used. For the use standard material the names of following firms have been approved. Sr. No. 1 Name of material Press board insulating Name of the firms a. Senapathy whitely b. Raman Board 2 Craft paper a. Ballarpur b. Padamjee c. Triveni 3 4 Press pahn paper Gaskets Senapathy whitely a. New cork b. Talbros
18.2
All spacers, axial wedges / runners used in windings shall be made of precompressed pressboard-solid, conforming to type B 3.1 of IEC 641-3-2. In case of cross-over coil winding of HV all spacers shall be properly sheared and dovetail punched to ensure proper locking. All axial wedges/ runners shall be properly milled to dovetail shape so that they pass through the designed spacers freely. Insulation shearing, cutting, milling and
punching operations shall be carried out in such out in such a way, that there should not be any burr and dimensional variations. 19. RATING AND TERMINAL MARKING PLATES: There shall be rating plates on the transformer containing the information specified in clause 15.2 of IS: 2026-1977 (part-i). The 50% & 100% load losses of the
transformer should also be mentioned on the rating plate. The following additional information must also be punched on the plate and imposed two opposite sides of the body of T/F. i) ii) Purchase Order No & Date. Date of inspection.
Page 6 of 27
iii) iv) 20.
Property of UHBVN/DHBVN Make.
(a)
CORE: Core of the transformers could be of CRGO material or Amorphous material. CRGO Material: The Core lamination shall be held rigidly by a steel frame work, which shall clamp them together to prevent any vibration. The top and bottom yoke clamping channels shall be tied together with at least 4 Nos tie rods of minimum 12 mm dia, duly insulated. Only medium weight channels as per ISS: 808 are to be used. Each core lamination of each yoke as well as each limb shall be one piece and no joint shall be allowed in the same. The core shall be provided with lifting lugs suitable for lifting the complete core and coil assembly of the transformer without transmitting the stresses to the laminations. The transformer shall be suitable for over fluxing due to combine effect of system voltage and frequency up to 12.5% without injurious heating at full load condition and shall not get saturated. The laminations shall be made of best quality non-ageing silicon steel cut from annealed steel plates. These laminations shall be as thin as possible consistent with mechanically strong constructions. Each lamination shall be coated with a hot oil proof insulating material on both sides. The
laminations should be free from rust colour spots. The core shall be built up with lamination of new prime, non ageing low loss, high permeability CRGO silicon steel. The core material should be HI-B not below. M-IH, Grade or better or equivalent. The core coils shall have the original
sealing of CGRO manufacturer(s) intact and supplier shall produce the relevant documents indicating the particulars authenticating that the core coils of Prime CRGO. M-III or better steel should be actually used at the time of stage inspection. Lamination core should be cut at 45o to avoid excessive losses at the joints. The core material shall be processed by slitting only. Only one grade and one thickness of core shall be accepted and no mixing of different grade/thickness of lamination shall be allowed. UHBVN/DHBVN reserves the right to ask for the original documents relating to purchase of core to check the genuineness of the core used for manufacture of UHBVN/DHBVN transformers for which instructions/guidelines shall be issued after issuance of POs if required. For the bolts used for clamping the core shall be so insulated that there is no possibility of contact between edges and the core bolts. The bolts shall be tested at 2500 volts to earth. To prevent any possibility of movement of core assembly in transit, the following provisions shall be made: i) 4 no. core guides shall be provided at the bottom of the tank.
Page 7 of 27
Alternatively, bottom foot channels of core and core channels shall be extended to serve this purpose. ii) The core shall be securely fastened to sides of tank with minimum 4 fixing bolts. (b) i) AMORPHOUS METAL: The core shall be high quality Amorphous ribbons having very low loss formed into wound cores of rectangular shape, bolted together to the frames firmly to prevent vibration or noise. The complete design of core must ensure permanency of the core loss with continuous working of the transformers. The value of the flux density allowed in the design shall be clearly stated in the offer. Curve showing the properties of the metal shall be attached with the offer. ii) Core clamping for amorphous metal transformers: 1. Core clamping shall be with top and bottom U-shaped core clamps made of sheet steel clamped, HT steel rods for efficient clamping. 2. MS Core clamps shall be painted with varnish or oil resistant paint. 3. MS rods shall be used as tie rods. 4. Suitable provision shall be made in the bottom core clamp/bottom plate of the transformer to arrest movement of the active part. iii) The transformers core shall be suitable for over fluxing (due to combined effect of voltage and frequency) upto 12.5% without injurious heating at full load conditions and shall not get saturated. The Bidder shall furnish necessary design data in support of this situation. iv) No load current shall not exceed 2% of full load current and will be measured by energizing the transformer at 433 volts, 50c/s on the secondary. Increase of 433 V voltage by 12.5% shall not increase the no Load Current disproportionately high. Test for magnetic balance by
connecting the LV phase by phase to the rated phase voltage and measurement of an, bn, cn, Voltage will be carried out. NOTE: I) Equal weightage shall be given to the transformers with Amorphous Metal Core and CRGO core. II) In case of variable prices, the price variation in respect of amorphous metal core shall be to any extent on negative side as per IEEMA indices applicable for CRGO core but there will be no price variation allowed positive side. for amorphous core on the
21.
WINDING AND INSULATIONS: The conductor used for winding shall consist of high conductivity, non-oxidizing copper /Alluminium. The primary windings shall be connected in delta and the secondary winding in star (Vector symbol DynII), so as to produce a positive displacement of 30o from the primary to the secondary vector of the same phase. The neutral of secondary winding
Page 8 of 27
shall be brought out to a separate insulated terminal. HV windings shall consist of maximum 2 coils per limb. All delta leads from HT coils as well as HT line leads should be taken out through SE Copper wires of sufficient X- sectional area to impart desired Mechanical strength. The current density in these leads should however not exceed 0.8A / mm2. All the above leads should be taken out through bakelite tubes HV winding should be super enameled (SE) of medium coverage as per IS: 4800 (part-II). LV winding may be of DPC or SE of medium coverage as per IS: 4800 (Part II). The coils shall be circular in shape and their construction shall be such that there is no possibility of distortion under any likely conditions of service. The high and low voltage windings shall be concentric, with the low tension windings nearest the transformers core and high tension windings outside. The two windings shall be so placed that they remain electro magnetically balanced under all conditions of service. The axial length of the coils must be kept down to a minimum so as to strengthen the winding against axial stresses under short circuit conditions. In oil immersed winding, an adequate provision shall be made for the circulation of oil, so that a very low temperature gradient between copper and oil is assured and any danger of excessive local heating is eliminated. The coils shall be wound to form a continuous coil or a number of discs and the individual discs separated to provide a distinct oil space between them. The inner coil shall be adequately insulated from the core. The insulating cylinders shall have high electrical and mechanical strength. No strip conductor would on edge shall have a width exceeding six times its thickness. All HV and LV coils ends shall be provided with crimped lugs. Starting and finishing leads to HT coils should be feruled, crimped and covered with insulating sleeve. These leads should also be clamped
tightly with the body of winding with the help of cotton tape during manufacture of these coils. The star point on the LV side shall preferably be properly sleeved and crimped. However, the manufacturer may make the star point by fixing a neutral bus bar of Copper with the help of bolts, nuts and spring washers etc. All fixations/joints should be such that there is no scope for loose contact, local heating, breakage of conductor, loosening due to vibrations. All the delta leads should be clamped tightly on to the special frame/bracket making pie connections. This
frame/bracket could be made of bakelite flats having min size of 25X6 mm. The leads leading to the HV bushings terminals then be clamped to the horizontal support base of pie frame so that vibration during short circuit are not passed on to windings.
Page 9 of 27
Copper strip/foil used for earthing the core should be tinned. The tinned foil should be properly connected to the channel with bolts and nuts after removing the paint from the channel underneath the copper foil. Current density both in LT and HT windings shall not exceed 2.8 Amp./ mm2. ACCORDINGLY THE CONDUCTOR SIZE FOR HT & LT SHALL BE CHOSEN FROM THE RELEVANT IS
SPECIFICATION AND SHALL BE OF STANDARD SIZE AS PER IS ONLY. All transformers shall be designed and constructed to withstand without damage, thermal & dynamic effects of an external short circuit. The
manufacturer/supplier shall furnish the relevant design data & calculations in support of having fulfilled this requirement as stipulated under clause-9 of IS: 2026 (Part-I). Two layers of electrical grade insulation Kraft paper of 2 mil (min) thickness shall be used as inter layer insulation of HV & LV winding. Axial ducts for free flow of oil shall be provided with the help of axial wedges numbering at least 6 Nos. Dovetailed spacers shall be used between coils of HV winding. Angle shaped or plain end rings made from pre-
compressed press board barriers shall be provided in between HV windings. Guides on all the four sides shall be provided to prevent shifting of the active part and thereby accidentally touching the tank. Electrical grade insulating Kraft paper used shall be of Triveni, Ballarpur make, press board made from natural wood pulp, Electrical grade type D conforming to IS; 1576-1992 shall be used and will be Senapathy Whitely or better quality make and Gaskets of Talbros, Nucork make. 22. Following minimum internal clearances shall be maintained for the CRGO core or in accordance with relevant IS: a) b) Between HV & LV Between HV winding and tank wall i) Non-bushing side ii) Bushing side iii)Between sections of HV winding iv) Between HV winding v) Between HV winding and yoke at ends vi) Between LV winding and yoke at ends vii) Between yoke & inside of tank top cover vii) Between yoke & tank bottom viii) Between LV winding and core c) Clearance (Electricals) Medium Air Air Clearance phase to Clearance phase to phase earth 75mm 55mm 255mm 205mm 10 mm 30mm 40mm 11mm
10mm with bakelite press board barriers.
25mm with rings. 10mm 100mm 40mm 3mm
end
Voltage 433 11000
Page 10 of 27
23.
LOCK NUTS: Bolts & nuts shall be provided with lock washer or lock nuts. Split pins shall be used for the purpose of lock nuts.
24.
SILICAGEL BREATHER: The silicagel breather device shall be provided and shall have capacity to contain 250 gm Silicagel.
25.
SURFACE PREPARATION & PAINTING.
25.9.1. General 25.9.1.1. All paints shall be applied in accordance with the paint manufacturers recommendations. Particular attention shall be paid to the following: 25.9.1.1.1. Proper storage to avoid exposure as well as extremes of temperature. 25.9.1.1.2. Surface preparation prior to painting. 25.9.1.1.3. Mixing and thinning. 25.9.1.1.4. Application of paints and the recommended limit of time intervals between coats. 25.9.1.1.5. Shelf life for storage. 25.9.1.2. All paints when applied in a normal full coat, shall be free from runs, sags, wrinkles, patchiness, brush marks or other defects. 25.9.1.3. All primers shall be well marked into the surface, particularly in areas where painting is evident, and the first priming coat shall be applied as soon as possible after cleaning. The paint shall be applied by airless spray according to manufactures recommendations. However, whenever airless spray is not possible, conventional spray be used with prior approval of purchaser. 25.9.1.4. The supplier shall prior to painting nameplates, lettering gauges sight glasses, light fittings and similar such items. 25.9.2. Cleaning and Surface preparation 25.9.2.1. After all machining, forming and welding shall been completed, all steel work surfaces shall be
thoroughly cleaned of rust, scale, welding slag or spatter and other contamination prior to any painting. 25.9.2.2. Steel surfaces shall prepared by Short blast cleaning or Chemical by Seven Tank process including Phosphating to the appropriate quality. 25.9.2.3. The pressure and volume of the compressed air supply for blast cleaning shall meet the work requirement and shall be sufficiently free from all water contamination to ensure that the cleaning process is not impaired. 25.9.2.4. Chipping, scraping and steel wire brushing using manual or power driven tools cannot remove firmly adherent mill-scale shall only be used where blast cleaning is impractical. Manufacture to explain such areas in his technical offer clearly.
C:\Documents and Settings\Administrator\Desktop\28-01-10\PDC\CSC -IV.doc Page 11 of 27
25.9.3.
Protective Coating: 25.9.3.1. As soon as all items have been cleaned and within four hours of the subsequent drying. They shall be given suitable anti-corrosion protection.
25.9.4.
Paint Material. Followings are the types of paint that may be suitably used for the items to be painted at shop and supply of matching paint to site:
25.9.4.1. Heat resistant paint (Hot oil Proof) for inside surface. 25.9.4.2. For external surfaces one coat of Thermo Setting powder paint or 1 coats of Zinc chromate primer followed by 2 coats of Synthetic Enamel /Polyurethane base paint. These paints can be either air-drying or stoving. 25.9.4.3. The colour of the finishing coats shall be dark admiral gray conforming to No. 632 of ISS-5 of 1961 25.9.5. Painting procedure 25.9.5.1. All painting shall be carried out in conformity with both Specification and with the paint manufactures
recommendation. All paints in anyone particular system, whether shop or site applied, shall originate from one paint manufacture. 25.9.5.2. Particular attention shall be paid to the
manufacturers instructions on storage, mixing, thinning and pot life. The paint shall only be applied in the manner detailed by the manufactures e.g. brush, roller, conventional or airless spray and shall be applied under the manufactures
recommended condition Minimum and maximum time intervals between coast shall be closely followed. 25.9.5.3. All prepared steel surfaces should be primed before visible re-rusting occurs or within 4 hours whichever is sooner. 25.9.5.4. Chemical treated steel surface shall be primed as soon as the surface is dry and while the surface is still warm. 25.9.5.5. Where the quality of film is impaired by excess film thickness (wrinkling, mud cracking or general
softness) the Supplier shall remove the unsatisfactory paint coating and apply another. As a general rule, dry film thickness should not exceed the specified minimum dry film thickness by more than 25%. In all instances where two or more coats of the same paint are specified, such coating may or may not be of contrasting colours.
Page 12 of 27
25.9.5.6. Paint applied to items that are not be painted shall be removed at Suppliers expense, leaving the surface clean, unstained and undamaged. 25.9.6. Damaged Paintwork 25.9.6.1. Any damage occurring to any part of a painting scheme shall be made good to the same standard of corrosion protection and appearance as that originally employed. 25.9.7. Any damage paint work shall be made good as follows: 25.9.7.1. The damaged area, together with an area extending 25 mm around its boundary, shall be cleaned down to bare metal. 25.9.7.2. A priming coat shall be immediately applied, followed by a full paint finish equal to that originally applied and extending 50 mm around the perimeter of the original damage. 25.9.7.3. The repainted surface shall present a smooth surface. This shall be obtained by carefully
chamfering the paint edges before and after priming. 25.9.8. Dry Film Thickness 25.9.8.1. To the maximum extent practicable the coats shall be applied as a continuous film of uniform thickness and free of pores. Overspray, skips, runs, sags and drips should be avoided. The different coats may or may not be of the same colour. 25.9.8.2. Each coat of paint shall be allowed to harden before the next is applied as per manufacturers
recommendation. 25.9.8.3. Particular attention must be paid to full film thickness at edges. 25.9.8.4. The requirements for the dry film thickness (DFT) of paint and the materials to be used shall be as given below.
Sr. No. 1 2
Paint Type
Area to painted Inside outside Outside Outside
be No. of coats
Thermo setting paint Inside Liquid paint a) Zinc chromate (primer) b) Synthetic Enamel/ Poly Urethene (Finish coat) c) Hot oil paint/ Varnish
01 01 01 02
Total Dry film thickness (mm) 20 microns 60 microns 30 microns 25 microns each 35/ 10 microns
inside
01
Page 13 of 27
26.
RAW MATERIAL The raw material used in the manufacture of transformers shall be brand new and of the best quality available in the market.
27.
TEST AND INSPECTION All tests shall be carried out in accordance with clause 16 of IS : 2026 (Part-I) amended to date or any other applicable standard for transformers.
27.1. ROUTINE TESTS All transformers shall be subject to the following routine tests at the manufacturers works in accordance with IS: 2026 and 1180 (Part-I):a) b) c) d) e) f) g) h) i) j) Measurement of winding resistance. Ratio, polarity and phase relationship. Measurement of impedance voltage/short circuit impedance. Maximum Load losses at 50% load & 100% load at 75o C No load current. Insulation resistance Induced over voltage withstand. Separate source voltage withstand. Peel off test for paint. Oil leakage test with pressure of 0.8 KG/CM2 above atmospheric pressure for 10 minutes. The losses shall be measured by three-watt meter method & three volt meter/Ammeters shall be used to measure voltage/Current. 27.2 TYPE TESTS The supplier shall supply copies of following type test certificates carried out at a Govt., recognized Testing House/Laboratory 27.2.1 (i) AIR PRESSURE TEST: The tank shall be fixed with a dummy cover with all fittings including bushing in position and shall be subjected to the following pressure created inside the tank. a) b) 0.8 kg/cm2 above the atmospheric pressure for 30 minutes. A vacuum corresponding to (-) 0.7 kg/cm2 for 10 minutes. Permanent deflection of flat plate, after pressure has been released, shall not exceed the value given below:Length of plate Upto 750 mm 751 to 1250mm Deflection 5mm 6mm
The oil leakage test shall be carried out on 10% of transformers in each lot. The firm shall ensure to get this test conducted strictly as per relevant ISS. (ii) TEMPERATURE RISE TEST: shall be carried out on one unit from each lot offered for inspection to ensure that it meets with the requirement specified under Clause-5 of this specification. The tenderers shall submit calculations for temperature rise along with the tender.
Page 14 of 27
(iv) MAGNETIC BALANCE TEST: shall be conducted by connecting the B phase (central) of LV to rated voltage and measurement of LV side (Un, Vn, Wn) voltages, Value shall be within a tolerance of (+/-) 2% (middle full & sides half). Magnetic Balance test (Type Test) should be conducted on one sample from each lot for all ratings of transformers. 27.2.2 Impulse Voltage Test; The test on all the three limbs of HT side as per clause-12 of ISS: 20261977 shall be got conducted in the presence of Nigams representative from some recognized/Govt. Test House. The dispatches shall only be allowed after successful conductance of this test, on one transformer. 27.2.3 SHORT CIRCUIT TEST: The test shall be carried out in accordance with the details specified in IS: 2026-1977 from some recognized/ Govt. Test House. Charges for routine tests and type tests including impulse voltage withstand test and short circuit test will be included in the quoted prices. The purchaser also reserves the right to get any number of additional Units type tested. However, the cost shall be paid and as such the test charges for these tests should be quoted separately. No supplies will be allowed to be dispatched without inspection by the purchaser/its representative and without carrying out the impulse and short circuit tests satisfactorily. 27.2.4 . Note: - If sample fail in any of the type tests viz. short circuit tests or impulse tests, the whole lot shall be considered rejected. The firm shall offer fresh lot for inspection and get the type tests carried out again at its own cost.
27.3
TRANSFORMER OIL: The transformer oil shall be purchased by the contractor directly from the transformer oil manufacturers whose products have been given ISI certificate mark. The firm shall ensure to get the tests conducted strictly as per relevant ISS. i) Net quantity of oil (up to 30o C mark) excluding the oil soaked in core-coil assembly shall be given in G.T.P. ii) Approximate quantity of oil soaked in core-coil assembly may however be given separately.
Page 15 of 27
27.4
PHYSICAL CHECK OF VARIOUS DIMENSIONS (INTERNAL AND
EXTERNAL) WEIGHT CLEARANCE ETC. One number transformer from each lot shall be opened for checking of core weight, size and weight of HT & LT conductor, quantity of oil and various clearance etc.
27.5
INSPECTION: STAGE INSPECTION: Stage inspection may be carried out by the inspecting officers of the Nigam or its nominated agency during the course of manufacture. The core shall be processed by slitting only which shall be carried out at the suppliers works or can be got carried out on job order basis from other source. The core coils offered for stage inspection shall have the original sealing of CRGO manufacturer intact. Loose coils without the original seal of manufacturer shall not be accepted. FINAL INSPECTION: The inspection shall be carried out by Nigams representative or any outside inspection agency to be nominated by the Nigam. All tests and inspection shall be made at the place of manufacturer unless otherwise specifically agreed upon by the manufacturer and purchaser at the time of purchase. The manufacturer shall provide all reasonable facilities to the inspectors representing the purchaser, without charges to satisfy that the material is being manufactured in accordance with the specification. The Nigam shall inspect, examine and test equipment/material through its official (s) and/or through an outside agency nominated by UHBVN/DHBVN at the Manufacturers/suppliers works during or after the manufacture of goods prior to dispatch on receipt of a clear notice of minimum three weeks in advance to be reckoned from the date of receipt of call by purchaser. The supplier/contractor shall provide all facilities as may be required to carry out the tests in accordance with approved standards free of cost. The sampling of T/Fs to be offered for inspection shall be in accordance with the latest provisions of the relevant IS of latest edition for carrying out the various tests at firms works. It shall be the responsibility of the manufacturer to provide during inspection, all testing instruments duly calibrated from a Govt. Test House/Govt. approved test house within last 12 months. Before using an instrument, the Nigams representative shall ensure that the seal of the test house is intact and at none of the calibrated points the instrument has error more than the prescribed limits of error. Manufacturers shall maintain a complete record of the Routine tests carried out on the transformer and shall produce the same whenever desired by the purchaser.
27.5.1 The purchaser has the right to have the tests carried out at his own cost by an independent agency whenever there is any dispute regarding the
Page 16 of 27
quality of supply. If the transformer, fails in the test, the cost shall be borne by the supplier and if passes, the cost shall be borne by the Nigam. 27.5.2 UHBVN/DHBVN shall get all the transformers of the complete lot tested out at Nigams Stores after receiving the same in the store. In case any T/f fails in tests, the same shall be replaced by the supplier at his own cost within shortest possible time not exceeding fifteen days. 27.5.3 Fake Inspection calls In case the supplier makes a fake inspection call i.e., the material is not found ready by the Inspecting Officer deputed by the Nigam for inspection, the supplier shall be liable to pay a fixed penalty of Rs. 20, 000/- for each such fake call made by him. 28 PACKING: The transformers shall be delivered suitably packed. Although the method of packing is left to the discretion of manufacturer but it should be robust enough for rough handling that is occasioned during transportation by Nigam. All accessories shall be dispatched in boxes or cases. They shall be of tin, securely bound with wire and shall have all descriptive marking stamped thereon. The transportation arrangements of the transformers from the place of manufacture to the destination are also required to be such that the transformers are properly transported to the UHBVN/DHBVN stores. It will be preferable to depute one suitable technical hand to get the transformers checked in Stores before the same are taken on books and attend to those transformers which are found leaking which have developed some other defect during transportation. 29 CONTRACT DRAWINGS: Complete set of transformer drawing should be submitted alongwith the tender. Four blue prints of the general outline and assembly drawing for the transformer shall be submitted to this office within two weeks of placement of order. The drawing should give dimensions,
weight, accessories, plan, front and side elevation. The dimensions, weights mentioned in the above drawing should be same as guaranteed in the tender/ offer. No negative tolerance will be allowed on dimensions/weight. 30. DEVIATIONS: - No deviation in technical particulars as per specifications shall be accepted and the offers of such bidders who do not met with UHBVN/DHBVN specifications are liable to be ignored. 31. GUARNTEED TECHNICAL PASRTICULARS The guaranteed technical particulars of the transformer shall be given by the tender (Annexure-A) along with the tender. Tenders without GTPS shall be out rightly rejected
Page 17 of 27
33.
WARRANTY: The supplier/ Contractor shall be responsible to replace free of cost with no transportation and insurance expenses to the purchaser up to the destination of material equipment, the whole or any part of material which under normal and proper use and maintenance, proves defective in material or workmanship within 78 months from the date of receipt in Nigams Stores or 72 months from the date of installation, whichever is earlier. Such replacement shall be effected by the Supplier/Contractor, within a reasonable time not exceeding 1 month of the intimation to defects. However, in case the supplier fails to effect replacement within stipulated period they shall be liable to pay a penalty @18% of the cost of the DTs for the remaining period of warranty of the same.
34.
FASETENERS All bolts, studs, screw threads pipe threads, bolt heads and nuts shall comply with the appropriate Indian Standards for metric threads or the technical equivalent. Bolts or studs shall not be less than 6 mm in diameter except when used for small wiring terminals. 2 Nos. anti theft fasteners of steel on two
diagonally opposite corners of the tank shall be provided. All nuts and pins shall be adequately locked. Wherever possible, bolts shall be fitted in such a manner that in the event of failure of locking resulting in the nuts working loose and falling off, the bolt will remain in position. All ferrous bolts, nuts and washers placed in outdoor positions shall be treated to prevent corrosion, by hot dip galvanizing, except high tensile steel bolts and spring washers which shall be electro galvanized/plated. Appropriate precautions shall be taken to prevent electrolytic action between dissimilar metals. Each bolt or stud shall project at least one thread but not more than three threads through the nut except when otherwise approved for terminal board studs or relay stems. If bolts nuts are placed so that they are
inaccessible by means of ordinary spanners, special spanners shall be provided. The length of the screwed portion of the bolts shall be such that no screw thread may form part of a shear plane between members. Taper washers shall be provided where necessary. Protective washers of suitable material shall be provided front and back or the securing screws. 35. Completely Self Protected (CSP) Features additional The transformers shall have CSP (completely self protected) features. The transformer along with all fittings such as metering cubicle should be suitable for installation and operate as per H-pole drawing (enclosed as Annexure-A)
Page 18 of 27
The transformers shall have the following CSP features: i) Internal HV Fuse on the HT side of transformer: Specification for the HV fuse: Expulsion/any other suitable type of fuse shall be placed in series with the primary winding. The fuse shall be mounted normally inside of the primary bushing for the three phases and connected to the high voltage winding through a terminal block. This has to protect that part of the electrical distribution system which is ahead of the distribution transformers from faults which occur inside the distribution transformers i.e. either on the windings or some other part of the transformers. It shall be ensured that the fuse does not blow for faults on the secondary side (LT side) of the transformer i.e. the blowing characteristics of the fuse and LT breaker shall be so coordinated such that the fuse shall not blow for any faults on the secondary side of the transformer beyond LT breakers and those faults shall be cleared by the LT breaker only. (ii) Internally mounted oil immersed LT breaker on the LV side of the transformer. 3 Pole LT Circuit breaker: All LT faults after the breaker shall be clear by this breaker. As such it shall be designed for perfect coordination with HT fuse link. The Bidder shall furnish the time/current characteristics of LT circuit breaker and 11 KV fuses for various current multiples. The two characteristics shall be drawn on the same sheet to indicate coordination between the circuit breaker and fuse. The Bidder shall carry out coordination test as indicated above and this forms one of the tests as for acceptance test. The breaker shall be coordinated thermally with the transformer design to follow closely the variations of coil temperature due to fluctuating load and ambient temperatures. The breaker trip setting shall be kept considering continuous loading of 130% for 6-hours duration at an average ambient temperature of 40 o C. This is to be accomplished by connecting the breaker in series between the secondary windings and the secondary bushings. The breaker shall be located in the same oil as the core and coil assembly so that the bimetal are sensitive to the temperature of oil as well as the load current. The Circuit breaker shall also be closed and opened manually standing on ground. The current carrying parts of breakers shall be copper plus a set of copper tungsten current interrupting contacts. The Cross section of the current carrying parts of the breakers shall withstand the full load current at a current density not more than 2.5 A/Sq.mm (for additional mechanical strength the area should be more). iii) The supplier can also offer the transformer with MCCB (Specifications attached) mounted on it instead of in-built breaker.
Page 19 of 27
36.
Earthing Connections Two earthing connections shall be provided with connection facilities withs 25 x 6 mm GI strip. The bolts shall be located on the lower side of the transformer and shall be of M12 size. The earthing should be suitable to carry the full fault current. Further, there should be separate earthing for the STAR point on LT side as well as on the body of the transformer.
37.
FITTINGS:
Each transformer shall be provided with all the required
fittings as per Annexure-D. 38. PENALTY FOR NON PERFORMANCE:
38.1. Purchaser reserves the right to reject any transformer during the test at suppliers works, if it is found that actual measured losses are more than the values quoted by the bidder 38.2. Purchaser reserves the right to reject any transformer during the test at suppliers works, if the temperature rise exceeds the guaranteed values. 38.3. Purchaser reserves the right to reject any transformer during the test at suppliers works, if the impedance values differ from the guaranteed values including tolerance. 38.4. Purchaser also reserves the right to retain the rejected transformer and take it into service until the Bidder replaces it with a new transformer at no extra cost. The delivery as per contract will be counted when the new transformer as per specification is provided by the manufacture. 39. PROTOTYPE TRANSFORMER The prototype transformer on which type test got conducted shall be supplied to UHBVN/ DHBVN duly sealed after completion of type testing in the beginning itself before commencement of supply. The bidder shall furnish an affidavit that all his balance transformers shall meet with prototype in all respects ( internal & external ). The Nigam can randomly select any transformer & verify the internal / external details with the prototype sample at any time during warranty period. Type test certificates for the tests carried out on prototype of same specifications shall be submitted along with the bid. The purchase may select any transformer from the offered lot for inspection during subsequent lots for carrying out temperature rise test from any Govt. approved lab. Further the purchaser may select the transformer for type tests randomly. CHALLENGE CLAUSE: "The material offered/received after the inspection by the authorized inspecting officer may again be subjected to the test for losses or any other parameter from any Testing House/in-house technique of the Nigam & the results if found deviating un-acceptable or not complying to approved GTP's the bidder shall arrange to supply the replacement within thirty (30) days of such detection at his cost including to & fro transportation." In addition to this penalty @10% of cost of the inspected lot of material shall be imposed.
40.
Director/Technical-I UHBVN, Panchkula
Director/Project, DHBVN, Hisar
CE/PD&C UHBVN, Panchkula
CE/P&D DHBVN, Hisar
FA&CAO/MM UHBVN, Panchkula
FA&CAO/MM DHBVN, Hisar
SE/P&D UHBVN, Panchkula
SE/P&D DHBVN, Hisar
Page 20 of 27
ANNEXURE A GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR 6.3, 10, 16, 20 KVA COPPER WOUND & 40 KVA Aluminium wound CSP TYPE DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS. 1. 2. Normal continuous output under site conditions in KVA. Continuous output as a percentage of Indian Standard Specifications rating. Over-load capacity for 2 hours under site conditions after running continuously at full load. With annual weighted ambient temp of 35oC, maximum temperature rise of: Oil by thermometer in _________ oC. Winding by resistance in __________oC. Maximum hot spot in temperature in ___oC (by calculation). CORE PARTICULARS Thickness of laminations: Name of Supplier: Curve supplied by the manufactures of the core plate, material (Loss/Kg.) Core dia in mm: Core weight in Kg. Core frame size. No. of steps Type and Grade of Core Material Maximum flux density at: i) Normal voltage (in tesla). ii) 12.5% over voltage (in tesla) WINDING PARTICULARS Copper /Al., weight of HT coils (in Kg.) Bare. Covered. Copper/Al., weight of LT coils ( in Kg.) Bare. Covered. Size of Conductor (in sq.mm) as per ISS HT LT Total number of turns per phase: HT LT Current density in Amp./Sq.mm (Max.) HT LT
3.
4. a) b) c) 5. a) b) c) d) e) f) g) h) i)
6. a) i) ii) b i) ii) c) i) II) d) i) II) e) i) II) 7. 8.
i) No load current at 100% voltage and 50 Hz in Amps. ii) No load current 112.5% of normal voltage & frequency. Maximum losses guaranteed. i) Maximum loses at 50% load in watt at 75oC ii) Maximum losses at 100% load in watt at 75oC. Winding Resistance at 75oC (ohm/phase). a) b) HV: LV:
9.
Page 21 of 27
10.
Efficiency at 75oC at unity P.F. and 0.8 P.F. At unity P.F. i) ii) iii) iv) Full load load load load At 0.8 P.F.
11. 12. 13. 14.
Load at which maximum efficiency occurs: Reactance at full load: Impedance at full load at 75oC Regulations: a) b) Full load at unit power factor. Full load 0.8 power factor lagging.
15.
Minimum inter clearance a) b) i) ii) c) d) e) f) g) h) i) Between HV & LV Between HV winding & tank wall. Non-bushing side Bushing side. Between section of HV winding Between HV winding Between HV winding & yoke ( at ends) Between LV winding & yoke (at ends) Between yoke and inside of tank top cover Between yoke & tank bottom Between LV winding & Core
16.
Internal Insulation a) Turn insulation High voltage. b) Turn insulation low voltage. c) Insulation core to low voltage: d) Interlayer insulation of HV & LV Coils: e) type of insulation used for HV & LV windings. f) (Angle shaped/plain end rings made from pre-compressed board shall be used between the end coils and the core) Dry flash over voltage at 50 cycles of HT & LT bushings in KV. Wet flashover voltage at 50 cycles of HT Bushings. Impulse flash over voltage with 1.2/50 positive wave of HT bushings in KV. a) One minute dry withstand power frequency voltage in KV. b) One minute withstand power frequency voltage. c) Puncture voltage of HT bushings at Power frequency in KV. Impulse withstand voltage of T/fs windings. a) with 1.2/50 positive wave KV: b) with 1.2/50 Negative wave KV: Spark over length of HT bushings (i.e. string length MM). HT pressure test (separate sources of HT windings 50 cycles for one minute. Quantity of oil in transformers. Weight of complete T/fs with oil: Tank thickness sides
17. 18. 19.
20
21. 22. 23. 24. 25.
Page 22 of 27
26. 27. 28.
Tank thickness of top and bottom: Weight of tanks fittings and accessories. Approx. dimensions (Lx B x H) in mm:
i) Overall ii) Inside of tank iii) Max. depth of HT coils (in cms) iv) Radial width of oil duct between LT & HT v) Standard reference of bushings vi) Type of transformer, shell or core vii) Standard reference of transformers viii) Vector group of connections ix) Current density of HT delta wire Note: Above approved GTPs shall be applicable up to Type Tests/First Lot. For subsequent supplies, all parameters as per First Lot shall be maintained. But in no case any parameter less than GTPs shall be accepted in First Lot. In case any type tests are waived off, then all technical parameters & dimensions shall be as per type tested Transformers and no negative variation shall be accepted. .
Page 23 of 27
ANNEXURE B GUARANTEED CHARACTERISTICS OF NEW TRANSFORMER OIL IN DRUMS/TANKERS AND IN TRANSFORMERS A. OIL IN DRUMS/TANKERS S.No. Characteristics
1. Appearance Density at 29.5oC (Max.) Kinematics viscosity at 27oC (Min.) Interfacial tension at 27oC (min.) Flash point (Min.) Pour point (Max.) Neutralization value a) Total acidity (Max.) b) In organic acidity Corrosive sulphur Electric strength (Break down voltage) Min. a) New untreated oil: If the above value is not obtained the oil shall be treated. b) After treatment.
Requirement
Oil shall be clear & transparent & free from suspended matter or sediments. 0.89 g/cm2 27CST 0.04 N/M 140oC -6oC 0.03 mg KOH/gm Nil Non-corrosive a) 30 KV (rms)
2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
8. 9.
b) 60 KV (rms)
10. 11. 12.
13.
Dielectric dissipation factor (Tan-delta) at 90oC Water content )Max.) Specific resistance (resistivity) a) At 90oC (Min.) b) At 27oC (Min.) Oxidation stability a)Neutralization value after oxidation (max.) b)Total sludge after oxidation (Max.)
0.002 (Max.) 50 ppm a) 35x1012 ohm-cm b) 900 x1012 ohm-cm 0.40 mg KOH/gm 0.10% by weight
14.
Ageing characteristics after accelerated ageing (open breaker method with copper catalyst) a) Specific resistance (Resistivity) i) At 27oC Min.) ii) At 90oC (Min.) b) Dielectric dissipation factor (Tan delta) at 90oC c) Total acidity (Max.) d) Total sludge value percent by weight
2.5 x 1012 ohm-cm 0.2 x 1012 ohm-cm 0.2 Max. 0.05 mg KOH/gm 0.05 Max. Absent
15.
Presence of oxidation inhibitor
B.
CHARACTERSTICS OF OIL IN THE TRANSFORMERS The important characteristics of the transformer oil after it is filled in the transformer (within 3 months of filling) shall be as follows:Sr No 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Permissible limit satisfactory for use Electric Strength (Breakdown 50 KV minimum voltage KV) Prior to energisation Water content (PPM) 25 PPM (max.) Specific Resistance (Resistivity) 2X1012 ohm-Cm (Min) ohm-cm at 90oC Dielectric dissipation factor tan 0.01 (Max) delta) at 90oC Neutralization value (Total 0.055 mg. KOH/gm (Max) acidity) Sediment and/or perceptible Absent sludge Flash point 140oC (Min) Interfacial tension at 27oC 0.030 N/m(Min). Characteristics
Page 24 of 27
ANNEXURE C SOURCE OF MATERIAL INSPECTION ETC. S. No 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. Item Source of Material Place of manufacture Place of testing and inspection
Copper Aluminium Core laminations Transformer Oil ERW Tubes. Steel Sheets Bushings a) Porcelain HV b) Epoxy LV Insulating Cylinders Insulating Paper. Corrugated Cylinders.
PLACE: DATE:
SIGNATURE OF TENDER NAME: DESIGNATION
Page 25 of 27
FITTINGS AND ACESSORIES TRANSFORMERS (i)
FOR
6.3,
10,
16,
ANNEXURE D 20 & 40 KVA
3 no. 11 KV porcelain bushings with brass studs fitted with single gap arcing horns along with bi metallic connectors/thimbles. (ii) 4 no. 0.433 KV porcelain bushings with brass studs (neutral to be made available on LV side) / thimbles. (iii) Drain cum sampling valve made of steel welded to tank as per drawing. (iv) One set of lifting lugs. (v) Rating & diagram plate of brass containing details as provided in IS:2026 and also Property of UHBVN/DHBVN shall be engraved in bold letters. vi) 4-Star rating label in accordance with colour design, logo etc., shall be provided on the transformer, as per the design / recommendations of Bureau of efficiency (BEE Note: Actual Losses at 50% & 100% Load should also be marked. vii) Two earthing terminals, one on either side of the base. (Details as per clause 36) viii) Air release valve arrangement. ix) ERW elliptical tube radiators of minimum thickness of 18 SWG. x) Oil level gauge indicating three positions of oil marked as under:Minimum (-) 0.5o C 30o C Maximum 95oc xi) Thermometer pocket to be suitably plugged with a threaded cap. xii) Base Channel. xiii) UHBVN/DHBVN logo shall be embossed on the side of the tank. .NOTES The bushing rods, bushings cap washers & bushings nuts etc, should be made of brass. ii) The threading on the nuts and bushings rods should be of one uniform specification. iii) All MS fittings & fasteners etc. may preferably be elctro-galvanzied. iv) The special tools for operating the valves shall be supplied with the transformer. To ensure that transformer is not opened by UHBVN/DHBVN field staff during warranty period, 6 No. suitable clamps shall be welded with top cover & tank body as well as drain wall flange after the transformer has been inspected and sealed by UHBVN/DHBVN inspecting officer. However, the arrangement shall be got approved by the supplier from UHBVN/DHBVN before commencement of supplies. TEST REQUIREMENTS FOR CONNECTORS i)
iv)
v)
1. 2. 3 4.
4.
Technical features HT LT Rated normal current rating 50 Amps. 200 Amps. Short time current rating (Amps for 3000 3000 1Sec) Tensile Strength 110 kg 110 kg Resistance test: The resistance of 1.25 meter of conductor including the connector shall not exceed the resistance of 1.25 meter of identical conductor without connector by more than 10%. Temperature rise test: The steady state temperature rise of connector above the reference ambient temperature of 40oC when carrying rated current, shall not exceed 45oC.
Page 26 of 27
VI) TYPE TESTS a) Tensile test b) Resistance test c) Temperature rise test d) Short time e) Dimensional check NOTE: 1. 2.
ACCEPTANCE TESTS a) Tensile test b) Resistance test c) Temperature rise test d) Dimensional check
ROUTINE TESTS a) Visual examination b) Dimensional check
3. 4.
Permissible tolerance shall be (+) 5% on the dimensions indicated. The minimum clearance between phase to phase shall be 25mm and phase to earth 20mm when the connectors are fixed in position on the terminal block of MOCB on the HT side. All the above tests shall be carried out in accordance with IS: 5561, latest version. Supplier of the transformer/connector shall provide necessary testing facilities at his works for the acceptance tests.
Page 27 of 27
Specification No. CSC-47/R-I /DH/UH/P&D/2010-2011
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR WHOLE CURRENT A.C. SINGLE PHASE TWO WIRE STATIC ENERGY METER OF
ACCURACY CLASS 1.0(10-60A) WITH COMMUNICATION FACILITY
General Manager/P&D, UHBVN, Panchkula
Issue of the Month:
Page 1 of 21
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR WHOLE CURRENT A.C.SINGLE PHASE TWO WIRE STATIC ENERGY METER OF ACCURACY CLASS 1.0 (10-60A) WITH COMMUNICATION FACILITY 1. SCOPE The specification covers the design, manufacturing, testing, supply of AC whole current 1 phase 2 wire static watt hour meter for measurement of active energy (kWh) with initial and sustained accuracy of class 1.0 for solidly earthed system having power factor in the range of zero to unity(Lagging/Leading). APPLICABLE STANDARDS Unless otherwise especially modified and to the extent so modified from these specification, the meter shall comply with the latest version of IS-13779, IEC-62053-21:2003 and CBIP Technical report 88/1998(latest amendments). The Manufacturer should have ISO 9000 or above certification. CLIMATIC CONDITIONS The Static Energy Meter shall be suitable for satisfactorily working under the following climatic conditions: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. Max. ambient air temperature Min. ambient air temperature Average Daily Max. ambient temperature Max. yearly weighted average ambient temperature Max. altitude above mean sea level Minimum Relative Humidity (%age) Max. Relative Humidity (%age) Avg. No. of Rainy days/year Avg. annual rainfall Maximum wind pressure 600C (-)50C 400C 320C 1000 m 26 95 120 900 mm 195 kg/m2
2.
3.
The meter shall be suitably designed and treated for normal life and satisfactory operation under the hot and hazardous tropical climate conditions and shall be dust and vermin proof. All the parts and surface, which are subject to corrosion, shall either be made of such material or shall be provided with such protective finish which provides suitable protection to them from any injurious effect of excessive humidity. 4. RATINGS: The rating of kWh meter should be as follows:Voltage Rating 240 V AC Current Rating (Basic Current) 10A Maximum Continuous Current 600% of Basic Current Starting current 0.2% of Basic Current at unity power factor Current Rating 10-60 A Class of Accuracy 1.0( No drift in tolerance of accuracy for 10 years) Frequency 50 Hz +/-5% Power loss As per ISS-13779 Resistance to surge voltage >6 kV peak As per ISS-13779
Page 2 of 21
Test voltage of 50Hz for 1 Min. Clock time accuracy Temperature rise Power consumption by meter 5. SUPPLY SYSTEM: Supply Voltage Voltage variation range Frequency Power Factor 6.
1.2/50Micro sec. IEC-62053-21:2003/CBIP-88 2 kV rms +/- 5 ppm at 25C As per ISS-13779 As per ISS-13779
240V AC -40% to +20% 50Hz +/- 5% +1 to -1
QUANTITY TO BE MEASURED / MONITORED The display order shall be:6.1 Default Display (Continuously on auto scroll). 6.1.1 Cumulative Active Energy kWh along with legend. 6.1.2 Current calendar month MD in kW with legend. These parameters should be displayed on the LCD continuously for a period of 15 seconds on Auto scroll. In case of power failure, the meter should display above parameters i.e. 6.1.1 & 6.1.2 with push button.
6.2 On Demand Display(with push button) 6.2.1 6.2.2 6.2.3 6.2.4 6.2.5 6.2.6 6.2.7 6.2.8 6.2.9 6.2.10 6.2.11 6.2.12 6.2.13 Internal diagnostics Cumulative kWh Date Real Time Voltage in V Current I Inst. Power kW Current calendar month MD in kW Last calendar month cumulative kWh Last calendar month MD in kW Last calendar month MD in kW occurrence Date Last calendar month MD in kW occurrence Time Meter Serial Number The meters display should return to default display mode (continues auto scroll) if push button is not operated for more than 10 seconds.
Auto Display The meter shall have LED/LCD backlit type electronic display with minimum six digits with additional provision for legend. The decimal digit shall be clearly distinguished from integral digit. The registered parameters i.e. the data stored in meter shall not be lost/ affected in the event of power failure. The display shall also not be effected by electric and magnetic disturbances. The meter shall have non volatile memory (NVM) which does not need battery back up. The NVM shall have minimum retention period 10 years. The minimum character dimensions shall be 8.5mmx5mm. Impulse Counter & Stepper Motor shall not be provided in the meter. Default MD integration period will be 30 min, however, it should have facility to change to 15 min at site with proper security feature.
Page 3 of 21
7.1 Meter shall store MD integration period along with date and time at the end of every integration period, new MD shall be previous MD and store, whichever is higher and the same shall be displayed. 7.2 MD shall be reset automatically at the defined date (or period) or through CMRI manually as when required. The re-setting shall be automatic at the end of every month i.e. 24 hours of last day of month. Six last M.D. values shall be stored in the memory also with auto reset count in numbers. In addition to this the cumulative kWh shall also be stored in the memory at same time at the end of every month. The meter should be capable of storing last 6 month data with an option to retrieve the same. 7.3 For single phase meters MD can be monthly Auto reset or transaction through CMRI. 7.4 BILLING DATA 7.4.1 Meter serial number, Date and time, kWh, MD in kW, History of kWh & MD for last 6 months along with TOD readings. 7.4.2 All the above parameters (namely kWh, MD in kW) are meter readings. 7.4.3 All these data shall be accessible for reading, recording and spot billing by downloading through optical port on MRI or Laptop computers. 8 9 STARTING CURRENT: The starting current of the meter shall be 0.2% lb at unity power factor. RUNNING AT NO LOAD The meter should comply with the requirements of IEC 1036/IS-13779 and CBIP Technical Report 88/1998 (Latest amendment) 10 ACCURACY & LIMITS OF ERRORS: The error of meters shall not exceed the permissible limits per standard IS 13779 (latest version) and CBIP Technical Report 88/1998 (with latest amendment) for a period of at least 10 years from the date of supply. In case any drift is notified which is beyond the permissible limits, the bidder shall re-calibrate the meter for correct accuracy and if recalibration is not possible, the meter shall be replaced by a new meter without any extra cost. TEST OUTPUT DEVICE: The meter shall have a test output device in the form of a pulse indicator accessible from the front and capable of being monitored by suitable testing equipment. TESTS 12.1 TYPE TESTS & TEST CERTIFICATES Meters shall be fully type tested as per IS: 13779 (latest version). The type test certificates shall be submitted along with the offer. Offer without Type Test Report shall be liable for rejection. The Type test certificates shall not be more than 3 years old. Test certificates of appropriate range shall be accepted. The type certificates shall be from institutions as per Appendix G of CBIP Technical report 88 (amended)
Page 4 of 21
11
12
12.2 ROUTINE TESTS The Acceptance and Routine tests shall be carried out as per latest version of IS-13779. 12.3 EFFECT OF MAGNETIC FILED OF EXTERNAL ORIGIN. The meter shall be provided with adequate magnetic shielding so that any external magnetic field (AC electro-magnets/DC magnet) as per the value specify in CBIP technical report-88 (with latest amendment) application on the meter shall not effect the proper functioning and recoding of energy as per error limits prescribed by CBIP. However, the test certificates of the designed meter for AC abnormal magnetic field & DC abnormal magnetic field as per clause 5.6.2 of CBIP -88 report (with latest version). The required test certificate for the design rating of meter from the NABL accredited laboratory shall be submitted by the bidders along with the bid. 12.4 D.C IMMUNITY TEST The meter should comply with the requirements of IEC 1036/IS-13779 and CBIP Technical Report 88/1998 (Latest amendment) 12.5 INFLUENCE QUANTITIES The meter shall work satisfactorily with guaranteed accuracy as per limit of IS 13779 and CBIP Technical Report 88/1988 (with latest amendments) under presence of the following quantities: 12.5.1 External Magnetic field 0.5 Tesla. 12.5.2 Electro Magnetic Field. 12.5.3 Radio Frequency interference. 12.5.4 Vibration. 12.5.5 Harmonic wave form. 12.5.6 Voltage fluctuation. 12.5.7 Electromagnetic high frequency field. 12.6 ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY The meter shall conform to provisions as per IS-13779 and IEC-62053-21:2003 and CBIP Technical Report 88/1998 (Latest Amendments) and should be protected against radiated interference from either magnetic or radio frequency sources. The meter shall also withstand DC immunity test so as to ensure that the meter does not saturate on passage of direct current. 12.7 METER POWER SUPPLY The meter should withstand the maximum system voltage i.e 288 volts continuously. In case of failure of power supply, the meter should display the measured quantities minimum for 24 hours. This event will be logged in the history as power failure (Indicating time, date & duration). 13. CONSTRUCTION 13.1 METER CASE & COVER The meter case & cover will be ultrasonically welded with provision of two No. polycarbonate seals, one on either side, so that Meters internal parts are accessible only after breaking seals and ultrasonic welding of case/cover of the meter and it should become unserviceable. The meter base can be opaque and meter cover will be Transparent or translucent with transparent window.
Page 5 of 21
13.1.1 The supplier should indicate hardness, melting temperature and tensile yield strength of the material and necessary test certificates of the same shall be furnished. The meter case and transparent cover should be sturdy enough to prevent damage during transportation and installation. 13.1.2 The meter chamber shall conform to the degree of protection IP 51 of IS: 12063/ IEC: 529 for protection against ingress of dust and moisture. 13.1.3 The polycarbonate plastic housing used may be provided with a key hole on the top for fixing which should not be accessible to the consumer after terminal cover is sealed. The polycarbonate plastic used shall conform to IS: 11731 besides meeting the test requirement of heat reflection test as per ISO-75, Glow wire test as per IS: 11000 (part 2/SECI) 1984 OR IEC PUB, 60695-2-12, Ball pressure test as per IEC-60695-2-12 and Flammability Test as per IS 11731 (Part-2) 1986. Plastic grade for Meter case should be LEXAN 500R and for meter cover should be LAXAN 143R/940A. Even Bayer make polymer may be accepted.
13.2 TERMINAL BLOCK & COVER The terminals may be grouped in a terminal block having adequate insulating properties and mechanical strength. The terminal block shall be made from best quality non-hygroscopic, flame retardant material (capable of passing the flammability tests given in IS-11731) with nickel-plated brass for connecting terminals. The clamping screw should be provided inside the terminal cover and should have metallic sleeve molded within the block to avoid damage during tightening of the screws. The terminals in the terminal block shall be of adequate length in order to have proper grip of conductor with the help of two screws through assembly of a plate so as to make cage type arrangement. The screws shall have thread size not less than M4 and head having 4 -6 mm diameter. The screw shall not have pointed ends at the end of threads. All terminals and connecting screws and washers should be of tinned/nickel plated brass material. The internal diameter of terminal hole shall be min. 8.5 mm and should comfortable accommodate the 25 mm2 cable conductors. Normally the cable used in such meters is 6 mm2 & 10 mm2 however at some places 25 mm2 can be used. The holes in the insulating material shall be of sufficient size to accommodate the insulation of conductor also. The terminal cover shall be polycarbonate plastic with minimum thickness 2 . 0 m m mm and the terminal cover shall be of extended type completely covering the terminal block and fixing holes except for the provision of conductor entry at the bottom for incoming and outgoing leads. The terminal cover shall be so provided that it remains permanently connected with meter base. The supplier shall suitably design the cover, so that it opens and closes like a hinged door and the ends of hinged pins shall be flattened so that it does not come out. Provision for
Page 6 of 21
Minimum one number utility seal(s) as the terminal cover shall be made. Supply voltage circuit is to be connected solidly from inside. Plastic grade for Meter terminals should be LEXAN 500R and for meter terminal cover should be LAXAN 143R/940A. Even Bayer make polymer may be accepted
13.3 DESIGN Voltage circuit, sealing arrangement, terminal block, terminal cover and nameplate etc. shall be in accordance with IS-13779 (latest version). The meter shall be compact and reliable in design, easy to transport and immune to vibration and shock involved in transportation and handling. The construction of the meter shall ensure consistent performance under all conditions especially during dust storm/heavy rains/very hot weather. The insulating material used in the meter should be non-hygroscopic, nonaging and of tested quality. The meter should be sealed in such a way that the internal parts of the meter are inaccessible. Further meter shall withstand an insulation test of 4 kV and impulse test at 8 kV & the terminal block and meter case shall have safety against spread of fire. They shall not get ignited by thermal overload of live parts in contact with them as per the relevant IS13779. 13.4 CIRCUITARY: The meter shall have an operational indication device such as blinking LED given type indication. The following indications are mandatory: 13.4.1 Meter Calibration (LED). 13.4.2 Phase available indication (LCD). 13.4.3 Load Earthling (LED/ LCD). 13.4.4 Current reversal (LCD). The operation indicator should be accessible from the front .The mounting of components on the PCB (Printed Circuit Board) shall preferably be SMT (Surface Mounted Technology) type. The Electronic Components used in the meter shall be of high quality and there shall be no drift in the accuracy of the meter at least up to 10 years. The circuitry in the meter shall be compatible with 2x8 bit (or better) processor and the meter shall be based on digital measuring and sampling technique. 13.5 CURRENT & PRESSURE COILS 13.5.1 13.5.2 Current Circuit Potential Circuit i.e Voltage Circuit As per IS- 13779 As per IS-13779.
13.6
FIXING ARRANGEMENT Every meter shall have three fixing holes one at the top and two at the bottom. The top hole shall be provided with a special clip at the back of the mater so that holding screw is not accessible to the consumer after the fixing of the meters. The lower fixing screws shall be provided under the sealed terminal cover. The requisite fixing screws shall be supplied with each meter.
Page 7 of 21
13.7
SEALING: Minimum 2 No. holes shall be provided for proper fixing of meter cover with 2 No. polycarbonate numbered seals, of good quality, on opposite side (one by the meter manufacturer and the other by the Utility/ Nigam on both opposite side.) So that meter internal parts are accessible only after breaking the seals, ultrasonic welding of case/cover of the meter.
13.8
ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS The meter shall be from high accuracy and reliable Surface Mount Technology (SMT) components. The supplier should submit the details of source/agencies from whom purchase of various components of meters used by them, has been done, to the authorized representative/ team deputed by Nigam for its verification. The make of components used in the meter should be used as listed below. Sr. No. 1. Component Function Measurement or computing chips Requirement The Measurement or computing chips in the meter should be with the Surface mount type along with ASICs. Makes and Origin USA: Anolog Devices, Cyrus Logic,Atmel,Phillips, Texas Instruments. South Africa: SAMES Japan: Hitachi or Oki Free scale semiconductors, MMI ,Maxim USA Atmel,National Semiconductors,Texas Instruments,Phillips,ST. Japan: Hitachi or Oki Microchip
2.
Memory Chip
The memory chips should not be affected by the external parameters like sparking high voltage spikes or electrostatic discharges.
Page 8 of 21
3.
Display modules
4.
Communication modules
a) The display modules should be well protected from the external UV radiations. b) The display visibility should be sufficient to read the Meter mounted at height at 0.5 meter as well as at the height of 0.2 meters (ref 3.2d for Viewing angle). c) The construction of the modules should be such that the displayed quantity should not disturbed with the life of display (PIN Type) d) It should be trans reflective HTN or STN type industrial grade with extended temperature Communication modules should be compatible for the two RS 232 ports (one for optical port for communication with meter reading instruments & the other- for the hardwire RS 232 port to communication with various modems for AMR)
Honkong: Genda Singapore : Bonafied technologies. Korea: Advantek China: Success Japan: Hitachi, Sony Haijing
USA: National Semiconductors, HP, Ontonica, ST Holland/Korea: Philips Japan: Hitachi Taiwan:Ligitek Germany: Siemens
5.
Optical Port
Optical Port should be used to transfer the meter data to meter reading instrument. The mechanical construction of the port should be such to facilitate the data transfer easily.
USA: National Semiconductors, HP, Holland/Korea: Philips Japan: Hitachi Taiwan:Ligitek Osram
Page 9 of 21
6.
Power Supply
The power supply should be with the capabilities as per the relevant standards. The power supply unit of the meter should not be affected. In case the maximum voltage of the system appears to the terminals due to faults or due to wrong connections. The active & passive components should be of the surface mount type & are to handled & soldered by the state of art assembly processes.
SMPS type
7.
Electronic Components
USA: National Semiconductors, Atmel, Philips, Texas Instruments, Texas, ST, Onsemi Japan: Hitachi, Oki, AVX or Ricoh Korea: Samsung
8.
Mechanical Parts
a) The internal electrical component should be of electrolytic copper & should be protected from corrosion, rust etc. b) The other mechanical components should be protected from rust, corrosion etc. by suitable plating /painting methods.
9.
Battery
Lithium with guaranteed life of 10 years. The accuracy of RTC shall be as per relevant IEC/IS standards
Verta, Tedirun, Sanyo or National Renota USA: Philips, Dallas, Atmel, Motorola, Microchip Japan: NEC or Oki Texas instruments (BBT test is must)
10.
RTC & Micro controller
11.
P.C.B.
Glass Epoxy, fire resistant grade FR4, with minimum thickness 1.6mm
No components of any other make other than mentioned above shall be accepted.
Page 10 of 21
13.9
SOFTWARE & COMMUNICATION COMPATIBILITY 13.9.1 The optical port shall be compatible to RS232. Communication modules should be RS 232 optical port (for communication with meter reading instruments & communication with various modems for AMR). The RS 232 port shall be capable to transfer the data locally i.e. through CMRI, Laptop etc. & transfer the data to the remote end through PSTN/Optical fiber/GPRS/GSM/CDMA/RF/any other technology to the main computer/Laptop by using Modem. Half-meter long cable, of suitable size, having facility at one end, for connecting to the optical port, other end shall be provided with RS 232 Connector shall be provided, as spare cable, so that the optical port can be brought out the meter box. The meter shall have necessary facilities to transfer the data via the Communication port, the hand held data collection device (DCD) and to the computer at remote end to get complete details in alpha numeric form. The necessary software for this purpose shall be provided by the supplier. 13.9.2 The Supplier shall supply Software required for CMRI & for connectivity to AMR modules. The supplier shall also provide training for the use of software. The software should be compatible to Microsoft Windows systems (Latest version). The software should have polling feature with optional selection of parameters to be down loaded for AMR application. Necessary provision shall be made in the software for converting all the parameters available for new and old meters if supplied earlier. Copy of operation manual shall be supplied. The data transfer (from meter to CMRI /AMR equipment) rate should be minimum 1200/9600 bps.
13.9.3
13.9.4
13.9.5 The supplier shall provide meter reading protocols / API. 14. PACKING: The meters shall be suitably packed for vertical/horizontal support to withstand handling during transport. The bidder shall be responsible for any damage during transit due to inadequate or improper packing. The meters shall preferably be supplied in thermocol packing of minimum 10 mm thickness/ Corrugated (CFS) box packing of min 3 mm thickness. 15. DESIGN LIFE The meter shall have a design life of at least 10 years. 16. QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN The design life of the meter shall be minimum 10 years and to prove the design life, the firm shall have at least the following Quality Assurance Plan: 16.1 16.2 16.3 16.4 The factory shall be completely dust proof. The testing rooms shall be temperature and humidity controlled as per relevant standard. The testing and calibrating equipment should be automatic and all test equipment shall have their valid calibration certificates. Power supply used in testing equipment shall be distortion free with sinusoidal
Page 11 of 21
wave- forms and maintaining constant voltage current and frequency as per the relevant standards. 16.5 During the manufacturing of the meters the following checks shall be carried out: 16.5.1 Meter frame dimension tolerance shall be minimum. 16.5.2 The assembly of parts shall be done with the help of jigs and fixtures so that human errors are eliminated. 16.5.3 The meters shall be batch tested on automatic, computerized test bench and the results shall be printed directly without any human errors. 17. ANTI TAMPER FEATURES The meter shall not be affected by any remote control device and shall continue recording energy under any one or combinations of the following condition. 17.1 The meter shall be capable of recording energy correctly even if input and output terminals are interchanged. Also the meter shall record correctly even if phase and neutral are inter changed. 17.2 The meter shall register energy even if the load is not terminated back to the meter; instead current is drawn through a local earth under following conditions. 17.2.1 When phase and neutral are connected correctly. 17.2.2 When phase and neutral wires connected are interchanged at input terminals. 17.3 Also when only phase is available either in neutral or phase terminal and earth loading has been done. In such circumstances only minimum starting current of 1.5 Amp. should be drawn and in other conditions as per relevant ISS. 17.4 The meter shall be factory calibrated through software and no modification of calibration shall be possible at site by any means what-so-ever. Trim pot method for calibration shall not be acceptable. No mechanical or potentiometer like devices shall be used for meter calibration that possibly can alter the meter accuracy either in case of change in climatic conditions or intentionally at site. Calibration Certificate/Routine test certificate should be supplied with the dispatch. 17.5 Meter shall record the energy accurately under the effect of radiation emitted by mobile phone. The test shall be carried out by bringing a mobile phone in the close proximity almost touching the meter of the meter for 10 minutes when there is an incoming call ( ringing or being received ) and shall be checked under the following conditions: 17.5.1 10% Ib and UPF 17.5.2 50% Ib and UPF 17.5.3 Ib and UPF 17.5.4 Ib and 0.8PF 17.5.5 125% Ib and UPF 17.6 The Meter shall immune to the external magnetic field upto 0.5 Tesla with permanent magnet of 75x75x35 mm and in case external magnetic field exceeding 0.5 Tesla(permanent magnet), the meter shall log the event of attempt of tampering by the external magnetic field, occurrences & restoration with date & time. The meter shall start record energy at maximum current Imax under such influence of abnormal magnetic field irrespective of actual load. The meter shall record as per actual load once the external abnormal magnetic field is removed. 17.7 Meter shall be immune of any abnormal frequency signal OR Meter shall log & display as tamper in the event abnormal frequency signal i.e. less than 47.5Hz OR more than 52.5 Hz is supplied to the meter. 17.8 Load survey-for all the billing parameters/anti tamper features shall be available for 75 days, 17.9 Minimum 100 numbers of events (occurrences & restoration with date & time of more than 10 minutes) shall be available in the meter memory on roll over facility. All the information shall be available in a standard simple format.
Page 12 of 21
17.10 Meter should register energy correctly within its class of accuracy at 240V and UPF even with neutral disconnected or neutral available through by putting variable resistance/capacitor/diode. 17.11The meter shall work satisfactorily under presence of various influencing conditions like External Magnetic Field, Electromagnetic Field, Radio Frequency Interference, Vibrations, harmonic Distortion, Voltage/ Frequency Fluctuations, and electromagnetic High Frequency Fields etc. The meter should be immune to electrostatic discharges (generated by High Voltage/Frequency Tamper device) of voltage up to 35 KV level (approx.) Meter should log the tamper event with date and time along with showing in display and start recording at Imax if ESD voltage level is more than 35 KV (approx.) To this effect a test certificate must submitted by the bidder from NABL accredited laboratory as per following criteria. The accuracy of the meter should not be affected with the application of abnormal voltage /frequency generating device ( having spark discharge of approximately 35Kv) in any of the following manner for a total period of 10 minutes: 17.11.1 On phase or neutral terminals 17.11.2 On any connecting wires of the meter. 17.11.3 Voltage discharge with 0-10mm spark gap 17.11.4 Spark on meter body 17.11.5 At any place in load circuit The accuracy of meter should be checked before, during & after the application of said devices. 17.12 Meter Body Opening: The meter shall have provision for detection and logging of opening of meter cover. Meter must detect/log with date and time meter body opening tamper, body opening must also be logged in absence of power supply. Incase of meter body opening display of C open Must appear continuously even after the re-closing the cover so that at the time of meter reading it must come in notice. However cover open date & time should appear in push button mode.
18.
NAME PLATE AND MARKING 18.1 Every meter shall have a name plate clearly visible and indelible and distinctly marked in accordance with IS 13779 (latest version). The following information should appear on an external plate attached to the meter cover: 18.1.1 Manufacturers name or trade mark and place of manufacture. 18.1.2 Designation of type. 18.1.3 Number of phases and number of wires for which the meter is suitable. 18.2 In addition to above, the following information shall be marked on a name plate preferably placed with in the meter: 18.2.1 18.2.2 Sr. No. and year of manufacture Principal unit in which the meter records.
Page 13 of 21
18.2.3 18.2.4 18.2.5 18.2.6 18.2.7 18.2.8 18.2.9
Reference voltage. Basic current and rated maximum current. Reference frequency in Hz. Meter constant. Class index. Reference temperature. The words properties of DHBVN or UHBVN depending upon the name of Nigam to whom meters are supplied. 18.2.10 BIS Mark
19.
TESTING AND MANUFACTURING FACILITIES The bidder shall have at least the following testing facilities to ensure accurate calibration: 19.1 Insulation resistance measurement. 19.2 Running at no load. 19.3 Starting current test. 19.4 Limits of error. 19.5 Range of adjustment. 19.6 Power loss in voltage and current coil. 19.7 Repeatability of error. 19.8 Transportation test. 19.9 Low load run test. 19.10 Heating test. 19.11 Protection against water, dust and moisture. The meter shall confirm to the degree of protection IP-51 against ingress of dust, moisture and vermins 19.12 Effect of Magnetic field of external origin as per clause 5.6.2. of CBIP Report-88 with latest amendments & provision of Nigam Technical Specification.
20.
INSPECTION 20.1 All meters shall be duly tested and sealed by the firm at their premises prior to inspection. 20.2 The Nigam Inspecting Officer will inspect double the number of meters as per sampling plan of ISS 13779 (latest version). Max. size/ lot of 5,000 numbers shall be considered for acceptance test as per ISS 13779. Higher lot shall be considered as two or more lots. The inspecting agency can carry out any type test which felt necessary as acceptance test at firms works. After testing, these sample meters shall be additionally sealed by the inspecting officer and one copy of the inspection report will be handed over to the manufacturer. However, one sample of each successive lot (of 5000 meters) received in the stores will be subject to all tests as per specification from any NABL lab. 20.3 The supplier shall submit the details of source/ agencies from whom purchase of various components of meters used by them, has been done, to the authorized representative/ team deputed by Nigam for its verification. 20.4 The manufacturer shall be liable to pay penalty of Rs 20,000/- for each occasion at which the fake inspection call has been made. This penalty would be in addition to the expenses incurred by the Nigam in deputing the Inspecting Officer for carrying out such inspection. In case the material offered for inspection fails in Ist inspection, the Nigam will have the right to levy a penalty at 0.1 % of the order value. In case the material offered for inspection fail during the 2nd inspection, the Nigam will have the right to increase the penalty to 0.25% of the order value. In case, the material offered fails during the 3rd and final inspection also, the firm will be liable for penal action
Page 14 of 21
including forfeiture of EMD, risk purchase, debarring/ blacklisting in future and no further opportunity for inspection would be provided to the supplier firm. 21 CHALLENGE CLAUSE: The material offered/received after the inspection by the authorized Inspecting Officer may again be subjected to the test for losses or any other parameters from any testing house/in house technique of the Nigam having requisite capabilities and facilities. The results if found deviating/ unacceptable or non-complying to approved GTPs the lot shall be rejected and bidder shall arrange to supply the replacement within thirty (30) days of such detection at his cost including to & fro transportation. In addition to this penalty @10% of cost of the inspected lot of material shall be imposed. 22. GUARANTEE: The meter shall have a designed life of at least 10 years and the supplier shall be responsible to replace, free of cost, with no transportation or insurance - cost to the Nigam, up to destination, the whole or any part of the material which, under normal and proper use, proves defective in quality or workmanship, subject to the condition that the defect is noticed within 78 months from the date of receipt of material by the consignee or 72 months from the date of installation, which ever period may expire earlier. The consignee or any other officer of the Nigam, actually using the material, will give prompt notice of each such defect to the supplier as well as the Purchasing authority and the Controller of Stores. The replacement shall be affected by the supplier within a reasonable time, but not, in any case, exceeding 45 days. The supplier shall also arrange to remove the defective supply within reasonable period but not exceeding 45 days from the date of issue of the notice in respect thereof. Upon the firm failing to do so, the damages / defects may be got rectified by the Nigam and the cost adjusted from the firms pending dues and/or security deposit against this or any other contract in force and the balance left be got deposited by the supplier. The Nigam may withhold the amount, equal to cost of defective material. These provisions shall, also equally apply to the replaced material. In case, the material is again found to be defective within warranty period, it shall, also, have to be replaced similarly. The purchaser shall recover an equivalent amount plus 15% supervision charges, if the defective material is not repaired / replaced with in the above specified period. The cumulative damage rate during warrantee period should not exceed:(i) Upto one year -- 6% (ii) Upto two years -- 7% (iii) Upto three years -- 8% (iv) Upto four years -- 9% More than four years -- 10% If the supplier fails to adhere to the above requirement, the Nigam may take any penal action against the supplier upto and including blacklisting. 23. The bidder shall submit four samples in which one shall be ultrasonic welded and three shall be in normal condition i.e. without ultrasonic weld. Sample shall be accepted upto 10 days from date of opening of the technical bid. The samples are to be delivered in person to the XEN/MM DHBVN. Vendor shall have to submit predefined copies of all the software (meter reading software for CMRI, Base computer software for meter data analysis and technical details). The sample meter to be submitted with tender by the bidder will be without any identity of the firm i.e. without any logo & name printed on the meter to maintain secrecy.
Page 15 of 21
The sample meter shall be got tested by purchaser without any representative of firm/ manufacturer to verify compliance to all clauses of specification from NABL lab. The necessary fees shall have to be deposited by bidder/ supplier. The intimation in this regards will be conveyed to the supplier, for which the name of the person and the contract number may please be provided along with the offer. In event of failure of the sample during any of the tests the offer will be considered as REJECTED and consequently the fees paid for type tests will be forfeited. Further if the sample passes in type testing the necessary fees would be reimbursed to bidder/ supplier by DHBVN. However, the decision of the Nigam in this regard shall be final and binding on all the bidders. 24. ANNEXURES The bidder shall submit the following Annexures (as per format) which are part and parcel of the specification: Annexure A Guaranteed and Technical particulars. Annexure B Deviation from specifications. Annexure C Deviations from specified standards. Annexure D Deviations from specified test requirements. Annexure E Bidders experience.
Director/Project, UHBVN, Panchkula
Director/Project, DHBVN, Hisar
CGM/PD&C, UHBVN, Panchkula GM/P&D, UHBVN, Panchkula
CGM/P&D, DHBVN, Hisar. GM/P&D, DHBVN, Hisar
FA & CAO/MM, UHBVN, Panchkula
Page 16 of 21
ANNEXURE-A GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR SINGLE PHASE STATIC METER Sr. No. DESCRIPTION AS OFFERED BY FIRM 1. Makers Name 2. Type of meter i) Basic current (A) ii) Maximum current 3. Standards to which the meter conform 4. Overload capacity 5. Dynamic range 6. Power supply variation i) Specified operational range ii) Limit rage of operation iii) Frequency 7. Accuracy class 8. P.F. Range 9. Variation of voltage at which meter functions normally 10. Power consumption per phase i) Voltage circuit ii) Current circuit 11. Minimum starting current of the meter (% Ib) 12. Impulse voltage 13. Display (No. of digits and character height) 14. Continuous display (Auto Display mode) 15. Operational indication-LED 16. a) Material for base/terminal block b) Material for meter cover/terminal cover 17. a) Meter terminal block having sealable extended terminal cover. b) No of seals to be Provided. c) Connection diagram inside the terminal cover 18. Communication port. 19. REAL Time clock with back up battery Life of battery 20. Non volatile memory retention time in absence of power. 21. MD reset 22. Self diagnostic feature 23. Load survey 24. Snap shot facility 25. No. of tamper events 26. Temper persistence time 27. Routine tests 28. Acceptance tests 29. Type tests 30. Testing facilities 31. BIS licence 32. ISO 9001/9002 33. Guarantee
Page 17 of 21
ANNEXURE-B DEVIATIONS FROM SPECIFICATIONS
Sr. No.
Specification Clause No.
Requirement of Deviation
Proposed Specification
Reasons for Deviation
1. 2. 3. 4.
Name of firm Name & signature of tenderer Designation Dated
Page 18 of 21
ANNEXURE-C
DEVIATIONS FROM SPECIFIED STANDARDS
Sr. No.
Particulars
Stipulation of Specified standard . Standard Stipulation Ref.
Stipulation standard adopted By tenderer Standard stipulation Ref.
Remarks
1. 2. 3. 4.
Page 19 of 21
ANNEXURE-D
DEVIATIONS FROM SPECIFIED TEST REQUIREMENTS SPECIFIED IN RELEVANT & PRESENT SPECIFICATION Sr. Name of test Standard No. & Requirement Proposed Reasons for No. Clause No. of standard Deviation Deviations 1. Type test 2. Acceptance test
1. 2. 3. 4.
Page 20 of 21
ANNEXURE-E
BIDDERS EXPERIENCE Sr. P.O. with To whom Description Qty. Status of Remarks No. date Supplied of material P.O.
1. Name of firm 2. Name & signature of tenderer 3. Designation 4. Date
Page 21 of 21
Page 22 of 21
Specification No. CSC- 48-R-1/DH/UH/P&D/2010-2011
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR WHOLE CURRENT A.C. THREE PHASE FOUR WIRES L.T. STATIC ENERGY METER OF ACCURACY CLASS 1.0(10-60A) WITH COMMUNICATION FACILITY
General Manager/P&D, UHBVN, Panchkula
Issue of the Month:
Page 1 of 23
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR WHOLE CURRENT A.C. THREE PHASE FOUR WIRES STATIC ENERGY METER OF ACCURACY CLASS 1.0(10-60A) WITH COMMUNICATION FACILITY 1. SCOPE The specification covers the design, manufacturing, testing, supply of AC whole current 3 phase 4 wire static watt hour meter for measurement of active energy (kWh) with initial and sustained accuracy of class 1.0 for solidly earthed system with balanced and unbalanced loads having power factor in the range of zero to unity(Lagging/Leading). 2. APPLICABLE STANDARDS Unless otherwise especially modified and to the extent so modified from these specification, the meter shall comply with the latest version of IS-13779, IEC-6205321:2003 and CBI&P Technical report 88/1998(latest amendments). The Manufacturer should have ISO 9000 or above certification . 3. CLIMATIC CONDITIONS The Static Energy Meter shall be suitable for satisfactorily working under the following climatic conditions: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. Max. ambient air temperature Min. ambient air temperature Average Daily Max. ambient temperature Max. yearly temperature weighted average 600C (-)50C 400C ambient 320C 1000 m 26 95 120 900 mm 195 kg/m2
Max. altitude above mean sea level Minimum Relative Humidity (%age) Max. Relative Humidity (%age) Avg. No. of Rainy days/year Avg. annual rainfall Maximum wind pressure
The meter shall be suitably designed and treated for normal life and satisfactory operation under the hot and hazardous tropical climate conditions and shall be dust and vermin proof. All the parts and surface, which are subject to corrosion, shall either be made of such material or shall be provided
Page 2 of 23
with such protective finish which provides suitable protection to them from any injurious effect of excessive humidity. 4. RATINGS The rating of kWh meter should be as follows:Supply voltage Current range(basic)Ib Max. current Current rating Class of accuracy Starting current Power factor range Power loss Resistance to surge voltage 1.2/50Micro sec. Test voltage of 50Hz for 1 Min. Clock time accuracy Temperature rise Power consumption by meter 5 SUPPLY SYSTEM Supply Voltage 3x240V AC (Phase to Neutral), 415V AC (Between phases) Voltage variation range -40% to +20% Frequency 50Hz +/- 5% Power Factor +1 to -1 6 QUANTITY TO BE MEASURED / MONITORED The display order shall be:6.1 Default Display (Continuously on auto scroll). 6.1.1 6.1.2 6.1.3 6.1.4 Cumulative Active Energy kWh along with legend. Current calendar MD in kW along with legend. Cumulative Max Demand along with legend. No of reset count along with legend. These parameters should be displayed on the LCD continuously for a period of 15 seconds on Auto scroll. In case of power failure, the meter should display above parameters i.e. 6.1.1 to 6.1.4 with push button. 3x240V AC (Phase to Neutral),415V AC (Between phases) 10 A 600% of Basic Current =10amp. 10-60A 1.0(No drift in tolerance of accuracy for 10 years) 0.2% of Basic Current at unity power factor 0 to 1 (Lagging & Leading) As per ISS-13779 >6kV peak As per ISS-13779 IEC-62053-21:2003/CBIP-88 2kV rms +/- 5 ppm at 25C As per ISS-13779 As per ISS-13779
6.2 On Demand Display(with push button) 6.2.1 6.2.2 6.2.3 6.2.4 Internal diagnostics cumulative kWh Date Real Time
Page 3 of 23
6.2.5 6.2.6 6.2.7 6.2.8 6.2.9 6.2.10 6.2.12 6.2.13 6.2.14 6.2.15
Current calendar month MD in kW Voltage phase wise Current phase wise Inst. Power Cumulative Max Demand MDI reset count Last calendar month MD in kW Last calendar month MD in kW occurrence Date Last calendar month MD in kW occurrence Time Meter Serial Number
The meters display should return to default display mode (continues auto scroll) if push button is not operated for more than 10 seconds. 7 Auto Display The meter shall have LED/LCD backlit type electronic display with minimum six digits with additional provision for legend. The decimal digit shall be clearly distinguished from integral digit. The registered parameters i.e. the data stored in meter shall not be lost/ effected in the event of power failure. The display shall also not be effected by electric and magnetic disturbances. The meter shall have non volatile memory (NVM) which does not need battery back up. The NVM shall have minimum retention period 10 years. The minimum character dimension s h a l l be 10mmx5mm. Impulse Counter & Stepper Motor shall not be provided in the meter.
Default MD integration period will be 30 min, however, it should have facility to change to 15 min at site with proper security feature.
7.1
Meter shall store MD integration period alongwith date and time at the end of every integration period new MD shall be previous MD and store, whichever is higher and the same shall be displayed.
7.2
MD shall be reset automatically at the defined date (or period) or through CMRI manually as when required. The re-setting shall be automatic at the end of every month i.e. 24 hours of last day of month. Twelve last M.D. values shall be stored in the memory also with auto reset count in numbers and reset count show on the display. In addition to this the cumulative kWh should also be stored in the memory at 0-00 hrs. at the end of every month and show on the display . The meter should be capable of storing last 12 month data with an option to retrieve the same.
7.3 Manual MD resetting should be possible. Use of scalable push button or any other method is optional.
7.4
BILLING DATA
Page 4 of 23
7.4.1 Meter serial number, Date and time, kWh, MD in kW, History of kWh & MD for last 6 months along with TOD readings. 7.4.2 All the above parameters (namely kWh, MD in kW) are meter readings. 7.4.3 All these data shall be accessible for reading, recording and spot billing by downloading through optical port on MRI or Laptop computers at site. 8 STARTING CURRENT: The starting current of the meter shall be 0.2% lb at unity power factor. 9 RUNNING AT NO LOAD: The meter should comply with the requirements of IEC 1036/IS-13779 and CBIP Technical Report 88/1998 (Latest amendment). 10 ACCURACY & LIMITS OF ERRORS: The error of meters shall not exceed the permissible limits per standard IS 13779 (latest version) and CBIP Technical Report 88/1998 (with latest amendment) for a period of at least 10 years from the date of supply. In case any drift is notified which is beyond the permissible limits, the bidder shall re-calibrate the mete for correct accuracy and if re-calibration is not possible, the meter shall be replaced by a new meter without any extra cost. 11 TEST OUTPUT DEVICE : The meter shall have a test output device in the form of a pulse indicator accessible from the front and capable of being monitored by suitable testing equipment. TESTS:
12
12.1 TYPE TESTS & TEST CERTIFICATES: Meters shall be fully type tested as per IS: 13779 (latest version). The type test certificates shall be submitted along with the offer. Offer without Type Test Report shall be liable for rejection. The Type test certificates shall not be more than 3 years old. Test certificates of appropriate range shall be accepted. The type certificates shall be from institutions as per Appendix G of CBIP Technical report 88 (amended). 12.2 ROUTINE TESTS The Acceptance and Routine tests shall be carried out as per latest version of IS13779. 12.3 EFFECT OF MAGNETIC FILED OF EXTERNAL ORIGIN. The meter shall be provided with adequate magnetic shielding so that any external magnetic field (AC electro-magnets/DC magnet) as per the value specify
Page 5 of 23
in CBIP technical report-88 (with latest amendment) application on the meter shall not effect the proper functioning and recoding of energy as per error limits prescribed by CBIP. However, the test certificates of the designed meter for AC abnormal magnetic field & DC abnormal magnetic field as per clause 5.6.2 of CBIP -88 report (with latest version). The required test certificate for the design rating of meter from NABL accredited laboratory shall be submitted by the bidders along with the bid. 12.4 D.C IMMUNITY TEST The meter should comply with the requirements of IEC 1036/IS-13779 and CBIP Technical Report 88/1998 (Latest amendment). 12.5 INFLUENCE QUANTITIES The meter shall work satisfactorily with guaranteed accuracy as per limit of IS 13779 and CBIP Technical Report 88/1988 (with latest amendments) under presence of the following quantities: 12.5.1 External Magnetic field 0.5 Tesla. 12.5.2 Electro Magnetic Field. 12.5.3 Radio Frequency interference. 12.5.4 Vibration. 12.5.5 Harmonic wave form. 12.5.6 Voltage fluctuation. 12.5.7 Electromagnetic high frequency field. 12.6 ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY The meter shall conform to provision as per IS-13779 and IEC-62053-21:2003 and CBIP Technical Report 88/1998 (Latest Amendments) and should be protected against radiated interference from either magnetic or radio frequency sources. The meter shall also withstand DC immunity test so as to ensure that the meter does not saturate on passage of direct current. 12.7 METER POWER SUPPLY The meter should withstand the maximum system voltage i.e. 498 volts continuously. In case of failure of power supply, the meter should display the measured quantities minimum for 24 hours. This event will be logged in the history as power failure (Indicating time, date & duration). 13 13.1 CONSTRUCTION METER CASE & COVER The meter case & cover will be ultrasonically welded with two No. polycarbonate seals, one each on either side, so that Meters internal parts are only accessible after breaking seals, ultrasonic welding case/cover of the meter and it should become unserviceable. The meter base can be opaque and meter cover will be
Page 6 of 23
Transparent or translucent with transparent window.

13.1.1
The supplier should indicate hardness, melting temperature and tensile yield
strength of the material and necessary test certificates of the same shall be furnished. The meter case and transparent cover should be sturdy enough to prevent damage during transportation and installation.
13.1.2
The meter chamber shall conform to the degree of protection IP 51 of IS: 12063/ IEC: 529 for protection against ingress of dust and moisture.
13.1.3 The polycarbonate plastic housing used may be provided with a key hole on the top for fixing which should not be accessible to the consumer after terminal cover is sealed.
The polycarbonate plastic used shall conform to ISS: 11731 besides meeting the test requirement of heat reflection test as per ISO-75 and Glow wire test as per IS: 11000 (part 2/SEC-I) 1984 OR IEC PUB, 60695-2-12, Ball pressure test as per IEC60695-2-12 and Flammability Test as per IS 11731 (Part-2) 1986. Plastic grade for Meter case should be LEXAN 500R and for meter cover should be LAXAN 143R/940A. Even Bayer make polymer may be accepted. 13.2 TERMINAL BLOCK & COVER The terminals may be grouped in a terminal block having adequate insulating properties and mechanical strength. The terminal block shall be made from best quality non-hygroscopic, flame retardant material (capable of passing the flammability tests given in IS-11731) with nickel-plated brass for connecting terminals. The clamping screw should be provided inside the terminal cover and should have metallic sleeve molded within the block to avoid damage during tightening of the screws. The terminals in the terminal block shall be of adequate length in order to have proper grip of conductor with the help of two screws through assembly of a plate so as to make cage type arrangement. The screws shall have thread size not less than M4 and head having 4 -6 mm diameter. The screw shall not have pointed ends at the end of threads. All terminals and connecting screws and washers should be of tinned/nickel plated brass material. The internal diameter of terminal hole shall be min. 8.5 mm and should comfortable accommodate the 25 mm2 cable conductors. Normally the cable used in such meters is 6 mm2 & 10 mm2 however at some places 25 mm2 can be used. The holes in the insulating material shall be of sufficient size to accommodate the insulation of conductor also. The terminal cover shall be polycarbonate plastic with minimum thickness 2.0mm mm and the terminal cover shall be of extended type completely covering the terminal block and fixing holes except for the provision of conductor entry at the bottom for incoming and outgoing leads. The terminal cover shall be so
Page 7 of 23
provided that it remains permanently connected with meter base. The supplier shall suitably design the cover, so that it opens and closes like a hinged door and the ends of hinged pins shall be flattened so that it does not come out. Provision for Minimum one number utility seal(s) as the terminal cover shall be made. Supply voltage circuit is to be connected solidly from inside. Plastic grade for Meter terminals should be LEXAN 500R and for meter terminal cover should be LAXAN 143R/940A. Even Bayer make polymer may be accepted 13.3 DESIGN Voltage circuit, sealing arrangement, terminal block, terminal cover and nameplate etc. shall be in accordance with IS-13779 (latest version).The meter shall be compact and reliable in design, easy to transport and immune to vibration and stock involved in transportation and handling. The construction of the meter shall ensure consistent performance under all conditions especially during dust storm/heavy rains/very hot weather. The insulating material used in the meter should be non-hygroscopic, non-aging and of tested quality. The meter should be sealed in such a way that the internal parts of the meter are inaccessible. Further meter shall withstand an insulation test of 4 kV and impulse test at 8kV & the terminal block and meter case shall have safety against spread of fire. They shall not get ignited by thermal overload of live parts in contact with them as per the relevant IS-13779 13.4 CIRCUITARY: The meter shall have an operational indication device such as blinking LED given type indication. The following indications are mandatory: 13.4.1 Meter Calibration (LED). 13.4.2 Phase available indication (LCD). 13.4.3 Load Earthling (LED/ LCD). 13.4.4 Current reversal (LCD). The operation indicator should be accessible from the front. The mounting of components on the PCB (Printed Circuit Board) shall preferably be SMT (Surface Mounted Technology) type. The Electronic Components used in the meter shall be of high quality and there shall be no drift in the accuracy of the meter at least upto10 years. The circuitry in the meter shall be compatible with 2x8 bit (or better) processor and the meter shall be based on digital measuring and sampling technique.
13.5
CURRENT & PRESSURE COILS

Page 8 of 23
13.5.1 Current Circuit 13.5.2 Potential Circuit i.e Voltage Circuit 13.6 FIXING ARRANGEMENT
As per IS- 13779 As per IS-13779.
Every meter shall have three fixing holes one at the top and two at the bottom. The top hole shall be provided with a special clip at the back of the mater so that holding screw is not accessible to the consumer after the fixing of the meters. The lower fixing screws shall be provided under the sealed terminal cover. The requisite fixing screws shall be supplied with each meter. 13.7 SEALING: Minimum 2 No. holes shall be provided for proper fixing of meter cover with 2 No. polycarbonate numbered seals, of good quality, on opposite side (one by the meter manufacturer and the other by the Utility/ Nigam on both opposite side.) So that meter internal parts are accessible only after breaking the seals, ultrasonic welding of case/cover of the meter. 13.8 ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS The meter shall be from high accuracy and reliable surface mount Technology (SMT) components. The supplier should submit the details of source/agencies from whom purchase of various components of meters used by them, has been done, to the authorized representative/ team deputed by Nigam for its verification. The make of components used in the meter should be used as listed below.
Sr. No. 1.
Component Function Measurement or computing chips
Requirement The Measurement or computing chips in the meter should be with the Surface mount type along with ASICs.
Makes and Origin USA: Anolog Devices, Cyrus Logic,Atmel,Phillips, Texas Instruments. South Africa: SAMES Japan: Hitachi or Oki
Free scale semiconductors, MMI ,Maxim

2. Memory Chip The memory chips should not be affected by the external parameters like sparking high voltage spikes or electrostatic discharges. USA Atmel,National Semiconductors,Texas Instruments,Phillips,ST. Japan: Hitachi or Oki
Microchip
Page 9 of 23
3.
Display modules
4.
Communication modules
a) The display modules should be well protected from the external UV radiations. b) The display visibility should be sufficient to read the Meter mounted at height at 0.5 meter as well as at the height of 0.2 meters (ref 3.2d for Viewing angle). c) The construction of the modules should be such that the displayed quantity should not disturbed with the life of display (PIN Type) d) It should be trans reflective HTN or STN type industrial grade with extended temperature Communication modules should be compatible for the two RS 232 ports (one for optical port for communication with meter reading instruments & the other- for the hardwire RS 232 port to communication with various modems for AMR) Optical Port should be used to transfer the meter data to meter reading instrument. The mechanical construction of the port should be such to facilitate the data transfer easily.
Honkong: Genda Singapore : Bonafied technologies. Korea: Advantek China: Success Japan: Hitachi, Sony Haijing
USA: National Semiconductors, HP, Ontonica, ST Holland/Korea: Philips Japan: Hitachi Taiwan:Ligitek Germany: Siemens
5.
Optical Port
USA: National Semiconductors, HP, Holland/Korea: Philips Japan: Hitachi Taiwan:Ligitek Osram
Page 10 of 23
6.
Power Supply
The power supply should be with the capabilities as per the relevant standards. The power supply unit of the meter should not be affected. In case the maximum voltage of the system appears to the terminals due to faults or due to wrong connections. The active & passive components should be of the surface mount type & are to handled & soldered by the state of art assembly processes.
SMPS type
7.
Electronic Components
USA: National Semiconductors, Atmel, Philips, Texas Instruments, Texas, ST, Onsemi Japan: Hitachi, Oki, AVX or Ricoh Korea: Samsung
8.
Mechanical Parts
a) The internal Electrical component should be of electrolytic copper & should be protected from corrosion, rust etc. b) The other mechanical components should be protected from rust, corrosion etc. by suitable plating /painting methods.
9.
Battery
Lithium with guaranteed life of 10 years. The accuracy of RTC shall be as per relevant IEC/IS standards
10.
RTC & Micro controller
Verta,Tedirun, Sanyo or National Renota USA: Philips, Dallas, Atmel, Motorola, Microchip Japan: NEC or Oki Texas instruments (BBT test is must)
11.
P.C.B.
Glass Epoxy, fire resistant grade FR4, with minimum thickness 1.6mm
Page 11 of 23
No components of any other make other than mentioned above shall be accepted.
13.9
SOFTWARE & COMMUNICATION COMPATIBILITY
13.9.1 The optical port shall be compatible to RS232. Communication modules should be RS 232 optical port (for communication with meter reading instruments & communication with various modems for AMR). The RS 232 port shall be capable to transfer the data locally i.e. through CMRI, Laptop etc. & transfer the data to the remote end through PSTN/Optical fiber/GPRS/GSM/CDMA/RF/any other technology to the main computer/Laptop by using Modem. half-meter long cable, of suitable size, having facility at one end, for connecting to the optical port, other end shall be provided with RS 232 Connector shall be provided, as spare cable, so that the optical port can be brought out the meter box. The meter shall have necessary facilities to transfer the data via the Communication port, the hand held data collection device (DCD) and to the computer at remote end to get complete details in alpha numeric form. The necessary software for this purpose shall be provided by the supplier. 13.9.2 The Supplier shall supply Software required for CMRI & for connectivity to AMR modules. The supplier shall also provide training for the use of software. The software should be compatible to Microsoft Windows systems (Latest version). The software should have polling feature with optional selection of parameters to be down loaded for AMR application. 13.8.3 Necessary provision shall be made in the software for converting all the parameters available for new and old meters if supplied earlier. Copy of operation manual shall be supplied. 13.9.4 The data transfer (from meter to CMRI /AMR equipment) rate should be minimum 1200/9600 bps, 13.9.5 14 The supplier shall provide meter reading protocols / API. PACKING The meters shall be suitably packed for vertical/horizontal support to withstand handling during transport. The bidder shall be responsible for any damage during transit due to inadequate or improper packing.The meters shall preferably be supplied in thermocol packing of minimum 10 mm thickness/ Corrugated (CFS) box packing of min 3 mm thickness. DESIGN LIFE The meter shall have a design life of at least 10 years. 16 QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN The design life of the meter shall be minimum 10 years and to prove the design life, the firm shall have at least the following Quality Assurance Plan:
Page 12 of 23
15
16.1 16.2 16.3 16.4
16.5
The factory shall be completely dust proof. The testing rooms shall be temperature and humidity controlled as per relevant standard. The testing and calibrating equipment should be automatic and all test equipment shall have their valid calibration certificates. Power supply used in testing equipment shall be distortion free with sinusoidal wave-forms and maintaining constant voltage current and frequency as per the relevant standards. During the manufacturing of the meters the following checks shall be carried out: 16.5.1 Meter frame dimension tolerance shall be minimum. 16.5.2 The assembly of parts shall be done with the help of jigs and fixtures so that human errors are eliminated. 16.5.3 The meters shall be batch tested on automatic, computerized test bench and the results shall be printed directly without any human errors. ANTI TAMPER FEATURES The meter shall not be affected by any remote control device and shall continue recording energy under any one or combinations of the following condition. The meter shall record correctly irrespective of phase sequence and even in case of current reversal and missing potential or Meter should record as per prevailing electric connection. The meter shall continue record energy; 17.2.1 In the event neutral to the meter is disconnected from both ends of the meter and any phase is shorted to the neutral and supply is used with earth from any phase, meter functioning should not at all be effected on all phases individually when all 3 phases remained connected at their respective places. 17.2.2 Meter must function accurately, on all the phases individually when single phase load is used with earth and neutral to the meter is disconnected at the neutral point of the meter remaining phases are connected at respective places. The meter shall be factory calibrated. In the meters original software, there shall be no possibility of tampering including viruses. Meter shall record the energy accurately under the effect of radiation emitted by mobile phone. The test shall be carried out by bringing a mobile phone in the close proximity ( almost touching the meter) of the meter for 10 minutes when there is an incoming call ( ringing or being received ) and shall be checked under the following condition: 17.5.1 10% Ib and UPF 17.5.2 50% Ib and UPF 17.5.3 Ib and UPF 17.5.4 Ib and 0.8 PF 17.5.5 125% Ib and UPF
17
17.1
17.2
17.3 17.4 17.5
Page 13 of 23
17.6
The Meter shall immune to the external magnetic field upto 0.5 Tesla with permanent magnet of 75x75x35 mm and in case external magnetic field exceeding 0.5 Tesla (permanent magnet), the meter shall log the event of attempt of tampering by the external magnetic field, occurrences & restoration with date & time. The meter shall start record energy at maximum current IMAX under such influence of abnormal magnetic field irrespective of actual load. The meter shall record as per actual load once the external abnormal magnetic field is removed. Meter shall log & display tampers of 17.7.1 Potential Missing 17.7.2 Current circuit reversal 17.7.3 Current circuit short 17.7.4 Injecting AC/DC high frequency/Current signal in neutral.
17.7
Meter shall be immune of any abnormal frequency signal OR Meter shall log & display at tamper in the event abnormal frequency signal i.e. less than 47.5Hz OR more than 52.5 Hz is supplied to the meter. 17.9 Load Survey-Load survey for all the billing parameters/Anti Tamper Features should be available for 120 days. 17.10 Minimum 200 number of events(occurrences & restoration with date & time of more than 10 minutes) shall be available in the meter memory on roll over facility. All the information shall be available in a standard simple format. 17.11 Meter should register energy correctly within its class of accuracy at 240V and UPF even with neutral disconnected or neutral available through by putting variable resistance/capacitor/diode. Meter should register energy correctly within class of accuracy at 240V UPF with neutral disconnected and neutral available through by putting variable resistance/capacitor/diode. 17.12 The meter shall work satisfactorily under presence of various influences conditions like External Magnetic Field, Electromagnetic Field, Radio Frequency Interference, Vibrations, harmonic Distortion, Voltage/Frequency Fluctuations, and electromagnetic High Frequency Fields etc. The meter should be immune to electrostatic discharges (generated by High Voltage/Frequency Tamper device) of voltage up to 35 KV level (approx.) Meter should log the tamper event with date and time along with showing in display and start recording at Imax if ESD voltage level is more than 35 KV (approx.) To this effect a test certificate must submitted by the bidder from NABL accredited laboratory as per following criteria: The accuracy of the meter should not be affected with the application of abnormal voltage /frequency generating device (having spark discharge of approximately 35kV) in any of the following manner for a total period of 10 minutes: 17.12.1 On phase or neutral terminals 17.12.2 On any connecting wires of the meter.
Page 14 of 23
17.8
17.12.3 Voltage discharge with 0-10mm spark gap 17.12.4 Spark on meter body 17.12.5 At any place in load circuit The accuracy of meter should be checked before, during & after the application of said devices and the accuracy of meter should not be affected.
17.13 Meter Body Opening:

The meter shall have provision for detection and logging of opening of meter cover. Meter must detect/log with date and time meter body opening tamper, body opening must also be logged in absence of power supply. Incase of meter body opening display of C open Must appear continuously even after the reclosing the cover so that at the time of meter reading it must come in notice. However cover open date & time should appear in push button mode. 18 18.1 NAME PLATE AND MARKING Every meter shall have a name plate clearly visible and indelible and distinctly marked in accordance with IS 13779 (latest version). The following information should appear on an external plate attached to the meter cover: 18.1.1 Manufacturers name or trade mark and place of manufacture. 18.1.2 Designation of type. 18.1.3 Number of phases and number of wires for which the meter is suitable. In addition to above, the following information shall be marked on a name plate preferably placed with in the meter: 18.2.1 Sr. No. and year of manufacture 18.2.2 Principal unit in which the meter records. 18.2.3 Reference voltage. 18.2.4 Basic current and rated maximum current. 18.2.5 Reference frequency in Hz. 18.2.6 Meter constant. 18.2.7 Class index. 18.2.8 Reference temperature. 18.2.9 The words properties of DHBVN or UHBVN depending upon the name of Nigam to whom meters are supplied. 18.2.10 BIS Mark TESTING AND MANUFACTURING FACILITIES The bidder shall have at least the following testing facilities to ensure accurate calibration: Insulation resistance measurement. Running at no load. Starting current test. Limits of error. Range of adjustment. Power loss in voltage and current coil.
Page 15 of 23
18.2
19
19.1 19.2 19.3 19.4 19.5 19.6
19.7 19.8 19.9 19.10 19.11 19.12 20 20.1 20.2
Repeatability of error. Transportation test. Low load run test. Heating test. Protection against water, dust and moisture. The meter shall confirm to the degree of protection IP-51 against ingress of dust, moisture and vermins Effect of Magnetic field of external origin as per clause 5.6.2. of CBIP Report-88 with latest amendments & provision of Nigam Technical Specification. INSPECTION All meters shall be duly tested and sealed by the firm at their premises prior to inspection. The Nigam Inspecting Officer will inspect double the number of meters as per sampling plan of ISS 13779 (latest version). Max. size/ lot of 5,000 numbers shall be considered for acceptance test as per ISS 13779. Higher lot shall be considered as two or more lots. The inspecting agency can carry out any type test which felt necessary as acceptance test at firms works. After testing, these sample meters shall be additionally sealed by the inspecting officer and one copy of the inspection report will be handed over to the manufacturer. However, one sample of each successive lot (of 5000 meters) received in the stores will be subject to all tests as per specification from any NABL lab. The supplier shall submit the details of source/ agencies from whom purchase of various components of meters used by them, has been done, to the authorized representative/ team deputed by Nigam for its verification. The manufacturer shall be liable to pay penalty of Rs 20,000/- for each occasion at which the fake inspection call has been made. This penalty would be in addition to the expenses incurred by the Nigam in deputing the Inspecting Officer for carrying out such inspection. In case the material offered for inspection fails in Ist inspection, the Nigam will have the right to levy a penalty at 0.1 % of the order value. In case the material offered for inspection fail during the 2nd inspection, the Nigam will have the right to increase the penalty to 0.25% of the order value. In case, the material offered fails during the 3rd and final inspection also, the firm will be liable for penal action including forfeiture of EMD, risk purchase, debarring/ blacklisting in future and no further opportunity for inspection would be provided to the supplier firm. CHALLENGE CLAUSE: The material offered/received after the inspection by the authorized Inspecting Officer may again be subjected to the test for losses or any other parameters from any testing house/in house technique of the Nigam having requisite capabilities and facilities. The results if found deviating/ unacceptable or non-complying to approved GTPs the lot shall be rejected and bidder shall arrange to supply the replacement within thirty (30) days of such detection at his cost including to & fro transportation. In addition to this penalty @10% of cost of the inspected lot of material shall be imposed.
Page 16 of 23
20.3
20.4
21
22.
GUARANTEE: The meter shall have a designed life of at least 10 years and the supplier shall be responsible to replace, free of cost, with no transportation or insurance - cost to the Nigam, up to destination, the whole or any part of the material which, under normal and proper use, proves defective in quality or workmanship, subject to the condition that the defect is noticed within 78 months from the date of receipt of material by the consignee or 72 months from the date of installation, which ever period may expire earlier. The consignee or any other officer of the Nigam, actually using the material, will give prompt notice of each such defect to the supplier as well as the Purchasing Authority and the Controller of Stores. The replacement shall be affected by the supplier within a reasonable time, but not, in any case, exceeding 45 days. The supplier shall also arrange to remove the defective supply within reasonable period but not exceeding 45 days from the date of issue of the notice in respect thereof. Upon the firm failing to do so, the damages / defects may be got rectified by the Nigam and the cost adjusted from the firms pending dues and/or security deposit against this or any other contract in force and the balance left be got deposited by the supplier. The Nigam may withhold the amount, equal to cost of defective material. These provisions shall, also equally apply to the replaced material. In case, the material is again found to be defective within warranty period, it shall, also, have to be replaced similarly. The purchaser shall recover an equivalent amount plus 15% supervision charges, if the defective material is not repaired / replaced with in the above specified period.
The cumulative damage rate during warrantee period should not exceed:(i) Upto one year -- 6% (ii) Upto two years -- 7% (iii) Upto three years -- 8% (iv) Upto four years -- 9% (v) More than four years -- 10% If the supplier fails to adhere to the above requirement, the Nigam may take any penal action against the supplier upto and including blacklisting.
23. The bidder shall submit four samples in which one shall be ultrasonic welded and three shall be in normal condition i.e. without ultrasonic weld. Sample shall be accepted upto 10 days from date of opening of the technical bid. The samples are to be delivered in person to the XEN/MM DHBVN. Vendor shall have to submit predefined copies of all the software (meter reading software for CMRI, Base computer software for meter data analysis and technical details). The sample meter to be submitted with tender by the bidder will be without any identity of the firm i.e. without any logo & name printed on the meter to maintain secrecy. The sample meter shall be got tested by purchaser without any representative of firm/ manufacturer to verify compliance to all clauses of specification from NABL lab. The necessary fees shall have to be deposited by bidder/ supplier. The intimation in this regards will be conveyed to the supplier, for which the name of the person and the contract number may please be provided along with the offer. In event of failure of the sample during any of the tests the offer will be considered as REJECTED and consequently the fees paid for type tests will be forfeited. Further if the sample passes in type testing the necessary fees would be reimbursed to bidder/ supplier by DHBVN. However, the decision of the Nigam in this regard shall be final and binding on all the bidders.
Page 17 of 23
24
ANNEXURES The bidder shall submit the following Annexure (as per format) which are part and parcel of the specification: Annexure A Guaranteed and Technical particulars. Annexure B Deviation from specifications. Annexure C Deviations from specified standards. Annexure D Deviations from specified test requirements. Annexure E Bidders experience.
Director/Project, UHBVN, Panchkula FA & CAO/MM, UHBVN, Panchkula
Director/Project, CGM/PD&C, DHBVN, Hisar UHBVN, Panchkula FA & CAO/MM, DHBVN, Hisar GM/P&D, UHBVN, Panchkula
CGM/P&D, DHBVN, Hisar. GM/P&D, DHBVN, Hisar
Page 18 of 23
ANNEXURE-A
GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR THREE PHASE WHOLE CURRENT STATIC ENERGY METER Sr. No. DESCRIPTION AS OFFERED BY FIRM 1. Makers Name 2. Type of meter i) Basic current (A) ii) Maximum current 3. Standards to which the meter conform 4. Overload capacity 5. Dynamic range 6. Power supply variation i) Specified operational range ii) Limit rage of operation iii) Frequency 7. Accuracy class 8. P.F. Range 9. Variation of voltage at which meter functions normally 10. Power consumption per phase i) Voltage circuit ii) Current circuit 11. Minimum starting current of the meter (% Ib) 12. Impulse voltage 13. Display (No. of digits and character height) 14. Continuous display (Auto Display mode) 15. Operational indication-LED 16. a) Material for base/terminal block b) Material for meter cover/terminal cover 17. a) Meter terminal block having sealable extended terminal cover. b) No of seals to be Provided. c) Connection diagram inside the terminal cover 18. Communication port. 19. REAL Time clock with back up battery Life of battery 20. Non volatile memory retention time in absence of power. 21. MD reset 22. Self diagnostic feature 23. Load survey 24. Snap shot facility 25. No. of tamper events 26. Temper persistence time 27. Routine tests 28. Acceptance tests 29. Type tests 30. Testing facilities 31. BIS license 32. ISO 9001/9002 33. Guarantee
Page 19 of 23
DEVIATIONS FROM SPECIFICATIONS
ANNEXURE-B
Sr. No.
Specification Clause No.
Requirement of Deviation
Proposed Specification
Reasons for Deviation
1. 2. 3. 4.
Page 20 of 23
ANNEXURE-C
DEVIATIONS FROM SPECIFIED STANDARDS
Sr. No.
Particulars
Stipulation of Specified standard . Standard Stipulation Ref.
Stipulation standard adopted By tenderer Standard stipulation Ref.
Remarks
1. 2. 3. 4.
Page 21 of 23
ANNEXURE-D
DEVIATIONS FROM SPECIFIED TEST REQUIREMENTS SPECIFIED IN RELEVANT & PRESENT SPECIFICATION Sr. Name of test Standard No. & Requirement Proposed Reasons for No. Clause No. of standard Deviation Deviations 1. Type test 2. Acceptance test
1. 2. 3. 4.
Page 22 of 23
ANNEXURE-E
BIDDERS EXPERIENCE Sr. P.O. with To whom Description Qty. Status of Remarks No. date Supplied of material P.O.
1. Name of firm 2. Name & signature of tenderer 3. Designation 4. Date
Page 23 of 23
Specification No. CSC- XXXXI/DH/UH/P&D/2009-2010
Meter Cup Board (MCB) for outside usage for Three Phase Energy Meters
Issue of the Month: Jan. 2010
Page 1 of 9
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION IN RESPECT OF METER CUPBOARD (MCB) FOR THREE PHASE ENERGY METERS 1. SCOPE This specification covers the design, manufacture, inspection, testing and supply of MS sheet. Meter Cup Board (MCBs) for housing three phase energy of General category i.e. Domestic &
meters for electric connections Commercial connections. 1.1 SERVICE CONDITIONS
The Metal Meter Boxes to be supplied against this specification shall be suitable for satisfactory continuous operation under the following climatic conditions: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 2. Max. ambient air temperature Min. ambient air temperature Average Max. Daily ambient temperature Max. yearly temperature weighed average 600C (-)50C 400C ambient 320C 1000 26 95 120 900 mm 195 Kg./m Sq.
CONSTRUCTIONAL AND TECHNICAL PARTICULARS :
2.1
The MCBs shall conform to drawing attached as per Annexure-I to II. It shall be dust and vermin proof for housing single phase energy meters of any make. The internal dimensions of MCB shall be 380mm x 300 mm x 160 mm ( i.e. height x width x depth).
2.2
The MCB shall be made from 20 SWG MS sheet by the following method: Deep Drawn Method: The base and cover of the MCB shall be individually in one piece without any welding except for fixing of the accessories like hinges, clamps, handle etc. which shall be spot welded. The cover of MCB shall be fixed on
two tamper proof inside hinges not visible from outside. The hinge pin Page 2 of 9
diameter should be minimum 3mm; Hinges shall be made from min. 1.6mm MS sheet. The door of MCB shall open from right to left by minimum
90.The collar of the door (cover) in closed position shall rest on the collar of the body (base) of MCB. The collar of the door shall overlap the collar of the body of MCB by minimum 8mm. The collar of the body shall be provided with good quality rubber gasket lining of min. 3mm thickness. Thickness of rubber lining shall be such that it provides proper sealing between the cover & base of MCB to avoid penetration of dust and ingress of water. Rubber lining should be fixed with suitable adhesive so that the same does not get removed by itself on opening of the door. Two No. sealing
screws with rubber washer shall be provided to seal & hold the door and body of MCB. Head of sealing screws should have hole of 3mm. The fixing arrangement of the sealing screws shall consist of 1.6mm thick strip (Lshaped) welded from inner side of the body & another strip having L-shaped end with 3 mm hole welded from inner side of door of the MCB. The length of the extended portion of the strips shall be such that the sealing screws in tightened position are at a distance of about 5 mm from end of the collar of the cover. The sealing strips shall have additional hole of 5.5mm for riveting the cover and base of MCB. All the holes shall be properly aligned. 2.3 All the steel sections used in fabrication shall be carefully leveled and straightened before any works is done on them. No rough edges shall be permitted anywhere through out the work. The material of MCB shall be capable to withstand mechanical, electrical and thermal stresses as well as the effects of humidity, which are likely to be encountered during its service. All the spot welding work shall be done carefully so as to avoid burns and dents etc. The surface
over heated spots, cavities, porosity
should be properly cleaned before welding and slag removed after welding.
2.4
A viewing window opening of the size 200x150 mm as indicated in the drawing shall be provided about 50mm below top edge of MCB to facilitate taking of meter readings. Viewing window shall be provided with toughened glass of 5mm thickness. Glass shall have scratch proof
DHBVN logo on the right side top corner of the glass. This glass shall be fixed from inside of the cover of MCB, with single piece drawn metal frame Page 3 of 9
(Glass Holder) made of 20 SWG MS sheet fixed with min. four screws. Glass holder shall have rectangular cuttings as per details shown in Annexure-III. The size of toughened glass shall be 220mm x170 mm so as to provide minimum overlap of 10mm. This glass has to be fitted with a wrap around single piece rubber ring without joint having minimum depth of 8mm made from good quality rubber so as to with stand weather effect. 2.5 A handle of minimum 75mm length and 10mm width and 20 SWG sheet thickness should be provided for opening and closing of the cover at the place as shown in the drawing. 2.6 The mounting arrangement of the meter shall be as shown in the AnnexureII. It should be raised from the base of MCB body by 35mm (minimum). The mounting arrangement shall have 3mm thick
adjustable slotted strip of Phenolic Laminated Sheet ( Bakelite) fixed with screws on the mounting arrangement. Adjustable slotted flat shall be provided with two MS screws (M4 x 35mm length) with nuts .And one screw ( M4 x 12mm length)shall be provided at upper point with Phenolic Laminated Strip for meter hanger. 2.7 Sealing arrangement as shown in drawing with a sealing screw of 5.0 mm diameter shall be provided for sealing of MCB .Head and Body of sealing screw shall have a hole suitable for sealing wire. 2.8 Four Nos. fixing holes of 6.5 mm diameter at the back surface of MCB For fixing of
shall be provided to fix the MCB at flat wall or surface.
MCB on flat wall, 4 Nos. 5mm diameter 40mm long pan head self taping screws and washers shall be provided by the supplier with every MCB. 4 Nos. plastic fixing plugs of 50mm length suitable for self-tapping screws shall also be provided. Alternately, for fixing of MCB on poles, suitable 4 nos. zinc plated clamps shall be provided with each box. Clamps shall have
adjustable slotted arrangement for adjustment of variation in pole sizes. Clamps shall be provided with 4 Nos. M6 bolts and nuts for fixing of MCB with clamps. Suitable nuts, bolts and washers shall also be provided for fixing of clamps on the poles, Clamps, nuts & bolts shall be properly zinc plated. 2.9 2 Nos. holes with superior quality plastic / rubber cable glands of internal diameter of 20mm each for incoming and outgoing cables shall be provided at the bottom of the MCB. Glands shall be properly fixed on Page 4 of 9
the box such that the same does not get removed from the box. Glands shall be made such that internal diameter of glands provided for cables should be closed with the film of not less than 1mm thickness. Cable will go through the glands by piercing the film of the glands.
2.10
MCB shall be adequately protected against rust, dust water and corrosion both from inside and outside. The MCB shall have smoke grey shade on outside and white on inside. The MCB shall be powder coated. Powder Coating: The surface of the MCB shall be properly pre-treated and cleaned in 7 tank process(degreasing, water rinsing, de-rusting, water
rinsing, phosphating, water rinsing, passivation) and shall be applied with a powder coating of suitable thickness on outer side and inside the box.
2.11
Earthing bolt of diameter 6 mm with nut and washer shall be provided in the threads of L-shape clamp welded to main body on left side.
2.12 All the screws and washers shall be properly zinc plated. 2.13 The tolerance permissible on the overall dimensions and weight of the MCB shall be (+/-) 2%.
2.14 Provision for fixing of Communication port (9-pin D Connector) shall be provided on the side wall of the box. A window of the size suitable for Communication port shall be provided on the side wall such that communication port is fixed from inside of the side wall in vertical direction with two suitable screws and nuts. Window shall be located approximately 50mm from back side and 150mm from top side of the box. Communication port shall be covered with a Sealing arrangement from outside of the box. Sealing arrangement shall be fixed with two sealing screws of M4 threads to cover the communication port. Head of sealing screw shall have hole of 2.5mm for sealing wire. Suitable rubber packing shall be provided between the sealing arrangement and box wall in order to avoid any ingress of water. Any access to communication port shall only be after the removal of sealing arrangement. 2.15 Push button arrangement shall be provided on the reading window glass of the MCB. Location of push button arrangement shall be approximately 75mm vertically downwards from top of the box and 43mm off centre from the centre line of the box towards sealing segment side of the box. Push button Page 5 of 9
arrangement shall be suitable to press the push buttons of the meter 65mm below the glass level. 3 DEGREE OF PROTECTION: The MCB shall comply with the requirement of IP-53 & its latest version. The MCB shall be fully type tested as per IP-53 & its latest version. All the type tests shall be carried out from the Govt approved laboratory which are accredited by the National Board of testing and calibration laboratories (NABL) of Govt of India. The type test reports shall be furnished along with the bid, failing which the tender shall not be entertained and liable to be rejected. The type test report shall not be older than 3 years on the date of opening of Tender part-I. 4 DRAWING/SAMPLES One complete set of detailed dimensioned drawings of each offered item shall be submitted along with tender. Enclosed drawings are only for general arrangement purpose. One sample of MCB as per specifications shall be submitted along with tender and any tender not accompanied with the sample shall be rejected out rightly. The samples being furnished shall be new. 5 MARKINGS: DHBVN/ UHBVN insignia shall be embossed on the MCB. The word DHBVN/ UHBVN shall be embossed on the Meter Cup Board. A notice with wording that There should be no cable joints inside the cabinet should be printed in Red on the pocket of the meter cupboard. A notice in Hindi with wording that DHBVN/UHBVN should also be got printed on the cover of the meter cup Board. 6 INSPECTION: The manufacturer shall give minimum 15 days advance notice about readiness of material at his works. The material shall be inspected for conformity with Nigam specification before the same is accepted and dispatched. before Nigam may also carry out stage inspection of the MCBs For this the manufacturer shall intimate the
powder coating.
manufacturing schedule in advance. The manufacturer shall be responsible to pay penalty of Rs 20,000/- for each occasion at which the fake inspection call has been made Page 6 of 9
or the material is rejected during testing/inspection by the authorized agency/representative of the Nigam. This penalty would be in addition to the expenses incurred by the Nigam in deputing the Inspecting Officer, carrying out such inspection. 7 PACKING : The MCB shall be suitably packed in 3 ply corrugated boxes in order to avoid damage in transit, handling, storage and further transportation from store to field. 8. CHALLENGE CLAUSE: The material offered/received after the inspection by the authorized Inspecting Officer may again be subjected to the test for loses or any other parameters from any testing house/in house technique of the Nigam and the results if found deviating/unacceptable or non-complying to approved GTPs the bidder shall arrange to supply the replacement within 30 days of such detection at his cost including to & fro transportation. In addition , penalty @10% of cost of the inspected lot of material shall be imposed.
Page 7 of 9
Page 8 of 9
Page 9 of 9
Specification No. CSC-XXXXII/DH/UH/P&D/2009-2010
TECHNICAL SPECIFICAITON FOR Meter Cup Board (MCB) for outside usage for Single Phase Energy Meters
Issue of month:
Common Specification Committee UHBVN & DHBVN.
Page 1 of 10
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION IN RESPECT OF METER CUPBOARD (MCB) FOR SINGLE PHASE ENERGY METERS 1. SCOPE This specification covers the design, manufacture, inspection, testing and supply of MS sheet. Meter Cup Board (MCBs) for housing single phase energy meters for electric connections of General category i.e. Domestic & Commercial connections. 1.1 SERVICE CONDITIONS The Metal Meter Boxes to be supplied against this specification shall be suitable for satisfactory continuous operation under the following climatic conditions: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. Max. ambient air temperature Min. ambient air temperature Average Max. Daily ambient temperature Max. yearly temperature weighed average 600C (-)50C 400C ambient 320C 1000 26 95 120 900 mm 195 Kg./m Sq.
2. CONSTRUCTIONAL AND TECHNICAL PARTICULARS: 2.1 The MCBs shall conform to drawing attached as per Annexure-I to IV. It shall be dust and vermin proof for housing single phase energy meters of any make. The internal dimensions of MCB shall be 300mm x 250mm x 160 mm (i.e. height x width x depth). 2.2 The MCB shall be made from 20 SWG MS sheet by the following method: Deep Drawn Method: The base and cover of the MCB shall be individually in one piece without any welding except for fixing of the accessories like hinges, clamps, handle etc. which shall be spot welded. The cover of MCB shall be fixed on two tamper proof inside hinges not visible from outside. The hinge pin
diameter should be minimum 3mm; Hinges shall be made from min. 1.6mm MS sheet. The door of MCB shall open from right to left by
minimum 90.The collar of the door(cover) in closed position shall rest on Page 2 of 10
the collar of the body (base) of MCB. The collar of the door shall overlap the collar of the body of MCB by minimum 8mm. The collar of the body shall be provided with good quality rubber gasket lining of min. 3mm thickness.
Thickness of rubber lining shall be such that it provides proper sealing between the cover & base of MCB to avoid penetration of dust and ingress of water. Rubber lining should be fixed with suitable adhesive so that the same does not get removed by itself on opening of the door. Two No. sealing screws with rubber washer shall be provided to seal & hold the door and body of MCB. Head of sealing screws should have hole of 3mm. The fixing arrangement of the sealing screws shall consist of 1.6mm thick strip (Lshaped) welded from inner side of the body & another strip having L-shaped end with 3 mm hole welded from inner side of door of the MCB. The length of the extended portion of the strips shall be such that the sealing screws in tightened position are at a distance of about 5 mm from end of the collar of the cover. The sealing strips shall have additional hole of 5.5mm for riveting the cover and base of MCB. All the holes shall be properly aligned.
2.3
All the steel sections used in fabrication shall be carefully leveled and straightened before any works is done on them. No rough edges
shall be permitted anywhere through out the work. The material of MCB shall be capable to withstand mechanical, electrical and thermal stresses as well as the effects of humidity, which are likely to be encountered during its service. All the spot welding work shall be done carefully so as to avoid over heated spots, cavities, porosity burns and dents etc. The surface should be properly cleaned before welding and slag removed after welding.
2.4
A viewing window opening of the size 100x90 mm as indicated in the drawing shall be provided about 40mm below top edge of MCB to facilitate taking of meter readings. Viewing window shall be provided with toughened glass of 5mm thickness. Glass shall have scratch proof
DHBVN/ UHBVN logo on the right side top corner of the glass. This glass shall be fixed from inside of the cover of MCB, with single piece drawn metal frame (Glass Holder) made of 20 SWG MS sheet fixed with min. four screws. Glass holder shall have rectangular cuttings as per details shown in Annexure-III. The size of toughened glass shall be 120mm x110 mm so as to provide minimum overlap of 10mm. This glass has to be fitted with a Page 3 of 10
wrap around single piece rubber ring without joint having minimum depth of 8mm made from good quality rubber so as to with stand weather effect. 2.5 A handle of minimum 60mm length and 10mm width and 20 SWG sheet thickness should be provided for opening and closing of the cover at the place as shown in the drawing. 2.6 The mounting arrangement of the meter shall be as shown in the AnnexureII. It should be raised from the base of shall MCB body by 35mm thick
(minimum). The mounting
arrangement
have
3mm
adjustable slotted strip of Phenolic Laminated Sheet ( Bakelite) fixed with screws on the mounting arrangement. Adjustable slotted flat shall be provided with two MS screws (M4 x 25mm length) with nuts .And one screw ( M4 x 12mm length)shall be provided at upper point with Phenolic Laminated Strip for meter hanger.
2.7
Sealing arrangement as shown in drawing with a sealing screw of 5.0 mm diameter shall be provided for sealing of MCB .Head and Body of sealing screw shall have a hole suitable for sealing wire.
2.8
Four Nos. fixing holes of 6.5 mm diameter at the back surface of MCB shall be provided to fix the MCB at flat wall or surface. For fixing of MCB on flat wall, 4 Nos. 5mm diameter 40mm long pan head self taping screws and washers shall be provided by the supplier with every MCB. 4 Nos. plastic fixing plugs of 50mm length suitable for self-tapping screws shall also be provided. Alternately, for fixing of MCB on poles, suitable 4 No. zinc plated clamps shall also be provided with each box. Clamps shall have adjustable slotted arrangement for adjustment of variation in pole sizes. Clamps shall be provided with 4 Nos. M6 bolts and nuts for fixing of MCB with clamps. Suitable nuts, bolts and washers shall also be provided for fixing of clamps on the poles, Clamps, nuts & bolts shall be properly galvanized..
2.9
2 Nos. holes with superior quality plastic / rubber cable glands of internal diameter of 15mm each for incoming and outgoing cables shall be provided at the bottom of the MCB. Glands shall be properly fixed on the box
such that the same does not get removed from the box. Glands shall be Page 4 of 10
made such that internal diameter of glands provided for cables should be closed with the film of not less than 1mm thickness. Cable will go through the glands by piercing the film of the glands. 2.10 MCB shall be adequately protected against rust, dust water and corrosion both from inside and outside. The MCB shall have smoke grey shade on
outside and white on inside. The MCB shall be powder coated. Powder Coating: The surface of the MCB shall be properly pre-
treated and cleaned in 7 tank process (degreasing, water rinsing, de-rusting, water rinsing, phosphating, water rinsing, passivation) and shall be applied with a powder coating of suitable thickness on outer side and inside the box. 2.11 Earthing bolt of diameter 6 mm with nut and washer shall be provided in the threads of L-shape clamp welded to main body on left side. 2.12 2.13 All the screws and washers shall be properly galvanized. The tolerance permissible on the overall dimensions and weight of the MCB shall be (+/-) 2%. Provision for fixing of Communication port (9-pin D Connector) shall be provided on the front wall of the box. A window of the size suitable for Communication port shall be provided on the right side wall of lower portion such that communication port is fixed from inside of the front wall in vertical direction with two suitable screws and nuts. Communication port Window shall be located approximately 50 mm upward from bottom side and 50 mm from right side of the box. Communication port shall be covered with a Sealing arrangement from outside of the box. Sealing arrangement shall be fixed with two sealing screws of M4 threads to cover the communication port. Head of sealing screw shall have hole of 2.5mm for sealing wire. Suitable rubber packing shall be provided between the sealing arrangement and box wall in order to avoid any ingress of water. Any access to communication port shall only be after the removal of sealing arrangement.
2.14
Page 5 of 10
2.15
Push button arrangement shall be provided on the reading window glass of the MCB. Location of push button arrangement shall be approximately 70mm vertically downwards from top of the box and 35mm off centre from the centre line of the box towards sealing segment side of the box. Push button arrangement shall be suitable to press the push buttons of the meter 65mm below the glass level.
3.
DEGREE OF PROTECTION:
The MCB (including arrangement of push fit type button and sealing arrangement for optical port mentioned in Clause No. 2.15 & 2.16) shall comply with the requirement of IP-53 & its latest version. The MCB shall be fully type tested as per IP-53 & its latest version. All the type test shall be carried out from the Govt. approved laboratory which are accredited by the National Board of testing and calibration laboratories (NABL) of Govt. of India. The type test report shall be furnished along with the bid, failing which the tender shall not be entertained and liable to be rejected. The type test report shall not be older than 3 years on the date of opening of Tender. 4. DRAWING/SAMPLES One complete set of detailed dimensioned drawings of each offered item shall be submitted along with tender. arrangement purpose. 5. MARKING: DHBVN/ UHBVN insignia as shown in Annexure-IV shall be embossed on the MCB. The word DHBVN/ UHBVN shall be embossed on the Meter Cup Board. A notice with wording that There should be no cable joints inside the cabinet should be printed in Red on meter cup Board. A notice in Hindi with wording that got printed on the cover of the meter cup Board. 6. INSPECTION: The manufacturer shall give minimum 20 days advance notice about readiness of material at his works. The material shall be inspected for the pocket of the Enclosed drawings are only for general
should also be
conformity with DHBVN/UHBVN specification before the same is accepted and dispatched. DHBVN/UHBVN may also carry out stage inspection of the MCBs before powder coating. For this the manufacturer shall intimate the manufacturing schedule in advance. Page 6 of 10
The manufacturer shall be responsible to pay penalty of Rs 20,000/- for each occasion at which the fake inspection call has been made or the material is rejected during testing/inspection by the authorized agency/representative of the Nigam. This penalty would be in addition to the expenses incurred by the Nigam in deputing the Inspecting Officer, carrying out such inspection.
7.
PACKING : The MCB shall be suitably packed in 3 ply corrugated boxes in order to avoid damage in transit, handling, storage and further transportation from store to field.
8.
CHALLENGE CLAUSE: The material offered/received after the inspection by the authorized Inspecting Officer may again be subjected to the test for loses or any other parameters from any testing house/in house technique of the Nigam and the results if found deviating/unacceptable or non-complying to approved GTPs the bidder shall arrange to supply the replacement within 30 days of such detection at his cost including to & fro transportation. In addition , penalty @10% of cost of the inspected lot of material shall be imposed.
Page 7 of 10
Page 8 of 10
Page 9 of 10
ANNEXURE-IV
D H B V N / UHBVN
DHBVN / UHBVN INSIGNIA TO BE EMBOSSED ON THE DOOR OF MCB
Page 10 of 10
Specification No. CSC- XXXI/DH/UH/P&D/2009-2010
FOR
FOUR CORE AND TWO CORE XLPE CABLES of Various SIZES 16mm2, 10mm2 & 6mm2
INSULATED & XLPE SHEATHED ARMORED LT CABLES
Issue of the Month:
Page 1 of 16
TECHINCAL SPECIFICATION FOR FOUR CORE AND TWO CORE XLPE INSULATED & XLPE SHEATHED ARMORED CABLES. 1. SCOPE This section provides for manufacture, testing before dispatch, supply and delivery F.O.R. destination of Four Core & Twin Core size 16mm2, 10mm2 & 6mm2 XLPE insulated and XLPE Sheathed Armored circular LT cables with aluminum conductor suitable for working voltage up to & including 1100 Volts ISI Marked & Conforming to IS 7098 (Pt-I)/1988 with latest amendments. 2. STANDARDS Unless otherwise stipulated in this specification the following
standards with latest amendments shall be applicable. 2.1 IS: 7098(Pt-I)/1988 IS: 8130/1984 IS: 5831/1984 IS: 10810/1984 IS: 3975/1979 IS: 10418/1982 XLPE Insulated (Heavy Duty) Electric cable for Voltages up to and including 1100 Volts working Conductors for insulated cables. XLPE insulation and sheath of electric cables. Method of test for cables. Galvanized Steel Wire/Strips. Drums for electric cables.
2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6
3. CLIMATINC CONDITIONS: 3.1. 3.2. 3.3. 3.4. 3.5. 3.6. 3.7. 3.8. 3.9. Max. ambient air temperature Min. ambient air temperature Average Daily max. ambient temperature Max. yearly temperature weighted average 600C (-)50C 400C ambient 320C 1000 26 95 120 900 mm 195 Kg./m Sq.
Max. altitude above mean sea level (Meters) Minimum Relative Humidity (%age) Max. Relative Humidity (%age) Avg. No. of Rainy days/year Avg. annual rainfall
3.10. Maximum wind pressure
Note: Moderately hot & humid tropical climate conductive to rust & fungus growth. The climatic conditions are also prone to wide variations in ambient conditions. Smoke is also present in the atmosphere Heavy lightning also occurs during June to October.
Page 2 of 16
4. 4.1
GENERAL REQUIRMENT: The ISI marked XLPE Insulated Armored cables shall conform to IS: 7098(Pt-I)/1988 with latest amendment and bear BIS certification mark. The material used for construction of the cables shall be of best quality complying with the requirement of IS: 7098(Pt-I)/1988 and other relevant standards. installation the normal The free in cables air shall and be suitable be capable for of
outdoor/indoor withstanding
shall with
stresses
associated
transportation,
erection, reeling and unreeling operations without getting deformed. 4.2 The cable shall be suitable for use where combination of ambient temperature and temperature rise due to load results in a conductor temperature not exceeding 90 degree C under normal operation and 250 degree C under short circuit condition. 4.3 The XLPE Insulated Armored LT Cable shall be ISI marked. The tenderer (MANUFACTURER) must furnish valid ISI certificate along with offer. 5. 5.1 MATERIAL: CONDUCTOR The conductor shall be composed of aluminum wire complying with IS: 8130/1984 with latest amendments. 5.2 INSULATION Insulation shall be cross linked Polyethylene (XLPE) conforming to the requirements Table-I of IS: 7098/1984 with latest amendments. 5.3 FILLERS
5.3.1 The central hole/void, if any, of the cable shall be invariably filled with suitable filler material so that there is no gap in the center. 5.3.2 The filler shall be of vulcanized rubber, un-vulcanized rubber or Thermoplastic material and shall be provided to fill the gaps between cores. 5.3.3 The filler material shall be so chosen so as to be compatible with temperature of the cable and shall have no deleterious effect on other components of the cable. These shall not be harder than XLPE and PVC used for insulation and outer sheath respectively. 5.4. ARMOURING Armoring shall be of galvanized round steel wires for cable size 6 Sq.
Page 3 of 16
mm whereas Armoring shall be of galvanized steel strips for cable sizes above 6 Sq. mm. 5.5 OUTER SHEATH The outer sheath shall consist of type ST-2 XLPE Compound conforming to the requirements of IS: 5831/1984. 6. 6.1 CONSTRUCTION: CONDUCTOR The construction of the conductor shall be stranded for cable size 6 Sq. mm and above, as per Clause No. 8.1 of IS:7098(Pt-I)/1988 &
relevant clause of IS:8130/1984. A protective barrier may be applied between the conductor and insulation. Such barriers when used shall be compatible with insulating material and suitable for the operating temperature of the cable. 6.2 INSULATION : The conductor (with protective barrier, wherever applied) shall be provided with Cross-Linked Polyethylene (XLPE) insulation applied by extrusion. The insulation shall be so applied that it fits closely on the conductor and it shall be possible to remove it without damage to the conductor. The thickness and tolerance on thickness of insulation shall be as per clause No. 9.2 of IS: 7098 (Pt- I)/1988. 6.3 CORE IDENTIFICATION: The core shall be identified by different coloring of XLPE insulation as per Clause No. 10.1 of IS: 7098 (Pt-I)/ 1988. 6.4 LAYING UP OF CORES : The cores shall be laid up together with the suitable right hand lay. The interstices shall be filled with non-hygroscopic material. 6.5 INNER SHEATH (COMMON COVERING):
6.5.1 The laid up cores shall be provided with an inner sheath applied either by extrusion or by wrapping. It shall be ensured that it is as circular as possible. The thickness of inner sheath shall be as given in Table-5 of IS: 7098(Pt-I)/1988. 6.5.2 The inner sheath shall be so applied that it fits closely on the laid up cores and it shall be possible to remove it without damage to the insulation.
Page 4 of 16
6.6
ARMORING:
6.6.1 Application: Armoring shall be applied over the inner sheath. The armor wires/strips shall be applied as closely as possible. The direction of lay of armor shall be left hand. A Binder Tape may be provided on the armor. 6.6.2 Type of Armor & Dimension: The armor shall consist of galvanized round steel wires for cable size 4 Sq. mm & 6 Sq. mm whereas it shall be galvanized steel strips for cable size above 6 Sq. mm with the dimensions as specified in Table - 6 of IS:7098(Pt-I)/1988. 6.6.3 Joints: The joints in the armor wire / strips shall be made by brazing or welding and the surface irregularities shall be removed. A joint in any wire /
strips shall be at least 300 mm from the nearest joint in any other armor / wire in the completed cable. 6.7 OUTER SHEATH
6.7.1. The outer sheath shall be applied over the armouring. 6.7.2. The color of the outer sheath shall be black. 6.7.3. The minimum thickness of XLPE outer sheath shall not fall below the thickness specified in Table -8 of IS: 7098 (Pt-I) /1988. 7. 7.1 TESTS AND TEST CERTIFICATS: The cable should meet the requirement of all tests including optional tests as specified at Clause No. 15.4 of IS: 7098 (Pt. I) / 1988. 7.1.1 The following shall constitute routine tests: 7.1.1.1 7.1.1.2 Conductor resistance test. High Voltage test.
7.1.2 The following shall constitute Acceptance Tests: 7.1.2.1 7.1.2.2 7.1.2.3 7.1.2.4 7.1.2.5 7.1.2.6 7.1.2.7 7.1.2.8 Tensile test (for Aluminum). Wrapping test (for Aluminum). Conductor resistance test. Test for thickness of Insulation & Sheath. Tensile strength & elongation at break of Insulation & sheath. Insulation resistance (Volume Resistivity) test. High Voltage test. Hot Set Test for Insulation.
Page 5 of 16
7.1.2.9
Cold Bend Test for outer sheath.
7.1.2.10 Cold Impact Test for outer sheath. 7.1.3 The following shall constitute Type Tests: 7.1.3.1 Tests of Conductor
7.1.3.1.1 Tensile test (for aluminum) 7.1.3.1.2 Wrapping test (for aluminum) 7.1.3.1.3 Conductor resistance test. 7.1.3.2 7.1.3.3 Test for Armoring Wires/ Strips Test for thickness of insulation and sheath
7.1.4 Physical tests for insulation: 7.1.4.1 Tensile strength and elongation at 7.1.4.2 Ageing in air oven. 7.1.4.3 Hot Set test. 7.1.4.4 Shrinkage Test. 7.1.4.5 Water Absorption (Gravimetric). 7.1.5 Physical tests for Outer Sheath: 7.1.5.1 7.1.5.2 7.1.5.3 7.1.5.4 7.1.5.5 7.1.5.6 7.1.5.7 7.1.6 7.1.7 7.1.8 7.2 Tensile strength and elongation at break. Ageing in air oven. Loss of mass in air oven. Shrinkage Test. Hot Deformation Test. Heat shock Test. Thermal Stability. Insulation resistance (Volume Resistivity Test) High voltage test. Flammability test. The tenderer shall furnish latest complete type tests and optional test certificates as specified in Clause No. 15.4 of IS: 7098(Pt-I)/1988 (not older than three years as on the date of tender opening) for all sizes of offered LT XLPE ARMORED CABLES from NABL accredited testing laboratory with the tender offer otherwise their offer is likely to be ignored. 7.3 The tenderer must also clearly indicate various testing facilities available at their works for testing the material as per relevant standards. In case of otherwise, particulars of the place where such testing is proposed to be conducted during the course of inspection, shall be indicated with the offer.
Page 6 of 16
8 8.1
INSPECTION: The inspection may be carried out by the purchaser at any stage of manufacture. The successful tenderer shall grant free access to the purchasers representatives at a reasonable time when the work is in progress. Inspection and acceptance of any equipment / material under this specification by the purchaser shall not relieve the supplier of his obligation and of furnishing shall not equipment prevent in accordance with the rejection if the
specification
subsequent
equipment/material is found to be defective. 8.2 The supplier shall keep the purchaser informed in advance about the manufacturing program so that arrangement can be made for inspection. 8.3 The acceptance tests as per IS: 7098(Pt-I)/1988 shall also be conducted by the manufacturer before dispatch in the presence of purchasers Representative / Inspecting Officer as per relevant clause of General Conditions of Contract along with verification of lengths & weight and checking the manufacturing defects, if any of samples coils .The mass of aluminum, XLPE, PVC & Filler in sample coils shall also be verified by the Inspecting Officer(s). Cold bend/ cold impact test (IS: 5831/ 1984) shall constitute the optional tests and shall be conducted on each offered lot of the cables of each size as per Clause No. 15.4 of IS: 7098(Pt- I)/1988. 8.4 TYPE TESTS: The first lot offered shall not be less than 10% of ordered quantity of each size of LT XLPE ARMORED CABLE. One sample from the 1st Lot of LT XLPE ARMORED Cable of each size as received in purchasers store shall be selected and sealed by the inspecting officer nominated by purchasers for getting it type tested at any NABL accredited testing laboratory. The charges incurred
towards type test of the material received in our stores shall be borne by Supplier. In case sample from first lot fails then: 8.4.1 Supplier shall have to replace the full quantity of the respective inspected lot supplied to various stores and lying unused at stores. 8.4.2 For the quantity already utilized against the order in field a deduction @ 15% (Fifteen Percent) of F.O.R. Destination prices of the material supplied shall be made.
Page 7 of 16
8.4.3 Sample from next lot shall be selected again for type test. All test charges incurred towards type test of the material for second time shall be borne by the Supplier. In case sample again fails in the type test then further supplies shall not be accepted. 8.5 The purchaser reserves the right to insist for witnessing the acceptance /routine tests of the bought out items. 8.6 At least 5% of total numbers of drums subject to minimum of 2 in each lot put up for inspection shall be selected at random to ascertain the length/workmanship of cable by the following method: At the work of the manufacture, the cable shall be transferred from one drum to another for checking any manufacturing defects in the cable drum selected for conducting acceptance tests, at the same time measuring its length with the help of pulley & cyclometer graduated
in presence of inspector. The difference in the measured length thus obtained from the declared length by the supplier in the packing list shall be applied to all the drums if the cable is found short during checking the sample lot (s). 8.7 The supplier shall present the latest Calibration Certificate(s) of testing instruments/equipments to be used for the testing of the material covered in the Purchase Order to the authorized inspecting officer /inspecting agency of the purchaser. The testing instruments / meters /apparatus etc. should be got calibrated by the supplier from time to time from an independent testing laboratory / house having accreditation from National Accreditation Board for testing valid and
calibrating laboratories for the testing equipment or from original manufacturers having trace ability to NABL /NPL. The calibration
certificate(s) should not in any case be older than one year at the time of presenting the same to the inspecting officer / inspecting agency of the purchaser. The testing instruments / equipment should be duly
sealed by the Calibrating Agency and mention thereof shallbe indicated in the calibration certificate(s). 8.8 TEST CHECKING OF MATERIAL AT STORES:
8.8.1 SAMPLING: 8.8.1.1 One number out of each lot / sub-lot of 25 Nos. drums or pert thereof for cables of size 50 Sq. mm. and above.
Page 8 of 16
8.8.2 TESTS: The following tests shall be carried out: 8.8.2.1 8.8.2.2 8.8.2.3 Measurement of Resistance of conductor. Tensile & Elongation test for insulation. Thickness of Insulation.
8.8.3 CRITERIA FOR ACCEPTANCE: 8.8.3.1 If the measured conductor resistance of the sample(s) exceeds beyond 2% as per the resistance specified in the contract, the material shall be rejected and the same shall have to be replaced by the supplier.
8.8.3.2
If the measured conductor resistance of the sample(s) exceeds the value specified in the contract but does not exceed by more than 2% of the resistance value specified in the contract, the material pertaining to the relevant lot/ sub-lot to shall be accepted with a deduction @ 1.5% of the cost of cable for increase in resistance for every 1% or part thereof.
8.8.3.3
If the sample(s) fails in any other test, the material contained in the pertinent lot/sub-lot shall be rejected and shall have to be replaced by the supplier.
8.9
TEST CHARGES: All test charges incurred towards test checking of the material received in our stores shall be borne by the NIGAM.
8.10
The manufacturer shall be responsible to pay penalty of Rs 20,000/for each occasion at which the fake inspection call has been made or the material is rejected during testing/inspection by the authorized agency/representative of the Nigam. This penalty would be in addition to the expenses incurred by the Nigam in deputing the Inspecting Officer, carrying out such inspection.
9. 9.1
IDENTIFACTION: The manufacture shall be identified through-out the length of cables as per Clause No. 17.1 of IS: 7098(Pt-1)/1988.
9.2
In order to distinguish these electric cables from telephone cables, the word ELECTRIC shall be indicated, printed or embossed throughout the length of the cable on outer sheath.
Page 9 of 16
9.3
The cable code shall be provided as per Clause No. 17.3 of IS: 7098 (PtI)/1988.
9.4
The cable shall also be required to be embossed with the word Name of Manufacture or trade name, Cable code, Voltage Grade, DHBVN, size of cable, year of manufacture and ISI certification mark at every meter length for which no extra charges shall be paid.
10 10.1
PACKING AND MARKING: The cables shall be wound on non-returnable wooden drums
conforming to IS: 10418/1982 of suitable size and packed. The ends of the cable shall be sealed by means of non-hygroscopic sealing material. Only one cable length shall be supplied on a drum. 10.2 The cable shall carry the following information stenciled /painted on the drum: 10.2.1 10.2.2 10.2.3 10.2.4 10.2.5 10.2.6 10.2.7 10.2.8 10.2.9 10.2.10 10.2.11 10.2.12 Manufacturers name, Brand name or trade mark. Type of cable and voltage grade. Number of Cores. Nominal Cross-sectional area of the conductor. Cable Code. Length of cable on the drum. Approximate gross weight. Year of manufacture. BIS Certification marks. Name of the Consignee and full destination. Tender number/Purchase Order No. The word SUITABLE FOR OUTDOOR USE & LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS. 11. 11.1 STANDARD LENGTH: The cables shall be supplied in the standard length of 500 Metre for, 4CX16 Sq mm2, and 1000 Metre for size 4CX10Sq. mm2, 2CX16Sq. mm,2 2CX10 Sq. mm2, 4CX6 Sq. mm2 & 2C X 6 mm2. 11.2 11.3 A tolerance (+/-) 5 % shall be allowed in standard length. Only one cable length shall be acceptable by non-standard length measuring not less than 50% of standard length to complete the ordered quantity in each size.
Page 10 of 16
12
QUANTITY: The quantities as mentioned in the Schedule of requirement are tentative & these may increase/decrease as per the requirement of the Nigam.
13
QUANTITY TOLERANCE: The quantity tolerance of (+/-)2% shall be allowed in each size for completion of supply.
14.
GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS: The tenderer shall furnish guaranteed technical particulars in the relevant schedule.( Annexure I & II)
15.
CONSTRUCTIONAL DRAWINGS: The tenderer is required to furnish the detailed constructional drawing of the cable clearly showing shape of core, type and size of fillers/ interstices along with centre filler etc. In absence of this the tender is likely to be ignored.
16.
Challenge Clause:The material offered/received after the inspection by the authorized inspecting officer may again be subjected to the test for or any parameter from any testing house/in-house technique of the Nigam & the results if found deviating un-acceptable or not complying to approved GTPs the bidder shall arrange to supply the replacement within thirty (30) days of such detection at his cost including to & fro transportation. In addition , penalty @10% of cost of the inspected lot of material shall be imposed.
17.
Warranty Period:The supplier shall be responsible to replace, free of cost, with no transportation or insurance cost to the purchaser, up to destination, the whole or any part to the material which in normal and proper use proves the defective in quality or workmanship, subject to the condition that the defect is noticed within 18 months from the date of receipt of material in stores or 12 months from the date of commissioning whichever period may expire earlier. The consignee or nay other officer of Nigam actually using the material will give prompt notice of each such defect to the supplier. The replacement shall be effected by the supplier within a reasonable time, but not, in any case, exceeding 45 days/ The supplier shall, also, arrange to remove the defective within a reasonable period,
Page 11 of 16
but not exceeding 45 days from the date of issue of notice in respect thereof, failing which, the purchaser reserve the right to dispose of defective material in any manner considered fit by him (purchaser), at the sole risk and cost of the supplier. Any sale proceeds of the defective material after meeting the expenses incurred on its custody, disposal handling etc., shall however be credited to the suppliers account and set off against any outstanding dues of the purchaser against the supplier. The warranty for 12/18 months shall be one time. The specification no. CSC-XI/ considered withdrawn. DH/UH/P&D/2009-2010 be hereby
Page 12 of 16
ANNEXURE-III GUARANTEED TECHNICAL AND OTHER PARTICULARS FOR THE SUPPLY OF 4 CORE LT XLPE ARMOURED CABLES. S. PARTICULARS 4 CORE XLPE ARMOURND CABLES IN 4CX16 4CX10 4CX6 No 1 Manufacturers name and works address. 2 Standard specification to which the material shall 3 VOLTAGE GRADE. 4 NO. OF CORES. 5 CONDUCTOR DETAILS: A Normal cross section area of : 1 Phase Conductor (Sq.mm) 2 Neutral Conductor (Sq.mm) B No. and size of strands (in mm)of: 1 Phase Conductor (Sq.mm) 2 Neutral Conductor(Sq.mm) C SHAPE OF CONDUCTOR D Whether compacted or non compacted Resistance at 27 0c 1 Phase Conductor ohm/km 2 Neutral Conductor ohm/km INSULATION 1 Type 2 Colour 3 Thickness A Phase Conductor (sq.mm) 1 Nominal (mm) 2 Minimum (mm) B Neutral Conductor (Sq.mm) 1 Nominal (mm) 2 Minimum (mm) Type of inner sheathing and colour Whether Binder Tape provided Armoring A Type B Dimension (mm) Outer Sheath A Material B Thickness 1 Nominal (mm) 2 Minimum (mm) C Standard to which it Confirm A Type and size of filler used B MIN. WT. OF FILLER IN KG./KM MAX. OVERALL DIAMETER OF THE CABLE IN MM. Nature of Packing. DRUM A TARE WEIGHT OF DRUM B WHETHER DRUM IS WHELL C STANDARD SPECIFICATION TO WHICH D DRUM DETAILS & DIMENSIONS E Whether 2-Full Ply Flange Construction or 2-Full Ply plus 1 Segmental layer Flange Construction. 1 Drum size A Flange Diameter (d1) (mm) B Barrel Diameter (d2) (mm) C Centre hole Diameter (d3) (mm) D Overall with (L1) (mm) (L2) (mm) F Travers E
7 8 9
10
11 12 13 14
Page 13 of 16
G Thickness of Flange H Barrel End (Supporting disc or 1 Diameter (mm) 2 Thickness (mm) I Stretchers (core carrier Planks ) 1 Number (Min) 2 Thickness x width (mm) J Barrel Battens thickness (core K Barrel Middle Supports (Middle L Thickness of External Lagging. 2 DETAILS OF METAL A Clamping Studs with 1 Numbers 2 Diameter (mm) B Square or Round Washers 1 Numbers 2 Diameter (mm) C M.S. Bushes 1 Numbers 2 Thickness of Sleeve (mm) 3 Dimension of Sleeve (mm 4 Number of Bolts 5 Diameters of Bolts D M.S. /C.I. Centre Plate 1 Numbers 2 Diameter of Bolts (mm) 3 Centre Plate Bolts. A Numbers B Diameter of Bolts (mm) Centre Hole Diameter (mm) Minimum Weight in kg/km 1 Aluminum 2 XLPE 3 PVC Standard Length of cable in metre & its Tolerance Whether material bears BIS Certification BIS License no. & validity. Embossing. Any other particulars.
E F
G H I J K
Page 14 of 16
ANNEXURE-III GURANTEED TECHNICAL AND OTHER PRTICULARS FOR THE SUPPLY OF 2 CORE LT XLPE ARMOURED CABLES.
S. No
1 2 3 4 5
PARTICULARS
Manufactures name and works address Standard specification to which the material shall confirm. VOLTAGE GRADE NO. OF CORES CONDUCTOR DETAILS: A Nominal cross section area of : 1 Phase Conductor (Sq.mm) 2 Neutral Conductor (Sq.mm) B No. and size of strands (in mm)of: 1 Phase Conductor (sq.mm) 2 Neutral Conductor (Sq.mm) C SHAPE OF CONDUCTOR D Whether compacted or non compacted E Resistance at 27 0C 1 Phase Conductor ohm/km 2 Neutral Conductor ohm/km INSULATION A Type B Colour C Thickness 1 Phase Conductor (sq.mm) 1.1 Nominal (mm) 1.2 Minimum (mm) 2 Neutral Conductor (sq.mm) 2.1 Nominal (mm) 2.2 Minimum (mm) Type of inner sheathing and colour Whether Binder Tape provided Armoring A Type B Dimension (mm) Outer Sheath A Material B Thickness 1 Nominal (mm) 2 Minimum (mm) C Standard to which it Confirm A Type and size or filler used B MIN. WT. OF FILLER IN KG./KM. MAX. OVERALL DIAMETER OF THE CABLE IN MM. Nature of Packing DRUM A TARE WEIGHT OF DRUM B WHETHER DRUM IS WHEEL MOUNTED. C D E STANDARD SPECIFICATION TO WHICH DRUM DRUM DETAILS 8 DIMENSIONS Whether 2-Full Ply Flange Construction or 2-Full Ply plus 1 Segmental layer Flange Construction. 1 A B C D Drum size Flange Diameter (d1) (mm) Barrel Diameter (d2) (mm) Centre hole Diameter (d3) (mm) Overall with (L1) (mm)
2CORE XLPE ARMOURND CABLES IN SQ MM 2 2Cx10 mm2 2Cx6 mm2 2Cx16 mm
7 8 9
10
11 12 13 14
Page 15 of 16
Travers (L2) (mm) Thickness of Flange Barrel End (Supporting disc or core segment ) 1 Diameter (mm) 2 Thickness (mm) H Stretchers (core carrier Planks ) 1 Number (Min) 2 Thickness X width (mm) Barrel Battens thickness (core filler Planks) I J Barrel Middle Supports (Middle core discs ) K Thickness of External Lagging. (mm) DETAILS OF METAL COMPONENTS : A Clamping Studs with Hexagonal Nuts 1 Numbers 2 Diameter (mm) B Square or Round Washers 1 Numbers 2 Diameter (mm) C M.S. Bushes 1 Numbers 2 Thickness of Sleeve (mm) 3 Dimension of Sleeve (mm) 4 Number of Bolts 5 Diameters of Bolts D M.S. /C.I. Centre Plate 1 Numbers 2 Dimensions of Square /Triangular equal sides 3 Centre Plate Bolts. 3.1 Numbers 3.2 Diameter of Bolts (mm) E Centre Hole Diameter (mm) F Minimum Weight in Kg. /Km 1 Aluminum 2 XLPE 3 PVC G Standard Length of cable in meters & its H Whether material bears BIS Certification BIS License no. & validity I J Embossing K Any other particulars E F G
Page 16 of 16
SECTION VII-D
DRAWINGS
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45

Bid Volume - II Sec Vii Ted-151

Enviado por

Dados do documento

Descrição original:

Título original

Direitos autorais

Formatos disponíveis

Compartilhar este documento

Compartilhar ou incorporar documento

Opções de compartilhamento

Você considera este documento útil?

Este conteúdo é inapropriado?

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

Bid Volume - II Sec Vii Ted-151

Enviado por

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

SPECIFICATIONS

BID NO. P&D/TED 151/2012

DAKSHIN HARYANA BIJLI VITRAN NIGAM HISAR

BID VOLUME-II SEC VII TED-150

BID VOLUME-II SEC VII TED-150

BID VOLUME-II SEC VII TED-150

description of procedure to be deployed for stringing operation.

BID VOLUME-II SEC VII TED-150

BID VOLUME-II SEC VII TED-150

BID VOLUME-II SEC VII TED-150

The codes or standards referred to in this

3. 3.1 Sr. No. 1 2

BID VOLUME-II SEC VII TED-150

6 Nos. 6 Nos 4 Nos. 2 Nos. 1 No.

Tentative Bill of material for each Package is as per Annexure/Schedule of Prices.

All steel items shall be conform to IS:2062 Grade-A (amended

Drawings: The design and drawings submitted by the Contractor shall be

BID VOLUME-II SEC VII TED-150

BID VOLUME-II SEC VII TED-150

BID VOLUME-II SEC VII TED-150

Foundation back-filled and rammed with excavated/borrowed

BID VOLUME-II SEC VII TED-150

BID VOLUME-II SEC VII TED-150

BID VOLUME-II SEC VII TED-150

BID VOLUME-II SEC VII TED-150

BID VOLUME-II SEC VII TED-150

BID VOLUME-II SEC VII TED-150

Comprehensive Automobile Insurance

This insurance shall be in such a form to

protect the Contractor

BID VOLUME-II SEC VII TED-150

Fatal Injury or accident causing death

Rs. 1,00,000/per person

Major injuries or accident causing 25% or more

Rs. 20,000/per person

to any person whosoever

BID VOLUME-II SEC VII TED-150

Technical Specification of Equipments

BID VOLUME-II SEC VII TED-150

Specification No. CSC-VII-R-I/DH/UH/P&D/2009-10

PCC POLES 8/9 METER LONG

(WL-200 K.G. F.O.S-2.5)

Issue of the Month: May 2010 (CSC Approval date 23.4.2010)

Common Specifications Committee UHVN & DHBVN

Technical specification for PCC Poles (F.O.S. 2.5) 8/9 M Length

Checking of cover & steel

General Manager/P&D Cum-Member Secretary CSC UHBVN, Panchkula.

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12.

cm cm cm. no. no.

m3/pole kg/pole kg/pole

TECHNICALSPECIFCATION FOR HARDDRAWNSTRANDEDSTEELCORED ALUMUINIUMCODUCTORS(20,30&50mm2)

(CSC approval date 23.4.2010)

FORdestination,ofSquirrel20mm2,weasel30mm2&Rabbit50mm2ACSRconductorforuseon11 kVmediumandlowtensionoverheadpowertransmissionlines. 2. APPLICABLESTANDARD: Exceptwhentheyconflictwiththespecificrequirements.Inthesespecifications,theconductors

Nominal Aluminium area

Nominal 1 mm2 2.11

Min. 2 mm2 2.09 2.56 3.32

Max. 3 mm2 2.13 2.62 3.38

5 mm2 9.45 14.24 23.82

1 mm 2.11 2.59 3.35 8.

Min. 2 mm 2.07 2.54 3.28

Before stranding 6 KN 4.60 6.92 11.58

After stranding 7 KN 4.37 6.57 11.00